Qur'anic Arabic - 1 [1952]

Table of contents :
1952 T.pdf
First page of the book.pdf
Quranic Arabic Book BS.pdf

Citation preview

‫ْ َ‬ ‫َر ْﻣ ُﺰ اﻟ ُﻤﻘ َّﺮ ُر‪١٩۵٢ :‬‬ ‫اَ ْﻟ َﻮ ْﺣ َﺪ ُ‬ ‫ات‪١ :‬۔‪٩‬‬

‫‪Code No: 1952‬‬ ‫‪Unit No: 1-9‬‬

‫‪QURANIC ARABIC‬‬ ‫ُ‬

‫َ ّ َ ُ ْ َ َ َّ ُ ْ ُ ْ ٓ َّ ُ‬ ‫اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﻌﺮ ِﺑﻴﺔ اﻟﻘﺮا ِﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪BS Islamic Studies‬‬

‫‪DR. ABDUL HAMEED KHAN ABBASI‬‬

‫ﻗﺴﻢ اﻟﻘﺮآن و اﻟﺘﻔﺴ‬ ‫ ﻠﯿﺔ اﻟﺪراﺳﺎت اﻹﺳﻼﻣﯿﺔ و اﻟﻠﻐﺔ اﻟﻌﺮﯿﺔ‬

‫ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ إﻗﺒﺎل اﳌﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ اﺳﻼم آﺑﺎد‬

‫‪ii‬‬

‫‬ ‫ ‬ ‫   ‬ ‫‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‬ ‫"!‪5000‬‬ ‫‪$%&            #‬‬ ‫�‬ ‫‬ ‫�‬ ‫ �  ا�  �ن‬ ‫) ('‬ ‫�‬ ‫‪  �� б +‬ا�ل  او�  �� ����ر�  ا�م  آ���د‬

‫ ‬ ‫ ‪! ,- ./ 01%&23456/7‬‬

iii

iv

COURSE TEAM

1. Chairman

Prof. Dr. Abdul Hameed Khan Abbasi Dean Faculty of Arabic & Islamic Studies Allama Iqbal Open University, Islamabad.

2. Author

3. Reviewer

Prof. Dr. Abdul Hameed Khan Abbasi

1.

Prof. Dr. Sami ul Haq Ex-Chairman Deptt of Tafseer & Uloom Ul Quran International Islamic University, Islamabad.

2.

Dr. Shahnaz Zaheer Incharge Department of Arabic, AIOU

3.

Dr. Abdul Majeed Bagdadi Assistant Professor Deptt of Arabic, AIOU

4.

Mr. Shakeel Ahmed Lecturer Deptt of Arabic, AIOU

4. Course Coordinator

Prof. Dr. Abdul Hameed Khan Abbasi

5. Editor

Fazal Karim

v

Table of Contents

S. No. 1. 2. 3.

The Contents Forward

ix xiii

Objectives of The Course Acknowledgement

5.

Unit NO. 01 The Nouns (1)

6.

The Noun and its kinds

7.

The Number of Nouns

8.

The Gender

9.

Questions

10.

Unit No.02.The Nouns (2)

11.

The Kinds of Pronoun (1)

12.

The Kinds of Pronoun (2)

13.

Questions

14.

Unit No.03.The Nouns (3) The Adjective Compound

16.

The Adjective Compound

17.

Questions

18.

Unit No.04-The Nouns (4)

19.

The Demonstrative Composite/Phrase

20.

The Genitive/Prepositional Composite

21.

The Addadi/Numeral Composite (1)

22.

The Addadi/Numeral Composite (2)

23.

Questions

24.

Unit No.05-The Nouns (5)

Page No viii

Course Introduction

4.

15.

َ ‫اَ ْﻟ ُﻤ ْﺤ َﺘ‬ ‫ﻮاي ُت‬

َ ْ ‫ اَ ْ َٔﻻ‬:‫اَ ْﻟ َﻮ ْﺣ َﺪ ُۃ اَ ُٔﻻ ٰﱄ‬ ُ ‫ﲰ‬ (1) ‫ﺎء‬

ُ 2ْ َ َٔ‫ﰟ َوا‬ ُ ْ ‫ اَ ْﻻ‬1.1 ‫اﻋ ُﻪ‬ ٕ َ ْ ٔ َ ْ ‫ َﻋ َﺪ ُد اﻻ‬1.2 ‫ﲰﺎء‬ ْ ْ ‫اﳉﻨ ُﺲ‬ ِ 1.3 َ َُ ٔ َ ‫ اﻻ ْﺳﺌِﻠﺔ‬1.4

َٔ ْ َ َ َ ّ ْ ُ َ ْ َ ْ َ ْ َ ُ (2)‫ اﻻﲰﺎء‬:‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪۃ اﻟﺜﺎ ِﻧﻴﺔ‬

َّ ْ َ ُ ْ َ (1) ‫اع اﻟﻀ َﻤﺎﺋ ُِﺮ‬2َ ‫ ا‬2.1 َّ ْ َ ُ ْ َ (2) ‫اع اﻟﻀ َﻤﺎﺋ ِِﺮ‬2َ ‫ ا‬2.2 ُ َ َٔ ْ ‫ اﻻ ْﺳﺌِﻠﺔ‬2.3

َّ ُ َ ْ َ ْ َ َ ْ ‫ اَ ْ َٔﻻ‬:‫اﻟﺜﺎﻟ َِﺜ ُﺔ‬ ُ ‫ﲰ‬ (3) ‫ﺎء‬ ‫ا ﻟﻮ ﺣ ﺪ ۃ‬

َ ُ ّ ِ ‫ﺐ ْاﻟ َّﺘ ْﻮ ِﺻ ْﻴ‬ ُ ‫ اَ ْﻟ ُﻤ َﺮ ّﻛ‬3.1 C

ُّ َ ْ ُ َّ َ ُ ْ َ ‫ﺎﰲ‬ ِ ‫اﻻﺿ‬ ِ ‫ اﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‬3.2 َ َٔ َ ‫ اﻻ ْﺳﺌِﻠﺔ‬3.3

َ ْ ‫ اَ ْ َٔﻻ‬:‫اَ ْﻟ َﻮ ْﺣ َﺪ ُۃ اﻟﺮاﺑﻌﺔ‬ ُ ‫ﲰ‬ (4)‫ﺎء‬

ُ َ ْ ُ َّ َ ُ ْ َ ‫اﻻﺷﺎ ِر ّى‬ ِٕ ‫ اﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‬4.1 ُ ْ ُ َّ َ ُ ْ َ ‫ﺐ اﳉَﺎ ِر ّى‬ ‫ اﻟﻤﺮﻛ‬4.2 ْ ُ َّ َ ُ ْ َ ُ (1)‫ﺐ اﻟ َﻌ َﺪ ِد ّى‬ ‫ اﻟﻤﺮﻛ‬4.3 ْ ُ َّ َ ُ ْ َ ُ (2)‫ﺐ اﻟ َﻌ َﺪ ِد ّى‬ ‫ اﻟﻤﺮﻛ‬4.4 ُ َ َٔ َ ‫ اﻻ ْﺳﺌِﻠﺔ‬4.5

َ ْ ‫اَ ْ َٔﻻ‬:‫اَ ْﻟ َﻮ ْﺣ َﺪ ُۃ اَﳋَﺎ ِﻣ َﺴ ُﺔ‬ ُ ‫ﲰ‬ (5)‫ﺎء‬

xiv 01-28 02 16 23 28 29-64 30 40 63 65-88 66 78 88 89-126 90 99 101 116 125 127-160

vi

25.

Parts of the Nominal Sentence

26.

The I’raab of the Noun

27.

The I’raab of the Noun

28.

The Declinable and the Indeclinable

29.

Questions

30.

Unit No.06: The Tenses (1)

31.

Definition of the Past Tense

32.

Kinds of the Past Tense

33.

Questions

34.

Unit No.07: The Tenses (2)

35.

The Present Tense

36.

Kinds of the Present Tense

37.

The Other Kinds (Forms) of Present Tense (1)

38.

he Other Kinds (Forms) of the Present Tense (2)

39.

Questions

40.

Unit No.08: The Tenses (3)

41.

The Imperative

42.

The Negative Imperative

43.

Active Participle

44.

The Passive Participle

45.

The Verbal Sentence

46.

Questions

47.

Unit No.09: The Letters

48.

The Letters

49.

The Lunar and the Solar Letters and the Preposition

ْ َ ْ ُ َْ َ ْ َ ‫اﻻ ْﲰ ّ َِﻴ ِﺔ‬ ِٕ ‫ اﺟﺰ ُاءاﳉﻤﻠ ِﺔ‬5.1 ْ ُ َْ ِ ْ ‫اﻻ‬ ‫ﰟ‬ ٕ ‫ ٕاﻋﺮاب‬5.2 ُ ‫ اَ ْﻻ ْﻋ َﺮ‬5.3 ُ ‫اب َو اﻟ ِﺒ َﻨ‬ ‫ﺎء‬ ٕ ْ ُ ّ ِ ‫ اَ ْﻟ ُﻤ ْﻌ َﺮ ُب َو اﻟ َﻤ ْﺒ‬5.4 ‫ﲎ‬ ُ َ َٔ َ ‫ اﻻ ْﺳﺌِﻠﺔ‬5.5

ُ ْ َٔ ْ َ ُ ّ ‫اَ ْﻟ َﻮ ْﺣ َﺪ ُۃ‬ (1)‫ اﻻﻓ َﻌﺎل‬: ‫اﻟﺴﺎ ِد َﺳﺔ‬

َْ ْ ْ ُْ َْ ‫ﺎﴇ‬ ِ ِ ‫ ﺗﻌ ِﺮﻳﻒ اﻟ ِﻔﻌ ِﻞ اﻟﻤ‬6.1 َ ْ ْ ْ ُ َ َْ ‫ﺎﴇ‬ ِ ِ ‫ اﻗﺴﺎم اﻟ ِﻔﻌ ِﻞ اﻟﻤ‬6.2 ُ َ َٔ َ ‫ اﻻ ْﺳﺌِﻠﺔ‬6.3

ُ ْ َٔ ْ َ ُ َ ْ ُ َْ (2)‫ اﻻﻓ َﻌﺎل‬: ‫اﻟ َﻮ ْﺣ َﺪۃ اﻟ ّﺴﺎ ِﺑﻌﺔ‬

ُ َ ْ ُ َْ ‫ اﻟ ِﻔ ْﻌﻞ اﻟ ُﻤﻀﺎ ِرع‬7.1 ْ ُ َ َْ َ ْ ‫ﺎم اﻟ ِﻔ ْﻌ ِﻞ اﻟ ُﻤﻀﺎ ِر ِع‬ ‫ اﻗﺴ‬7.2 ُ ْ ُ َْ ٔ َ ْ ‫اع اﻟ ِﻔ ْﻌ ِﻞ اﻟ ُﻤﻀﺎ ِر ِع اﻻ ْﺧ َﺮى‬2َ ‫ ا‬7.3

ُٔ ْ ْ ُ َْ َ ْ ٰ ‫اﻻ ْﺧ‬ (2)‫ﺮى‬ ‫اع اﻟ ِﻔ ْﻌ ِﻞ اﻟ ُﻤﻀﺎ ِر ِع‬2َ ‫ ا‬7.4

َ َٔ َ ‫ اﻻ ْﺳﺌِﻠﺔ‬7.5

ُ ْ َٔ ْ َ ُ َ ّ ُ َْ (3) ‫ اﻻﻓ َﻌﺎل‬: ‫اﻟ َﻮ ْﺣ َﺪۃ اﻟﺜﺎ ِﻣ َﻨﺔ‬

َٔ ْ ُ ‫ ﻓ ِْﻌﻞ اﻻ ْﻣ ِﺮ‬8.1 ْ َّ ‫ ﻓ ِْﻌ ُﻞ‬8.2 ‫اﻟﳯ ِﻰ‬ َْ ُْ ‫ِﰟ اﻟﻔﺎﻋ ِِﻞ‬ ‫ ا‬8.3 ْ ْ ُْ ‫ِﰟ اﻟ َﻤﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮ ِل‬ ‫ ا‬8.4 ُ َّ ْ ْ ُ َ ْ ُ ْ َ ‫ اﳉﻤﻠﺔ اﻟ ِﻔﻌ ِﻠﻴﺔ‬8.5 ُ َ َٔ َ ‫ اﻻ ْﺳﺌِﻠﺔ‬8.6

ُ ْ َ ُ َّ ُ َ ْ َ ْ َ ‫ اﳊُ ُﺮ ْوف‬:‫ﺎﺳ َﻌﺔ‬ ِ ‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪۃ اﻟﺘ‬

ُ َْ ‫ اﳊُ ُﺮ ْوف‬9.1 ُ ْ ُ َ َ ْ ُ َْ ‫ اﳊُ ُﺮ ْوف اﻟﻘ َﻤ ِﺮ ّﻳﺔ َواﳊُ ُﺮ ْوف‬9.2 ُ َ َ ُ ُ ُ ْ َ ُ َّ ْ َّ َ ‫ﺎرة‬ ‫اﻟﺸﻤ ِﺴﻴﺔ و اﳊﺮوف اﳉ‬

128 140 150 152 159 161-172 164 164 172 173-208 176 176 181 194 206 209-252 210 222 229 229 240 251 253-293 254 256

vii

50.

The Prepositions

51.

The Arabic Words other than The Preposition

52.

The Six Particles Similar to a Verb

53.

The Interrogative

54.

Questions

ُ َ َ ُ ُ ُ َْ ‫ﺎرة‬ ‫ اﳊﺮوف اﳉ‬9.3

ُ َ َٔ ْ َ َ َ‫ﲑ ْاﳊُ ُﺮ ْو ِف ْاﳉ‬ َ ْ ‫ﺎظ ْاﻟ َﻌ َﺮ ِﺑ َﻴ ُﺔ َﻏ‬ ‫ﺎر ِة‬ ‫ اﻻﻟﻔ‬9.4

ْ ُ َ ّ ُ َ َّ َ ُ ْ ُ ْ ُ ُ ْ َ ‫اﻟﺴﺘﺔ ِابﻟ ِﻔ ْﻌ ِﻞ‬ ِ ‫ اﳊﺮوف اﻟﻤﺸﳢﺔ‬9.5 ْ ْ ُ َ َْ ‫ﺎم‬ ِ ‫اﻻ ْﺳ ِﺘﻔ َﻬ‬ ِٕ ‫ ادوات‬9.6 ُ َ َٔ َ ‫ اﻻ ْﺳﺌِﻠﺔ‬9.7

257 268 282 284 291

viii




          

         

  !    "             #$   $ % &            %%   

'     (       )      !         " * & + % %   , -   )  

        % &   )    (                               . % &          )       )      /   (!             

  0        % &     ) (   !                 !         "     %
!  (  )   )        )             )         "            !%  !    

  !     " 

&  (    !   !%

+ % % 1  2 2"!! 3       4

ix

COURSE INTRODUCTION All Praises are for Allah. We praise Him and seek His assistance. May the Salah and Salam be ٰ ‫ﺎﻧﻪ و‬n) and all those who follow the prophetic path until the upon the messenger of Allah (‫ﺗﻌﺎﱄ‬ Last Day. Amma ba’d: ٰ ‫ﺎﻧﻪ و‬n) revealed Al-Quran Al-Hakeem to Arabic Language is the language in which Allah (‫ﺗﻌﺎﱄ‬ ٰ ‫ﺎﻧﻪ و‬n) preferred this blessed Muhammad ‫ ﷺ‬for the guidance of all mankind. Allah (‫ﺗﻌﺎﱄ‬ language, as He states in the Quran.



                  ﴿ >4;;K4u‘”

3. 4. 5.

“O my Lord! Expand for me my chest (grant me self confidence, contentment, and boldness). And ease my task for me” (20:25, 26). To remove the idea from mind that learning of Arabic is difficult. To understand the objective of learning Arabic only for understanding the teachings of Al-Quran Al-Hakim. To repent and refrain from committing sins. If you desire to cope with these attributes, consciously, then you must start to read and study this Quranic Arabic book. The main objective of this book is to enable the students of BS Islamic Studies and the other sincere brothers and sisters in Islam who want to learn Quranic Arabic with basic grammar to understand Al-Quran Al-Hakeem and the Sunnah of the last Prophet Muhammad (‫)ﷺ‬.

This Course book "Quranic Arabic Consists of the following three parts: 1. 1.11.21.3-

َ

َ

ُ 2َ ‫ﰟ ُو ا‬ ُ ْ ‫)ا ﻻ‬ Unit No 1 to 5, is about noun and its Kinds (‫اﻋ ُﻪ‬ ِ

ِْ Definition of the noun (‫ﺳ ِﻢ‬ ْ ‫اﻹ‬

‫ﻒ‬ ُ ْ‫)ﺗَـ ْﻌ ِﺮﻳ‬. ِْ ‫ﺎت‬ Signs of the noun (‫ﺳ ِﻢ‬ ُ ‫) َﻋﻼََﻣ‬. ْ ‫اﻹ‬

Different kinds of noun like: the definite (proper) noun (‫اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَ ِﺔ‬

‫)اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬. ِ ‫)اِﺳﻢ اﻟ َﻔ‬. The active noun (‫ﺎﻋﻞ‬ ُْ ِ The passive noun ‫اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮل‬ The Instrument noun ‫اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻵﻟَ ِﺔ‬ ِ ‫)اِﺳﻢ اﻟﺘَـ ْﻔ‬. The comparative noun (‫ﻀْﻴ ِﻞ‬ ُْ The Exaggeration noun (‫)اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟْ ُﻤﺒَﺎﻟَﻐَ ِﺔ‬.

ِ ‫اﻟﻨ‬ (common) noun (ِ‫ﱠﻜ َﺮة‬ 1.41.51.61.71.81.9-

ِ ‫اﻟْﻤ ْﻠ‬ The Relative noun (‫ﻜﻴﱠ ِﺔ‬ ُ

‫)اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬.

ِ ‫)اِﺳﻢ اﻟْﻤ َﻜ‬. ‫ﺎن‬ َ ُْ ِ ‫)و‬, Dual (ٌ‫)ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴﺔ‬, plural (‫)ﲨَْﻊ‬. ِْ ‫) َﻋ َﺪ ُد‬: Singular (‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ The number of nouns (‫اﻹ ْﺳ ِﻢ‬ ٌ َ َ

ِ ‫واﻟﱠﺰﻣ‬ 1.10- The noun of place and time (‫ﺎن‬ َ 1.11-

‫)اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬, Indefinite

xi

‫اَﻟْ ُﻤ َﺬ ﱠ‬ 1.12- The Gender (‫)اَ ْﳉِْﻨﺲ‬: The Masculine gender (‫ﻛ ُﺮ‬ ُ ِ gender (‫ﱠﺚ‬ ُ ‫ﺲ اَﻟْ ُﻤﺆﻧ‬ ُ ‫)اَ ْﳉْﻨ‬

َْ

ِ ‫ﺲ‬ ُ ‫)اَ ْﳉْﻨ‬

and the feminine

َّ ْ َ

ُ 2َ ‫ )اﻟﻀ َﻤﺎﺋ ُِﺮ َو ا‬like : The detached and attached 1.13- The Pronouns and its kinds (‫اﻋ َﻬﺎ‬

ِ ‫واﻟْﻤﺘ‬ pronouns (ُ‫ﱠﺼﻠَﺔ‬ ُ َ

ِ ‫)ﺿﻤﺎﺋِﺮ اﻟْﻤ ْﻠ‬, the ِ ‫)اَﻟْﻀﱠﻤﺎﺋِﺮ اﻟْﻤْﻨـ َﻔ‬, the Possessive pronouns (‫ﻜﻴﱠ ِﺔ‬ ُ‫ﺼﻠَﺔ‬ ُ ُ َ ُ ََ

Interrogative pronouns ‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋُِﺮ‬ َ ), the ِ ِ ), the reflexive pronouns (ُ‫اﻻﻧﻌِ َﻜﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ِْ ‫ )اَﻟﻀﱠﻤﺎﺋِﺮ‬and the objective ِ ‫اﻻ ْﺳﺘَـ ْﻔﻬ‬ (‫ﺎم‬ َ َ ْ ‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋ ُﺮ‬ َ ُ َ pronouns (‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋِﺮ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮِل ﺑِِﻪ‬ ُ َ ).

demonstrative pronouns (‫ﺎرِة‬ َ َ‫ا‬ َ ‫ﻹﺷ‬

ِ ِ ‫ﺿﺎﻓِ ﱡﯽ‬ َ ‫ﺐ اﻟْﺘـ ْﱠﻮ ِﺻْﻴﻔ ﱡﻰ َو ْالا‬ ُ ‫)اَﻟْ ُﻤَﺮﱠﻛ‬. ِْ ‫)اَﻟْﻤﺮﱠﻛﺐ‬. The Demonstrative composite (‫ى‬ ‫اﻹ َﺷﺎ ِر ﱡ‬ ُ َُ The genitive / Prepositional composite (‫ى‬ ْ ‫ﺐ‬ ‫اﳉَﺎ ِر ﱡ‬ ُ ‫)اَﻟْ ُﻤَﺮﱠﻛ‬. The numeral composite (‫ى‬ ‫ﺐ اﻟْ َﻌ َﺪ ِد ﱡ‬ ُ ‫)اَﻟْ ُﻤَﺮﱠﻛ‬. ِْ ‫اﻹ‬ ِْ ُ‫)اَ ْﳉُ ْﻤﻠَﺔ‬. The nominal sentence (ُ‫ﲰﻴﱠﺔ‬ The I'raab of the noun (‫اب ْاﻹ ْﺳ ِﻢ‬ ْ ). ُ ‫إﻋَﺮ‬ The declinable and the Indeclinable (‫ﲎ‬ ‫ب َو اﻟْ َﻤْﺒ ِ ﱡ‬ ُ ‫)اَﻟْ ُﻤ ْﻌَﺮ‬.

1.14- The Adjective and Relative compound ( 1.151.161.171.181.191.202.

Unite No. 6 to 8 is about verb/Tense and its different forms َْ َُ ُ َ ‫ اَ ْﻟ َﺰ‬/ ‫) اَ ْﻟ َﻔ ِﻌ ُﻞ‬: (‫ َو ُﺻ ْﻮ َر ُە اﻟ ُﻤ ْﺨ َﺘ ِﻠﻔﺔ‬q 2.12.22.32.42.52.62.72.82.92.102.112.12-

ِ ِ ُ ‫)اَﻟْﻔ ْﻌ ُﻞ اﻟْ َﻤﺎﺿ ُﻰ‬. ِ ِ The passive past tense (‫ﺠ ُﻬ ْﻮ ُل‬ ْ ‫)اَﻟْﻔ ْﻌ ُﻞ اﻟْ َﻤﺎﺿ ُﻰ اَﻟْ ُﻤ‬. ِ ِ The Near Past Tense (‫ﺐ‬ ُ ْ‫)اَﻟْﻔ ْﻌ ُﻞ اﻟْ َﻤﺎﺿ ُﻰ اﻟْ َﻘ ِﺮﻳ‬. ِ ِ The Distant Past Tense (‫ﺎﺿﻰ اﻟْﺒَﻌِْﻴ ُﺪ‬ ُ ‫)اَﻟْﻔ ْﻌ ُﻞ اﻟْ َﻤ‬. ِ ‫)اَﻟْ ِﻔﻌﻞ اﻟْﻤ‬. The Negative Past Tense (‫ﺎﺿﻰ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻨ ِﻔﻰ‬ َ ُْ ُ ِ ِ ِ The past continuous Tense (‫ى‬ ُ ‫)اَﻟْﻔ ْﻌ ُﻞ اﻟْ َﻤﺎﺿ ُﻰ ا ْﳉَﺎر‬.

The Active past tense (‫ف‬ ُ ‫اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﻌﺮ‬

‫)اَﻟْ ِﻔ ْﻌ ُﻞ‬. ِ The Present Tense - Passive voice (‫ﺠ ُﻬ ْﻮ ُل‬ َ ‫)اَﻟْﻔ ْﻌ ُﻞ اﻟْ ُﻤ‬. ْ ‫ﻀﺎ ِرعُ اﻟْ َﻤ‬ ِ The Other kinds of present tense (‫ﺮى‬ ٰ ‫ُﺧ‬ َ ‫)اَﻧْـ َﻮاعُ اﻟْﻔ ْﻌ ِﻞ اﻟْ ُﻤ‬. ْ ‫ﻀﺎ ِرِع ْاﻷ‬ The Imperative verb (‫)ﻓِ ْﻌﻞ ْاﻷ َْﻣ ِﺮ‬. ُ ِ The Negative Imperative (‫ﱠﻬ ِﻰ‬ ْ ‫)ﻓ ْﻌ ُﻞ اﻟﻨـ‬. ِ ‫)اِﺳﻢ اﻟْ َﻔ‬ The Active participle(‫ﺎﻋ ِﻞ‬ ُْ

The present tense - Active voice (‫ف‬ ُ ‫ﻀﺎ ِرعُ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻌ ُﺮْو‬ َ ‫اﻟْ ُﻤ‬

xii

‫)اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬. The verbal sentence (ُ‫)اَ ْﳉُ ْﻤﻠَﺔُ اﻟْ ِﻔ ْﻌﻠِﻴﱠﺔ‬.

2.13- The Passive participle (‫اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮِل‬ 2.143.

ُ ‫)ا َ ْﳊُ ُﺮ ْو ُف َو ا َ ْﻗ َﺴ‬. Unit No. 9 is about the letters and its kinds (‫ﺎﻣ َﻬﺎ‬

3.1-

The Lunar Letters (ُ‫اﻟْ َﻘ َﻤ ِﺮﻳﱠﺔ‬

3.23.33.43.53.6-

‫ف‬ ُ ‫)اَ ْﳊُُﺮْو‬. The solar Letters (ُ‫ﱠﻤ ِﺴﻴﱠﺔ‬ ْ ). ُ ‫اﳊُُﺮْو‬ ْ ‫ف اَﻟﺸ‬ The Prepositional Letters (ُ‫ﺎرة‬ ْ ). ُ ‫اﳊُُﺮ‬ َ َ‫وف اﳉ‬

ِ ‫ف(اْﻟﻌﺮِﺑﻴُﺔ َﻏﲑ ْاﳊﺮو‬ The Arabic words other then the preposition (‫اﳉَ َﺎرِة‬ ْ ‫ف‬ ُ ‫)اَْﻷَﻟَﻔ‬. ُُْ َ ْ َ ََ ُ ‫ﺎظ) ْاﳊُُﺮْو‬

ِ The Six Particles similar to a verb (‫اﻟﺴﺘَﺔُ ِ]ﻟْ ِﻔ ْﻌ ِﻞ‬ ّ ُ‫اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺸﺒﱠـ َﻬﺔ‬

ِْ The Interrogative words (‫اﻹ ْﺳﺘِ ْﻔ َﻬ ِﺎم‬

‫ات‬ ُ ‫)اََد َو‬.

‫ف‬ ُ ‫)اَ ْﳊُُﺮْو‬.

Therefore, students of BS Islamic Studies and the other respectable readers are requested to give suggestions for more improvement of this book. Their valuable suggestions will be acknowledged and incorporated in the upcoming edition. In the end, I pray that my this endeavor may offer benefits to everyone (Ameen).

Prof. Dr. Abdul Hameed Khan Abbasi Dean Faculty of Arabic & Islamic Studies, AIOU, Islamabad.

xiii

OBJECTIVES OF THE COURSE Dear Student’s with the help and the grace of Allah Almighty, when you complete the study of 09 unites of this courses book completely and thoroughly, you will achieve easily the following objectives and In’Shah’Allah you will be able:

ُ َ ْ ْ َ ُ ُ ْ َٔ

ْ َْ

ُ ‫ )اﻻ‬mentioned above َ ‫ﰟ َوا‬ 1. To know the noun and its different kinds (‫ﻋﻪ اﻟ ُﻤﺨ َﺘ ِﻠﻔﺔ‬2 ِ under the title of course introduction. ُ َ ْ ْ َ ُ َ ْ ٔ َ ُ َ َّ ْ َ ُ ْ ْ َ 2. To know the verb/tense and its different forms (‫ﺎﻣ ُﻪ اﻟ ُﻤﺨ َﺘ ِﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫ و اﻗﺴ‬q‫ اﻟﺰ‬/‫)اﻟ ِﻔﻌﻞ‬ mentioned above in the 2nd part of course Introduction. ُ َ ْ َْ ُ َْ 3. To know the letters and its different shapes (‫ )اﳊُ ُﺮ ْوف َو ُﺻ َﻮ ُر َﮬﺎ اﻟ ُﻤﺨ َﺘ ِﻠﻔﺔ‬described above in 3rd part of course Introduction.

xiv

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

All thanks to the Almighty Allah for his kindness and blessing to enable me to accomplish this book “Quranic Arabic” which is the most important source for understanding of Al-Quran AlMajeed. My special and sincere thanks to my parents with whom prayers I achieved, I am achieving, and I will achieve unforgettable and unbelievable successes in my life. I am highly thankful to all my teachers especially those who taught me at B.A. (Hons) Usulud-Din and M.A. Usul-ud-Din levels in IIU, Islamabad from 1981 to 1991. In fact, my present position and my work are result of their efforts and prayers. Here, I wish to express my affectionate gratitude to my beloved teacher, late Maw’lana Professor Abdullah Kakakhil whose prayers and precious advices play an important role in my academic and research work. May Allah rest his soul in peace. I would like to extend my thanks to unit’s reviewers and course Editor Mr.Fazal Karim and supporting staff of Department of Quran & Tafseer, especially Mr. Muhammad Waseem, Mr. Assad Iqbal, Mr. Irfan Qaiser, Mr. Saeed Ahmad and those who have helped directly and indirectly for providing co-operation and peaceful environment to complete this work. At the end I would like to thank especially Prof. Dr. Zia-ul-Qayyum Vice Chancellor Allama Iqbal Open University Islamabad Pakistan for forward of this book. It is my request to the respectable readers to give suggestions for making this book more fruitful. In’sha Allah their suggestions will be honored and adjusted in the next edition.

Prof. Dr. Abdul Hameed Khan Abbasi Dean Faculty of Arabic & Islamic Studies Allama Iqbal Open University, Islamabd.

1

َٔ ْ َ ٰ ُٔ َ ُ َ ْ َ ْ َ ْ َ ُ  ‫اﻻﲰﺎء‬:‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪۃ اﻻوﱄ‬ Unit No.01.The Nouns(1) ِِ ِ ِ ِ ٍ ‫أﺷﺨ‬ .‫ َوأﻓْ َﻜﺎ ٍر َو ُﺷ ُﻌ ْﻮٍر‬،‫ َوأََﻣﺎﻛِ ٍﻦ‬،‫ َوأ ْﺷﻴَ ٍﺎء‬،‫ﺎص‬ ُ ‫اَْﻷ ْﲰَﺎءُ ﻫ َﻰ اﻟ َﻜﻠ َﻤ‬ َ ‫ﺎت اﻟﱠِﱴ ﻧَ ْﺴﺘَ ْﺨﺪ ُﻣ َﻬﺎ ﻟﺬ ْﻛ ِﺮ‬ Nouns are words which we use to name people, things, places, ideas (freedom, honesty, truth, etc.) and feelings (happiness, anger, joy, boredom, etc.).

ُ (َ ْ َ‫ﰟ َو ا‬ ُ ْ ‫۔ اَ ْﻻ‬1.1 ‫اﻋ ُﻪ‬ ِ The Noun and its Kinds

َ ْ ‫۔ َﻋ َﺪ ُد اَ َٔﻻ‬1.2 ‫ﲰﺎ ِء‬

The Number of Nouns

ْ َْ ‫۔ ا ِﳉﻨ ُﺲ‬1.3

The Gender

‫ اﻷﺳﺘﺎذ اﻟﺪﮐﺘﻮر ﻋﺒﺪ اﻤﯿﺪ ﺧﺎن ﻋﺒﺎ‬:‫ِإ ْﻋ َﺪاد‬ ‫ ﺷﮑﯿﻞ اﺣﻤﺪ‬:‫اﳌﺮ ِاﺟﻊ‬ Written by: Reviewed by:

Prof. Dr. Abdul Hameed Khan Abbasi Mr. Shakeel Ahmad

2

ُ‫اﻋﻪ‬ ُ (ْ َ َٔ‫ﰟ َوا‬ ُ ْ ‫۔اَ ْﻻ‬1.1 ٕ (The Noun and its kinds) (2)

(1)

ِْ ‫ﺎت‬ ‫اﻹ ْﺳ ِﻢ‬ ُ ‫( َﻋﻼَ َﻣ‬The Signs of Nouns) ٌ‫ "ة" َﻣْﺮﺑـُ ْﻮﻃَﺔ‬is

at the end of the noun, e.g.

ٌ‫َﺷ َﺠَﺮةٌ و َﺟﻨﱠﺔ‬

Noun can take

ٌ‫ َﻛ ْﺴَﺮة‬or ‫ ِن‬6َ‫ َﻛ َﺴَﺮ‬on the last letter, e.g.

ِ َ‫ ِﰱ اﻟْ ِﻜﺘ‬،‫ﺎب‬ ٍ َ‫ِﰱ ﻛِﺘ‬ ‫ﺎب‬

‫اﳉَِّﺮ‬ ْ ‫ف‬ ُ ‫َﺣْﺮ‬

May precede a noun, e.g.

ِ َ‫ِﰱ اﻟْ ِﻜﺘ‬ ‫ﺎب‬ ْ

ِْ ‫ﻒ‬ ‫اﻹ ْﺳﻢ‬ ُ ْ‫(ﺗَـ ْﻌ ِﺮﻳ‬The definition of Noun) Noun accepts

‫ اَ ْل‬May

‫ ﺗَـْﻨ ِﻮﻳْ ٌﻦ‬at the

precede a noun, e.g.

end, e.g.

ِ ‫ﺎب‬ ُ َ‫اَﻟْﻜﺘ‬

ِ ‫ﺎب‬ ٌ َ‫ﻛﺘ‬

ْ ُ‫أﲰَﺎء‬ ‫ْاﻷَ ْﺷﻴَ ِﺎء‬

‫اﻷﻣﺎﻛِ ِﻦ‬ ْ َ ‫أﲰَﺎء‬

The names of things

The names of places

ٍ ‫أﲰَﺎءُ اﻷ ْﺷ َﺨ‬ ‫ﺎص‬ ْ

The names of persons

(3)

ُ‫اﻹﺳ ِﻢ اﻟ ُْﻤ ْﺨﺘَﻠِ َﻔﺔ‬ ْ ُ‫اَﻧْـ َﻮاع‬ ‫اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟْ ُﻤﺒَﺎﻟَﻐَ ِﺔ‬

The Exaggeration Noun

ِ ‫اِﺳﻢ اﻟﺘَـ ْﻔ‬ ‫ﻀْﻴ ِﻞ‬ ُْ

The Comparative Noun

‫اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻵﻟَِﺔ‬

The Instrument Noun

‫اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮِل‬

The Passive Noun=(object)

ِ ‫اِﺳﻢ اﻟ َﻔ‬ ‫ﺎﻋﻞ‬ ُْ

The Active Noun=(subject)

ِ ِ ِ‫ﱠﻜﺮة‬ َ ‫ا ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟﻨ‬

The Common Noun

ِ ِ‫ﱠﻜﺮة‬ َ ‫اَﻧْـ َﻮاعُ اﻟﻨ‬

The kinds of Common Noun

ِ ِ ‫اﻟﺼ َﻔ ِﺔ‬ ّ ‫ا ْﺳ ُﻢ‬

The Adjective Noun

ِ ‫اﻟﻨ‬ ُ‫ﱠﻜَﺮة‬

The Common Noun, e.g. ‫َﺟﺒَ ٌﻞ‬

‫ﱠﻤﺎﺋُِﺮ‬ َ ‫اَﻟْﻀ‬

The Pronouns

‫اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَِﺔ‬

The Definite Noun/Proper Noun

ُ‫اَﻧْـ َﻮاعُ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَﺔ‬

The kinds of Definite Noun

‫اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟْ َﻌﻠَ ِﻢ‬

The Proper Noun

ِ ْ‫ف اﻟﺘَـ ْﻌ ِﺮﻳ‬ ‫ﻒ‬ ُ ‫َﺣ ْﺮ‬

"‫"اَ ْل‬

Definite particle

3

Introduction to the First part of Unit No.01 The first part of Unit No. 01 of Quranic Arabic, which you are going to start, is about

ِ َ ‫)اَْﻻ ْﺳ ُﻢ َو‬. It covers the following aspects of the noun: ِْ ‫ﻒ‬ The definition of noun (‫ﺳ ِﻢ‬ ُ ْ‫)ﺗَـ ْﻌ ِﺮﻳ‬. ْ ‫اﻹ‬ ِْ ‫ﺎت‬ The signs of noun (‫ﺳ ِﻢ‬ ُ ‫) َﻋﻼََﻣ‬. ْ ‫اﻹ‬ noun and its kinds (ُ‫أَﻧْـﻮاﻋُﻪ‬

1. 2. 3.

The kinds of noun (‫ﺳ ِﻢ‬ ْ ‫ْاﻹ‬

‫)اَﻗْ َﺴ ُﺎم‬.

Objective of the First Part of Unit No.01 The objectives of this first part of unit No.01 is to build the confidence within yourself, and enable to assist you to easily understand the following: 1.

to define the noun.

2.

to explain the three types of nouns in the definition of noun:

3. 4.

ِ ‫ْاﻷَ ْﺷ َﺨ‬ The names of persons (‫ﺎص‬

ْ ‫)أ‬. ُ‫َﲰَﺎء‬ ِ ِ‫َﲰَﺎءُ ْاﻷ َﻣﺎﻛ‬ (ii) The names of places (‫ﻦ‬ ْ ‫)أ‬. ِ ‫َﲰﺎء ْاﻷَ ْﺷﻴ‬ (iii) The names of things (‫ﺎء‬ َ ُ َْ ‫)أ‬. ِْ ‫ﺎت‬ to describe the signs of noun (‫ﺳ ِﻢ‬ ُ ‫) َﻋﻼََﻣ‬. ْ ‫اﻹ‬ (i)

to elaborate the kinds of noun (‫ﺳ ِﻢ‬ ْ ‫ْاﻹ‬

ُ‫)اَﻧْـ َﻮاع‬

4

ُ‫۔اَْﻹ ْﺳ ُﻢ َوأﻧْـ َﻮاﻋُﻪ‬1.1

The Noun and its Types 1. ‫ﺳ ِﻢ‬ ْ ‫ْاﻹ‬

‫ﻒ‬ ُ ْ‫( ﺗَـ ْﻌ ِﺮﻳ‬The Definition of Noun)

Noun is the name of persons, places or things. It does not need the help of another word to explain its meaning1 e.g. [

ِ ‫( أ ْﲰَﺎءُ اﻷ ْﺷ َﺨ‬The Names of Persons) i. ‫ﺎص‬ ‫َر ِﺷْﻴ ٌﺪ‬ ‫َﻛﻠِْﻴ ٌﻢ‬ ُ‫َﻣ ْﺮَﱘ‬ ِ ٌ‫ﺑَﺸ ْﲑ‬ ٌ‫ ِدﻳَﺔ‬Vَ

Kaleem Maryam Basheer Nadia

ِ ‫( أ ْﲰَﺎء اﻷﻣ‬The Names of Places) ِ ‫ﺎﻛ‬ ii. ‫ﻦ‬ َ ُ \َ‫َﻣﺎﻟِْﻴ ِﺰ‬ ‫َﻛ ْﺸ ِﻤ ٌْﲑ‬ ‫أَﻟْ َﻤﺎﻧِﻴَﺎ‬ ‫أَْﻣ ِﺮﻳْ َﻜﺎ‬

Malaysia Kashmir Germany America

‫ﻓَـ َﺮﻧْ َﺴﺎ‬

France

‫س‬ ٌ ‫ﻓَـَﺮ‬ ‫اُذُ ٌن‬ ‫س‬ ُ ‫اَﻟَْﺮأ‬ ٌ‫ِﻣ ْﺮَو َﺣﺔ‬ ٌ‫ﻓَـ ْﻮﻃَﺔ‬

Horse

ِ ‫( أ ْﲰﺎء ْاﻷَ ْﺷﻴ‬The names of things) iii. ‫ﺎء‬ َ َُ

2. ‫ﺳ ِﻢ‬ ْ ‫ْاﻹ‬

‫ﻧَ ِﺬﻳْـٌﺮ‬ ‫اَ ْﲪَ ُﺪ‬ ٌ‫ ِﺻ َﺮة‬Vَ َِ ‫ﲪْﻴ ُﺪ‬ ِ‫ﺻ‬ ٌ‫ﺎﳊَﺔ‬ َ

Rasheed

‫َ]ﻛِ ْﺴﺘَﺎ ْن‬ ‫إِ ْﳒَْﻠ ََﱰا‬ ‫أَﻓْ ِﺮﻳْـ َﻘﺎ‬ ‫ ﺑِْﻴـﻨَﺎﻧْ ٌﺞ‬/ ‫ﺎﻧﻚ‬ ٌ َ‫ﺑِْﻴـﻨ‬ ِ ‫آ]د‬ َ ‫إ ْﺳﻼَ َم‬

Ear The head Fan

ِ ‫ﺼﺎ ٌن‬ َ‫ﺣ‬ ‫ﻳَ ٌﺪ‬

‫ﲔ‬ ُ ْ ‫اَﻟْ َﻌ‬ ٌ‫دﺑـُ ْﻮ َﺳﺔ‬/ َ ٌ‫َد ﱠ] َﺳﺔ‬

Towel

‫ﺎت‬ ُ ‫( َﻋﻼَ َﻣ‬The Signs of Noun)

ٌ‫ﻗُـْﻨـﺒُـﻠَﺔ‬

Nazeer Ahmad Nasira Hameed Saaleha

Pakistan England Africa Penang Islamabad

Horse Hand The eye Stapler Bomb

In Arabic there are five signs by which an ism (noun) is known: 1

In other words we can say that a noun does not dependent on any other word in indicating its meaning and does not have any of the three tenses (past, present and future).

5

2.1.

ِ ِ ِ The first sign is that the ‫ﺳ ٌﻢ‬ ٌ َ‫( ﻛﺘ‬a ْ ‫( ا‬noun) accepts ‫ﻨﻮﻳﻦ‬ ٌ َ‫ ﺗ‬at the end e.g., ‫( ﺻﺮا ٌط‬a path), ‫ﺎب‬ َ

ِ book), ‫ﻰ‬ ‫( ُﻛ ْﺮﺳ ﱞ‬a chair), etc. 2.2.

ِ The second sign is that “‫( ”اَ ْل‬alif and lam) may precede the noun (ism) e.g., ‫ﺎب‬ ُ َ‫( اَﻟْﻜﺘ‬the

ِ ‫( اَ ْﳉ‬the university), ‫( اَﻟْﺒـﻴﺖ‬the house), etc. book), ُ‫ﺎﻣ َﻌﺔ‬ ُ َْ َ 2.3.

The third sign is that ‫ﳉَِّﺮ‬ ْ‫ا‬

‫ف‬ ُ ‫( ُﺣُﺮْو‬particles of jarr preposition) may precede the ism e.g. ‫ِﰱ‬

ِ ‫( ِﰱ اﻟ‬in the book), ‫ض‬ ِ ‫( اﻟْﺒـﻴ‬in the house), ‫ﺎب‬ ِ َ‫ْﻜﺘ‬ ِ ‫( َﻋﻠَﻰ ْاﻷ َْر‬on the earth) etc. ‫ﺖ‬ َْ

2.4.

2.5.

Note: i.

‫( اَ ْﳉَﱡﺮ‬kasrah/kasrataan) on the last letter ِ ‫اﳉَْﻴ‬ e.g. ‫( ِﰱ ﻏُ ْﺮﻓَ ٍﺔ‬in a room), ‫ﺐ‬ ْ ‫( ِﰱ‬in the pocket), ‫( َإﱃ اﻟ ﱠﺴ َﻤ ِﺎء‬towards the sky), etc. ِ The fifth sign is that ٌ‫ ”ة“ َﻣ ْﺮﺑـُ ْﻮﻃَﺔ‬is at the end of the noun e.g., ٌ‫ﺟﻨﺔ‬ َ (a garden), ٌ‫( َﻛﻠ َﻤﺔ‬a word, a speech), ٌ‫ﺠﺮة‬ َ َ ‫( َﺷ‬a tree), etc. The fourth sign is that the ism (noun) can take

These five signs cannot function for the verbs for particles/latter. So, they are specific to the noun.

ii.

These five signs can be used to distinguish between the ٌ‫أﲰَﺎء‬ ْ (nouns),

‫ف‬ ٌ ‫( ُﺣُﺮْو‬particles).

3. ‫ﺨﺘَﻠِ َﻔ ِﺔ‬ ْ ‫اﻟ ُْﻤ‬

‫ﺎل‬ ٌ ‫( اَﻓْـ َﻌ‬verbs) and

‫اﻹﺳ ِﻢ‬ ُ ‫( أﻧْـ َﻮ‬The Different Kinds of Noun) ْ ‫اع‬

In Arabic language, there are different kinds of noun:

ِ 3.1. ‫ْﻤ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَ ِﺔ‬ َ ‫( ا ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟ‬The Definite Noun)/ Proper Noun ‫ﻒ اﻟ َْﻤ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَ ِﺔ‬ ُ ْ‫( ﺗَـ ْﻌ ِﺮﻳ‬The Definition of Definite Noun)

A definite noun can be defined as name of a specific person, a place or a thing

ِ ٍ ‫ﺎن أو‬ ٍ ‫ﺺ أو ﻣ َﻜ‬ ‫ﺷﻰء‬ ْ‫أ‬ َ ْ ٍ ‫ )ا ْﺳ ٌﻢ ﻳَ ُﺪ ﱠل َﻋﻠَﻰ َﺷ ْﺨ‬e.g. ‫( ُﳏَ ﱠﻤ ُﺪ‬Muhammad), ‫َﲪَ ُﺪ‬ (Makkah), ‫ت‬ ُ ‫( ﺑَْﲑُْو‬Beirut), ‫َﺳ َﻮ ُد‬ ْ ‫( اَ ْﳊَ َﺠ ُﺮ ْاﻷ‬The black stone), etc.

ٍ ‫ُﻣ َﻌ ﱠ‬ (‫ﲔ‬

(Ahmad),

ُ‫اَﻟْ َﻤ ﱠﻜﺔ‬

‫اع اﻟ َْﻤ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَ ِﺔ‬ ُ ‫( أﻧْـ َﻮ‬The Types of Definite Noun) There are eight kinds of ‫اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَ ِﺔ‬

ِ ْ‫ﱠﻌ ِﺮﻳ‬ i. ‫ﻒ‬ ْ ‫اﻟْﺘـ‬

‫( اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬the definite noun):

‫ف‬ ُ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬-‫( اَ ْل‬Al-Definite Particle)

‫ اَ ْل‬is prefixed to a noun (an ism) which is ٌ‫( ﻧَ ِﻜَﺮة‬indefinite), and changes it to become ٌ‫( ُﻣ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَﺔ‬definite), and also causes the ‫ﻦ‬ ٌ ْ‫( ﺗَـْﻨ ِﻮﻳ‬tanween) at the end to be The definite particle

6 dropped2. The definite particle ‫( اَ ْل‬al) corresponds to the English “the”, e.g.,

ِ ِ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫( َﻫ َﺬا ﻃَﺒِْﻴ‬This is a doctor). ‫ﺲ‬ ُ ‫( اَﻟْﻄﱠﺒْﻴ‬The doctor is sitting), etc. ٌ ‫ﺐ َﺟﺎﻟ‬ In the definite article ‫( اَ ْل‬al) the َ‫( ا‬a) is known as ‫ﺻ ِﻞ‬ ْ ‫( َﳘَْﺰةُ اﻟْ َﻮ‬the connecting Hamzah). If it is not preceded by a word it will be pronounced with the vowel marking _ ٌ‫ﺤﺔ‬ َ ‫ﻓَـْﺘ‬

 

(fathah). If it is preceded by a word, it is dropped in pronunciation, though remains in

ِ ِ ِ writing, e.g. ‫ﻒ‬ ُ ‫ﺐ َﺟﺎﻟﺲ َواﻟْ ُﻤ َﺪ ِّرس َواﻗ‬ ُ ‫( اَﻟﻄﱠﺎﻟ‬The student is sitting and the teacher is standing). ُ

ٌ ِ ِ ِ ٌ ‫)ﺣﺮ‬, this letter (‫ف‬ When indefinite noun (ٍ‫ﻜﺮة‬ ٌ ‫) َﺣ ْﺮ‬ َْ َ َ‫ )ا ْﺳ ُﻢ ﻧ‬begins with a “sun letter” (‫ف َﴰْﺴ ٌﻰ‬ assimilates (joins) itself with the ‫( ل‬lam) of the article in pronunciation, though the ‫ل‬ (lam) remains in writing. Thus, the assimilating (joining) letter takes Shadd (doubled),

ِ such as ‫ﺐ‬ ُ ‫ اَﻟْﻄﱠﺎﻟ‬in the above example.

ii. ‫ْﻌﻠَ ِﻢ‬ َ ‫اﻟ‬

There are 14 sun/solar letters (‫ن‬

‫( اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬The Proper Noun)

،‫ ل‬،‫ ظ‬،‫ ط‬،‫ ض‬،‫ ص‬،‫ ش‬،‫ س‬،‫ ز‬،‫ ر‬،‫ ذ‬،‫ د‬،‫ ث‬،‫)ت‬3.

َِ (Hameed), A proper noun is the name of a specific person, a thing or a place, e.g. ‫ﲪ ْﻴ ٌﺪ‬

‫( اَﻟْ ُﻘ ْﺮآن‬Al-Quran), ٌ‫( َﻣ ِﺪﻳْـﻨَﺔ‬Madinah).

The Proper nouns can include the names of countries, people, states, tribes, rivers oceans, mountains etc. The proper nouns (‫ )اَﻟْ َﻌﻠَﻢ‬take the cases similar to the ordinary nouns, i.e. a)

b) c)

ُ

ِ ِ َ‫ﺿ ﱠﻤﺘ‬ Double Dhamma (‫ﺎن‬ َ ) when in nominative case (ٌ‫) َﺣﺎﻟَﺔٌ َرﻓْﻌﻴَﺔ‬

ِ َ‫ )ﻓَـْﺘﺤﺘ‬when in accusative case (ٌ‫)ﺣﺎﻟَﺔٌ ﻧَﺼﺒِﻴﱠﺔ‬ Double Fatha (‫ﺎن‬ َ َ َ Double Kasra (‫ ِن‬6َ‫ﺴﺮ‬ ْ ‫ ) َﻛ‬when in genitive case (ٌ‫) َﺣﺎﻟَﺔٌ َﺟِّﺮﻳَﺔ‬.

َ

ِ ‫ﺼﺮ‬ However, the proper nouns which are diptotes (‫ف‬ ْ ‫اﻟْ ﱠ‬

rules of diptotes4. Some examples for this rule

‫ﺎع‬ ْ ٌ ‫أﲪَ ُﺪ ُﺷ َﺠ‬ ِ ‫ﺎﻃﻤﺔُ ﻋﻠﻰ َﺷ‬ ِ ‫َﲪَ ِﺮ‬ ْ ‫ﺎﻃﻰ ِء اﻟْﺒَ ْﺤ ِﺮ ْاﻷ‬ َ َ َ‫ﻓ‬ ‫َﺳ َﻮَد‬ ُ ‫َﻣ َﺴ ْﺤ‬ ْ ‫ﺖ ا ْﳊَ َﺠ َﺮ ْاﻷ‬ ‫ﺖ اﻟْ َﻤﺎءَ اﻟَْﺰْﻣَﺰَم‬ ُ ْ‫َﺷ ِﺮﺑ‬

2

3 4

ٍ ‫ ) َﻏﲑ ﻣْﻨﺼ ِﺮ‬follow the ‫ اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﻤﻨُـ ْﻮ َﻋﺔُ ِﻣ َﻦ‬/‫ف‬ َ ُ ُْ

Ahmad is brave. Fatima is at the shore of the Red Sea. I rubbed the black stone. I drank the Zamzam water.

In other words we can say that one way of making a noun definite is to prefix the definite article ‫( اَ ْل‬al) to it and

ِ ِ to omit its nunation (‫)ﺗَـْﻨ ِﻮﻳْ ٌﻦ‬, e.g. ‫ﺎب‬ ٌ َ‫ﻛﺘ‬+‫( اَﻟْﻜﺘَﺎب= اَ ْل‬The book), ‫ر ُﺟ ٌﻞ‬+‫ل‬ َ َ‫( اَﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟ ُﻞ= ا‬The man)

See 1st part of Unit No.09 of this book for sun/solar and moon/lunar letters, page No. 258 See 3rd part of Unit No 05 (‫)ﺍَ ْﻹﻋ َْﺮﺍﺏُ َﻭ ﺍﻟ ِﺒﻨَﺎ ُء‬

7

ِ ‫اﻟْﻤ ْﻨـ َﻔ‬ iii. ُ‫ﺼﻠﱠﺔ‬ ُ

‫ﱠﻤﺎﺋِﺮ‬ َ ‫( اَﻟْﻀ‬The Detached Pronouns)

All the following detached pronouns are definite proper nouns (‫ُﻣ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَ ٍﺔ‬

ِ‫و‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ

‫َﲨْ ٌﻊ‬

‫ ُﻣﺜَ ﱠﲎ‬/ٌ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬ DUAL

SINGULAR

‫ُﻫ ْﻢ‬

‫ُﳘَﺎ‬

‫ُﻫ َﻮ‬

PLURAL

They (all)

They

‫ُﻫ ﱠﻦ‬

‫ُﳘَﺎ‬

‫اَﻧْـﺘُ ْﻢ‬

‫أﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ‬

‫ﺖ‬ َ ْ‫اَﻧ‬

‫أﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ‬

ِ ٌ ‫ﻣﺆﻧﱠ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ َُ ٌ ‫ﺚ َﻏﺎﺋ‬

2nd person (m) 2nd person (f)

ِ ْ‫أﻧ‬ ‫ﺖ‬

(Both of) You

You

‫َْﳓ ُﻦ‬

‫َْﳓ ُﻦ‬

V‫َأ‬

We

ِ ‫ﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛﺮ ﺣ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ َ ٌ ُ

You

You (all) We

ِ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﻏﺎﺋ‬

3rd person (f) 6

‫ِﻫ َﻰ‬

She

‫ﱳ‬ ‫اَﻧْ ُ ﱠ‬

(Forms)

3rd person (m)5

They (Both of) You

ِ ‫ﺻ ْﻴ ٌﻎ‬

He

They (all) You (all)

‫)اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬:

ِ ‫ﺚﺣ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ َ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬

st

I

‫ﻣﺘﻜﻠﻢ‬

1 person (m) & (f)

ِْ ُ‫َﲰَﺎء‬ iv. ُ‫ﺎرة‬ ْ ‫( اَْﻷ‬The Demonstrative Pronouns) َ ‫اﻹ َﺷ‬

All the following demonstrative pronouns for both near and far (distance)

ِ ِ ِ ِ ‫ )ﻟِْﻠ َﻘ ِﺮﻳ‬are definite nouns (‫)اِﺳﻢ اﻟْﻤﻌ ِﺮﻓَِﺔ‬: ‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋِﺮ‬ َ ‫ﺐ و ﻟ ْﻠﺒَﻌْﻴﺪ‬ َْ ُْ ْ ِ ْ‫اﻹ َﺷﺎرةِ ﻟِْﻠ َﻘ ِﺮﻳ‬ Demonstrative Pronouns for Near Distance (‫ﺐ‬ ْ ‫أ‬/‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋُِﺮ‬ َ ). َ ِْ ُ‫َﲰَﺎء‬ ِ ِ‫و‬ ‫ﺻﻴَ ٌﻎ‬ ‫َﲨْ ٌﻊ‬ ‫ ُﻣﺜَ ﱠﲎ‬/ٌ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ ِْ (‫ﺎرة‬ َ ‫اﻹ َﺷ‬

1. [[

PLURAL

‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَِء‬

All these (m)

‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻٍَء‬

All these (f)

2.

These two (m)

ِ ْ َ‫ َﻫﺎﺗ‬/‫ ِن‬6َ ‫َﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﲔ‬

These two (f)

‫َﲨْ ٌﻊ‬

‫ ُﻣﺜَ ﱠﲎ‬/ٌ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬

‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوٰﻟﺌ‬

‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫ذَاﻧ‬

All those (m)

‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوٰﻟﺌ‬

All those (f)

6

‫ َﻫ َﺬﻳْ ِﻦ‬/‫َﻫ َﺬ ِان‬

Demonstrative pronouns for far distance (‫ﻟِْﻠﺒَﻌِْﻴ ِﺪ‬ PLURAL

5

DUAL

m = masculine. f = feminine.

DUAL

Those two (m)

‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫ﻧ‬6َ

Those two (f)

SINGULAR

(Forms)

‫َﻫ َﺬا‬

‫ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ‬

ِ‫ﻫ ِﺬﻩ‬ َ

‫ﺚ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬

This This

ِ ‫َﲰﺎء‬ ِ‫اﻹ َﺷﺎرة‬ َ ُ َْ ‫)أ‬: َ ِْ ‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋ ُﺮ‬/ ِ‫و‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ SINGULAR

(m) (f)

ِ ‫ﺻ ْﻴ ٌﻎ‬

(Forms)

ِ ‫ﻚ‬ َ ‫ذَﻟ‬

‫ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ‬

‫ﻚ‬ َ ‫ﺗِْﻠ‬

‫ﺚ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬

That That

8

v. ُ‫ﺻ ْﻮﻟَﺔ‬ ُ ‫اَﻟ َْﻤ ْﻮ‬ [[

ْ ‫( اَْﻷ‬The Relative pronouns) ُ‫َﲰَﺎء‬

All the following relative pronouns are definite nouns (‫اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَ ِﺔ‬

‫َﲨْ ٌﻊ‬

‫ ُﻣﺜَ ﱠﲎ‬/ٌ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬

‫اَﻟﱠ ِﺬﻳْ َﻦ‬

‫اﻟﻠﱠ َﺬ ِان‬

PLURAL

Those

‫اَﻟﻼﱠﺋِﻰ‬/‫اَﻟﻼﱠﺗِﻰ‬

Those/Which

ِ‫و‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ

DUAL

‫)اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬:

SINGULAR

Who/Whom Who/Whom

(Forms)

‫اَﻟﱠ ِﺬ ْى‬

‫ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ‬

‫اَﻟﱠِﱴ‬

‫ﺚ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬

Who/ Whom

ِ َ‫اَﻟﻠﱠﺘ‬ ‫ﺎن‬

ِ ‫ﺻ ْﻴ ٌﻎ‬

Who/Whom

vi. The Definite with annexation (‫ﺿﺎﻓَ ِﺔ‬ ٌ ‫) ُﻣ َﻌ ﱠﺮ‬, e.g. َ ‫ف ِ@ ِْﻹ‬

ِ ‫ﺎب ُﳏَ ﱠﻤ ٍﺪ‬ ُ َ‫ﻛﺘ‬ ِ ِ ِ‫ﺎب اﻟﻄﱠﺎﻟ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ُ َ‫ﻛﺘ‬ ِ ‫ﺎب َﻫ َﺬا‬ ُ َ‫ﻛﺘ‬

Muhammad’s book Student’s book This book

In these three examples, the indefinite noun (‫َﻣ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَ ٍﺔ‬

‫)اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬.

vii. Vocative Noun (‫ﺎدى‬ َ َ‫اَﻟ ُْﻤﻨ‬

2. 3.

has become a definite noun.

‫ اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬the one being called)

The vocative noun (‫ﺎدى‬ َ َ‫اﻟْ ُﻤﻨ‬

1.

ِ ‫ﺎب‬ ٌ َ‫ﻛﺘ‬

‫)اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬

is one kind of the definite noun. The particle

\َ (O!) is used to call somebody. The person who is called is the ‫( اِ ْﺳ ٌﻢ‬ism-noun) which comes after this particle is known as ‫ﺎدى‬ َ َ‫( اَﻟْ ُﻤﻨ‬the one being called). And the person who ِ َ‫اَﻟْﻤﻨ‬, for example: calls is known as ‫ﺎدى‬ ُ ‫ﺎس‬ ْ (Ahmad: O Abbas). This sentence has three parts: ُ ‫ َ\ َﻋﺒﱠ‬:‫أﲪَ ُﺪ‬ ِ ‫أﲪَ ُﺪ‬ ْ : He is ‫ى‬ ُ ‫( ُﻣﻨَﺎد‬caller). ٍ ِ‫ف ﻧ‬ \َ : It is particle of calling (‫ﺪاء‬ ُ ‫) َﺣ ْﺮ‬. ‫ﺎس‬ ُ ‫ َﻋﺒﱠ‬: is ‫( اَﻟْ ُﻤﻨَ َﺎدى‬the one being called).

ِ َ‫ﺎل اﻟْﻤﻨ‬ ‫ﺎدى‬ ُ ُ ‫( اَ ْﺷ َﻜ‬The Types of Al-Munada) a.

....‫ َ\ َرِﺷْﻴ ُﺪ‬،‫ َ\ اَ ْﲪَ ُﺪ‬،‫ اَﻟْ ُﻤ ْﻔَﺮُد اﻟْ َﻌﻠَ ُﻢ! َ\ ُﳏَ ﱠﻤ ُﺪ‬: In this type of ‫ﺎدى‬ َ َ‫اَﻟْ ُﻤﻨ‬, somebody is called by his

name i.e., O Muhammad! , O Ahmad! , O Rashid! and so on.

b.

ِ ُ‫ َ\اُ ْﺳﺘَﺎذ‬: ُ‫ﺼ ْﻮَدة‬ َ َ‫)اَﻟْ َﻤﻨ‬, somebody is called ُ ‫اَﻟﻨﱠﻜَﺮةُ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻘ‬: In this type of vocation ‫ َ\ َر ُﺟ ُﻞ‬noun (‫ﺎدى‬ as a particular or specific person i.e., O Teacher! O Man! and so on.

c.

ِ ‫ﺖ َﺧﺎﻟِ ٍﺪ‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ ُ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ اَﻟْ ُﻤ‬: In this kind the one being called is ‫ﺎف‬ َ ‫( ُﻣ‬Mudhaaf) i.e., َ ‫ َ\ َﻋْﺒ َﺪ ﷲ َ\ ﺑِْﻨ‬:‫ﺎف‬ O Abdullah! O daughter of Khalid! and so on.

9 Note: It is important to note that the first and the second types of

‫ﺎدى‬ َ َ‫ُﻣﻨ‬

and is one

ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ ٌ‫ﺿ ﱠﻤﺔ‬ َ (dhamma) not tanween. As for the third type, the ‫ﺎف‬ َ ‫( ُﻣ‬Mudhaaf) will be ‫ب‬ ٌ ‫ﺼ ْﻮ‬ ُ ‫َﻣْﻨ‬ (take fatha ٌ‫ﺤﺔ‬ َ َ‫ ﻓَـﺘ‬on the last letter).

ِ ‫اَﻟْﻨ‬ 3.2. ِ‫ﱠﻜ َﺮة‬

‫( اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬The Indefinite/ Common Noun)

ِ ‫ﻒ اَﻟﻨ‬ ‫ﱠﻜ َﺮِة‬ ُ ْ‫( ﺗَـ ْﻌ ِﺮﻳ‬The Definition of Indefinite Noun)

ٍ ‫ﺎن أو ﺷ‬ ِ ‫اﻟﻨ‬ ٍ ‫ﻰء َﻏ ِْﲑ ُﻣ َﻌ ﱠ‬ ٍ ‫ اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ ﻳَ ُﺪ ﱠل َﻋﻠَﻰ َﺷ ْﺤ‬:ُ‫ﱠﻜَﺮة‬ .‫ﲔ‬ َ ْ ٍ ‫ ْأو َﻣ َﻜ‬،‫ﺾ‬

An indefinite noun can be defined as “name of nonspecific person, place or thing, e.g.,

‫( َر ُﺟ ٌﻞ‬a man) can be any man, ٌ‫( َﻏ ْﺮﻓَﺔ‬a room) can be any room, ‫ﺖ‬ ٌ ‫( ﺑـَْﻴ‬a house) can be any

ِ ‫( َﺷ‬a poet) can be any poet, ‫( ﻛِﺘَﺎب‬a book) can be any book, etc. house, ‫ﺎﻋٌﺮ‬ ٌ

ِ‫اع اﻟْﻨَ ِﻜﺮة‬ َ ُ ‫( أﻧْـ َﻮ‬The Kinds of Indefinite Noun)

There are many types of indefinite nouns. Among all of them, the following two are widely used:

ِ ‫)اَﻟﻨ‬ i. Common (ُ‫ﱠﻜ َﺮة‬

The name of any species, e.g. ‫ﺟﺒَﻞ‬ َ (a mountain).

ٌ

Nunation (‫ﻦ‬ ٌ ْ‫ )ﺗَـ ْﻨ ِﻮﻳ‬as Indefinite Form Nouns

and

adjectives

are

generally

indicated

as

indefinite

forms

ِ ‫اَﻟْﻨ‬ (ُ‫ﱠﻜﺮة‬ َ

an-nakiratu), by doubling the final vowel sign as pronouncing them with a final /….n/. The final vowel itself does not, however, become long inspite of the double vowel sign.

This process of making a noun or adjective indefinite is called ‫ﻦ‬ ٌ ْ‫( ﺗَـْﻨ ِﻮﻳ‬tanwinun) in Arabic and nunation in English. The indefinite forms of three different cases are:

a. b.

ِ َ‫ﺿ ﱠﻤﺘ‬ Nominative Indefinite: The word ends with a double dammah (‫ﺎن‬ ٌ ِ‫( َﻣﻠ‬a king). َ ) e.g., ‫ﻚ‬

ِ ‫ )ﻓَـْﺘﺤ‬and often an extra alif Accusative Indefinite: The word ends with double fathah (‫ﺘﺎن‬ َ (‫ )ا‬which is not pronounced as a long vowel e.g., ‫ﻜﺎ‬ ً ِ‫( َﻣﻠ‬malikan) a king.

c.

Genitive Indefinite: The word ends with double kasrah (‫ ِن‬6َ‫ﻛﺴﺮ‬ َ ) e.g.,

king, of a king.

ََ

ٍ ِ‫( ﻣﻠ‬malikin) a ‫ﻚ‬ َ

10

ii. The Adjective Noun (‫اﻟﺼ َﻔ ِﺔ‬ ِّ

‫)اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬

An adjective noun is that which qualifies a noun or which indicates qualities or attributes of other nouns. In some cases, after the second alphabet of the root word, one of the vowel

‫ ى‬، ‫ و‬or ‫ ا‬is added as follows. ِ ‫ﻟﺼ َﻔ ِﺔ‬ ِّ ‫ا ْﺳ ُﻢ ا‬

ٌ ‫ُﺣ ُﺮْو‬ ٌ‫ﺻ ِﻠﻴﱠﺔ‬ ْ َ‫ف ا‬

Root Word

Adjective Noun

‫ف‬ َ ‫ف=ﺷ ْﺮ‬+‫ر‬+‫ش‬ َ ‫ر=وﻗَـ َﺮ‬+‫ق‬+‫و‬ َ ‫ع= َﺷ ُﺠ َﻊ‬+‫ج‬+‫ش‬

Following forms are also used as measures of adjective:

‫ﻓَـ َﻌ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ﻓُـ ْﻌ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ﻓَﻌِ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ﻓَـ ْﻌﻼَ ٌن‬ ‫ﻓَﻌِْﻴ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ﻓَﻌِْﻴ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ﻓَﻌِْﻴ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ﻓَـﻌُ ْﻮٌل‬ ‫ﻓَـﻌُ ْﻮٌل‬

‫ﻓَـﻌُ ْﻮٌل‬ ِ َ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ ِ َ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ ‫َﻣ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮٌل‬ ‫َﻣ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮٌل‬

English

‫ﻓَـ ْﻌ ُﻞ‬

‫ﻒ‬ ٌ ْ‫َﺷ ِﺮﻳ‬ ‫َوﻗُـ ْﻮٌر‬ ٌ‫ُﺷ َﺠﺎع‬

Good Dignified Brave

‫ﺐ‬ َ ٌ ‫ﺻ ْﻌ‬

Difficult

‫َﺣ َﺴ ٌﻦ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ُ ٌ ‫ﺻ ْﻠ‬

Beautiful

‫ِح‬ ٌ ‫ﻓَﺮ‬ ‫َر ْﲪَﺎ ٌن‬ ‫ﻃَ ِﻮﻳْ ٌﻞ‬ ِ َ‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﺼ ٌْﲑ‬ ‫ﻗَﺘِْﻴ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ﻇَﻠُ ْﻮٌم‬

‫َﺟ ُﻬ ْﻮٌل‬ ‫َﻛ ُﺴ ْﻮٌل‬ ِ‫ﺟ‬ ‫ﺎﻫ ٌﻞ‬ َ ِ‫ﻋﺎﱂ‬ ٌَ ‫َﻣ ْﺸ ُﻬ ْﻮٌر‬ ‫َْﳏ ُﻔ ْﻮ ٌط‬

Hard Very happy Beneficent Tall Short Killed Very unjust Very ignorant Very lazy Ignorant Most learned Famous Preserved, Protected

Adjective which denotes colour, appearances or bodily defects have three measures:

‫ﻓُـ ْﻌ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ُﲪٌْﺮ‬

7

ُ‫ﻓَـ ْﻌﻼَء‬ ُ‫َﲪَْﺮاء‬

‫ْﻌ ُﻞ‬ َ ‫أَﻓـ‬ ‫( أَ ْﲪَُﺮ‬red)

ُ‫۔ ﻓُـ ْﻌ ٌﻞ ﻟﻨﺤﻮأﲪﺪ و َﲬﺮاء۔۔۔ ﻳﻌﻨﯽ إ ّن ﻫذا اﻟﻮزن ﲨﻊ ﻟﮑﻞ وﺻﻒ اﳌﺬﮐﺮ ﻋﻠﯽ وزن أَﻓْـ َﻌ ُﻞ أوﻣﻮﻧﺚ ﻋﻠﯽ وزن ﻓَـ ْﻌﻼء‬

7

‫‪11‬‬

‫)‪ (black‬أَ ْﺳ َﻮ ُد‬ ‫ﺾ‬ ‫)‪ (white‬أَﺑْـﻴَ ُ‬

‫َﺳ ْﻮَداءُ‬ ‫ﺑـَْﻴ َ‬ ‫ﻀﺎءُ‬

‫ﺻ ٌﻢ‬ ‫ﺻﻤ ُﻢ( أَ َ‬ ‫)‪) (dumb‬أَ َ‬ ‫)‪ (blind‬أَ ْﻋ ٰﻤﻰ‬

‫ُﺳ ْﻮٌد‬ ‫ﺾ‬ ‫ﺑ ْﻴ ٌ‬

‫ﺻ ﱞﻢ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ﻋُ ْﻤ ٌﻰ‬

‫َ‬ ‫ﺻ ْﻤﻴَﺎءُ‬ ‫َﻋ ْﻤﻴَﺎءُ‬

‫‪Use of adjective nouns in daily usage sentences:‬‬ ‫‪This boy is tired.‬‬ ‫‪That girl is angry.‬‬ ‫‪This tree is green in summer.‬‬ ‫‪The rose is red.‬‬ ‫‪My friend is wealthy/ rich.‬‬

‫‪Nouns:‬‬

‫‪Indefinite‬‬

‫‪and‬‬

‫‪Definite‬‬

‫‪than‬‬

‫َﻫ َﺬا اﻟْ َﻮﻟَ ُﺪ ﺗَـ ْﻌﺒَﺎ ُن‬ ‫ﻀﺒَﺎ ُن‬ ‫ﺖ َﻏ ْ‬ ‫ﺗِْﻠ َ‬ ‫ﻚ اﻟْﺒِْﻨ ُ‬ ‫ﺼْﻴ ِ‬ ‫ﻒ‬ ‫ﻀَﺮاءُ ِﰱ اﻟ ﱠ‬ ‫َﻫ ِﺬ ِﻩ اﻟْ َﺸ َﺠَﺮةُ َﺧ ْ‬ ‫اَﻟْ َﻮْرُد اَ ْﲪَُﺮ اﻟﻠﱠ ُﻮ ِن‬ ‫ﺻ ِﺪﻳِْﻘ ْﻰ َﻛﺜِ ْﲑُ اﻟْ َﻤ ِﺎل‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪other‬‬

‫‪of‬‬

‫‪Nouns‬‬

‫‪Varieties‬‬

‫‪3.3.‬‬

‫اﻹﺳ ِﻢ ﻏَ ْﲑ اِﺳ ِﻢ اﻟْﻤ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَ ِﺔ واﻟﻨ ِ‬ ‫ﱠﻜ َﺮةِ(‬ ‫)أَﻧْـ َﻮ ُ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫اع ِْ ْ ُ ْ َ‬

‫)اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬

‫ﺟ ِﺎﻣ ٍ‬ ‫ﺪ( ‪1. Inflexible Noun‬‬ ‫َ‬

‫ِ‬ ‫ف‪َ 8‬ﻏﲑ ﻣﺄﺧﻮٍذ ِﻣﻦ َﻏﲑﻩِ )أى أﻧَﻪ و ِﺿﻊ ﻋﻠَﻰ ِِ ِ ِ ِ ِ‬ ‫ﺮﺟ ُﻊ إﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ اَْو‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ﺲ ﻟَﻪُ ْ‬ ‫ُُ َ َ ُ‬ ‫ُﻫ َﻮ ا ْﺳ ٌﻢ ﻣﺘَ َ‬ ‫أﺻ ٌﻞ ﻳُ َ‬ ‫ﺼِّﺮ ٌ ْ ُ َ ُ ْ‬ ‫ﺻ ْﻮَرﺗﻪ ا ْﳊَﺎﻟﻴَﺔ اﺑْﺘ َﺪاءً ﻓَ ْﻠﻴ َ‬ ‫ﻳـَﺘَﻔﱠﺮعُ ِﻣْﻨﻪُ(‪.‬‬ ‫س ‪ (an elephant),‬ﻓِْﻴﻞ ‪It is a noun that has been not derived from an infinitive, e.g.,‬‬ ‫‪ (a‬ﻓَـَﺮ ٌ‬ ‫ٌ‬ ‫ﺟﺒَﻞ ‪horse),‬‬ ‫أَ َﺳ ٌﺪ ‪ (a pen),‬ﻗَـﻠَ ٌﻢ ‪َ (a tree),‬ﺷ َﺠَﺮة ‪َ (a woman),‬ﻣﺮأَة ‪ٌ َ (a mountain),‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﻛﺎءٌ ‪(a lion),‬‬ ‫ْﻤﺔٌ ‪ (intelligent),‬ذَ َ‬ ‫‪ (wisdom), etc.‬ﺣﻜ َ‬

‫)اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬

‫ﺼ َﺪ ٍر( ‪2. Verbal Noun‬‬ ‫َﻣ ْ‬

‫ِ‬ ‫ﻆ ﻳ ُﺪ ﱡل ﻋﻠَﻰ ﻣﻌﲎ اﻟْﻤﺼﺪ ِر و ﻳـْﻨﻘﺺ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺮو ِ‬ ‫ف ﻓِ ْﻌﻠِ ِﻪ ﻟَ ْﻔﻈًﺎ َو ﺗَـ ْﻘ ِﺪﻳْﺮاً ﺑِ ُﺪ ْو ِن ﺗَـ ْﻌ ِﻮﻳْ ٍ‬ ‫ﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ا ْﺳ ُﻢ َﻣ ْ‬ ‫ﺼ َﺪ ٍر‪ :‬ﻟَْﻔ ٌ َ َ َ ْ َ َ ْ َ َ ُ َ ْ ُ ُ ْ‬

‫‪Verbal noun is a noun that has been derived from an infinitive and from which other‬‬ ‫‪words are derived, e.g.‬‬

‫‪ (To murder) - Infinitive‬ﻗَـْﺘ ٌﻞ‬ ‫‪ (He murdered) - Verb‬ﻗَـﺘَ َﻞ‬ ‫‪ 8‬اِﺳﻢ ﻣﺘﺼ ِﺮ ٌ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻋﺎن‪:‬‬ ‫ﺐ إﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‪َ :‬ﺟﺒَ ٌﻞ‪َ ،‬ﺟﺒَﻼَن‪ِ ،‬ﺟﺒَ ٌ‬ ‫ﺎل‪ُ ،‬ﺟﺒَـْﻴ ٌﻞ‪َ ،‬ﺟﺒَﻠ ﱞﻰ‪َ ،‬و ُﻫ َﻮ َ‬ ‫ﻨﺴ ُ‬ ‫ْ ٌ َُ َ ّ‬ ‫ف‪ :‬ا ْﺳ ٌﻢ ﻳﺜَ ﱠﲎ‪َ ،‬وُْﳚ َﻤ ُﻊ ُو ﻳُ َ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﺮﺟ ُﻊ إﻟَْﻴﻪ اَْو ﻳَـﺘَﻔﱠﺮعُ ﻣْﻨﻪُ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻ ْﻮَرﺗﻪ ْ‬ ‫ﺲ ﻟَﻪُ ْ‬ ‫ا ْﺳ ٌﻢ َﺟﺎﻣ ٌﺪ َﻏ ْﲑُ َﻣ ُ‬ ‫ﺎﺧ ْﻮذ ﻣ ْﻦ َﻏ ْﲑﻩ‪ .‬أى أﻧَﻪُ ُوﺿ َﻊ َﻋﻠَﻰ ُ‬ ‫أﺻ ٌﻞ ﻳُ َ‬ ‫اﳊَﺎﻟﻴَﺔ اﺑْﺘ َﺪاءً ﻓَ ْﻠﻴ َ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫أﺻ ٌﻞ ﻳَـْﺮ َﺟ ُﻊ إﻟَْﻴﻪ َو ﻳـَﺘَـ َﻔﱠﺮغُ ﻣْﻨﻪُ‪.‬‬ ‫ب‪.‬‬ ‫ا ْﺳ ٌﻢ ُﻣ ْﺸﺘَ ٌﻖ َﻣﺄُ ْﺧﻮذٌ ﻣ ْﻦ َﻏ ِْﲑﻩ‪ْ ،‬‬

‫‪‬‬ ‫‪‬‬

12

 

‫( ﻗَﺎﺗِ ٌﻞ‬Murderer) - Derived subject ‫( َﻣ ْﻘﺘُـ ْﻮٌل‬One who is murdered) - Derived object

ِ َ‫ﻓ‬ 3. Active Noun - Subject (‫ﺎﻋ ٍﻞ‬

‫)اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬

‫ )ا( اﻟﻒ‬after the first alphabet and ِ marking the sign ‫ﺴﺮةٌ( ﹻ‬ َ ْ ‫ ) َﻛ‬on the central alphabet, e.g., ‫ﺻٌﺮ‬Vَ (one who helps --helper), 9 ِ ِ ‫( ﻓَﺎﺗِ ٌﺢ‬one who opens -- opener), ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫( َﻛﺎﺗ‬writer), ‫( ﻗَﺎﺗ ٌﻞ‬killer), etc . This noun is derived from the root word by adding

4. Passive Noun - Object (‫َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮ ٍل‬

‫)اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬

This noun is derived from the root word by prefixing “‫ ” َم‬and inserting “‫ ”ا‬between the

second and third letter. The central alphabet is marked with the sign ‫ﺿ ﱠﻤﺔٌ( ﹹ‬ َ ), e.g., ‫ﺼ ْﻮٌر‬ ُ ‫َﻣْﻨ‬ 10 (one who is helped), ‫ح‬ ٌ ‫( َﻣ ْﻔﺘُـ ْﻮ‬that is opened), ‫( َﻣ َﻘﺘُـ ْﻮل‬one who is killed) .

ٍ ‫آﻟ‬ 5. Instrument Noun (‫َﺔ‬

‫)اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬

ِ :‫ ُﻣ ْﺸﺘَ ﱞﻖ َو َﺟ ِﺎﻣ ٌﺪ‬:‫ف ﻳَ َﺪ ﱡل َﻋﻠﻰ أ ََداةِ اﻟْ َﻌ َﻤ ِﻞ َوُﻫ َﻮ ﻗِ ْﺴ َﻤﺎ ٌن‬ ٌ ‫ﺼِّﺮ‬ َ َ‫ُﻫ َﻮ ا ْﺳ ٌﻢ ُﻣﺘ‬ The Instrument Noun denotes or indicates the names of working instruments (‫أداةُ اﻟْ َﻌ َﻤ ِﻞ‬ َ ).

There are three forms of this noun:

i. ii. iii.

ِ ‫ث = ِﻣ ْﻔ َﻌ ٌﻞ‬ ٌ ‫( ْﳏَﺮ‬a plough), root word: ‫ث‬ َ ،‫ َر‬،‫ث = َح‬ َ ‫ َﺣَﺮ‬. ِ ‫ﺎل‬ ٌ ‫ﺎح= ِﻣ ْﻔ َﻌ‬ َ =‫ﻓَـﺘَ َﺢ‬. َ ،‫ف‬ ٌ َ‫( ﻣ ْﻔﺘ‬a key), root word: ‫ َح‬،‫ت‬ ٌ‫( ِﻣْﺮَو َﺣﺔٌ = ِﻣ ْﻔ َﻌﻠَﺔ‬a fan), root words: ‫ َح‬،‫ َو‬،‫ َرَو َح= َر‬.

ِ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔ‬ 6. Comparative Noun (‫ﻀ ْﻴ ٍﻞ‬ 6.1.

‫)اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬

It is a noun that is used for comparing things. It is derived from the root word ‫ﻓَـ َﻌﻞ‬. The

َ ِ word ‫ ﻓَﻌْﻴﻞ‬means one who has the capacity to work. The forms ‫( أَﻓْـ َﻌﻞ‬masculine) and ‫ﻓُـ ْﻌﻠ ٰﯽ‬ ٌ ُ

(feminine) show comparative capacity of doing more work, following examples throw more light:

Noun

ِ (short) َ ٌ‫ﺻﻐ ْﲑ‬ ٌ‫( َﻛﺒِ ْﲑ‬great, big) 9 10

Comparative Masculine

Comparative Feminine

‫أﺻﻐَُﺮ‬ ْ (shorter) ُ‫( أ ْﻛ َﱪ‬greater, bigger)

‫ﺻ ْﻐﺮ ٰی‬ ُ (shorter) ‫( ُﻛ ْﱪ ٰی‬greater, bigger)

Plural

‫ﺻﻐٌَﺮ‬ ُ ‫ُﻛ ٌَﱪ‬

11

ِ ‫ اﺳﻢ اﻟْ َﻔ‬and ‫ اِﺳﻢ اﻟْﻤ ْﻔﻌﻮِل‬for detail. See unit no.7, part 2 ‫ﺎﻋﻞ‬ ُْ َ ُ ْ ُْ See unit no.7, part 2 for more detail.

ُ َ ٔ‫ﱪ و أَ ْﺻ َﻐ ُﺮ ﲨﻌﻪ اﺻﺎﻏ ُِﺮ ا‬ ٌ َ ‫ ُﮐ‬G ‫ﻌﲇ ﳓﻮ ُﮐ ْﱪ ٰی‬ ٰ ‫ وزن ُﻓ‬G ‫ُﻓ َﻌ ٌﻞ ﲨﻊ ﻻﰟ‬ L‫ﮐﱪ ﲨﻌﻪ اﰷ‬

‫۔‬

11

13

6.2.

‫ﺐ‬ َ (hard) ٌ ‫ﺻ ْﻌ‬ ِ ٍ ‫ﺎﱃ‬ ٌ ‫( ) َﻋﺎل( َﻋ‬high)

‫ﺐ‬ ْ َ‫( أ‬harder) ُ ‫ﺻ َﻌ‬ ‫( أ َْﻋﻠَﻰ‬higher)

‫ﺻ ْﻌ ٰﱮ‬ ُ (harder)

Generally, the comparative form is indefinite

ٌ‫ﻧَ ِﻜَﺮة‬

‫ﺐ‬ ُ ٌ ‫ﺻ َﻌ‬

and the superlative form is definite

ٌ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَﺔ‬, e.g. ‫َﲪَ ُﺪ أ َْﻋﻠَ ُﻢ ِﻣ ْﻦ ﺑَ َﺸ ٍﲑ‬ ْ ‫( أ‬Ahmad is more learned than Basheer.) ٍ‫ﲪ‬ َِ ‫( ﻫﻮ أ ْﻛﱪ ِﻣﻦ‬He is bigger or greater than Hameed.) ‫ ِﻣﻦ‬is used for than. ‫ﻴﺪ‬ ْ َُ َ ُ ْ ِ ‫ﻀ ُﻞ‬ َ ْ‫ﺐ ْاﻷﻓ‬ ُ ‫( اَﻟْﻄﱠﺎﻟ‬The best student.)

i. ii. iii.

Superlative is expressed as under:

‫( ُﻫ َﻮ ْاﻻَﻃْ َﻮ ُل‬He is the tallest.) ِ ‫أﻋﻠَ ُﻢ اﻟﻨ‬ ‫ﱠﺎس‬ ْ ‫( ُﳏَ ﱠﻤ ٌﺪ‬Muhammad is the most learned of the people).

a. b. 6.3.

When the second and the third radicals are the same, the forms of elective are:

Noun

‫( َﺷ ِﺪﻳْ ٌﺪ‬Strong) ‫( ﻗَﻠِْﻴ ٌﻞ‬few/ little) 6.4.

Comparative masculine

Comparative feminine

Plural

‫( اَ َﺷ ﱡﺪ‬stronger)

‫ُﺷﺪﱠى‬ ‫ﻗُـﻠﱠﻰ‬

‫َﺷ َﺪ ٌد‬ ‫ﻗَـﻠَ ٌﻞ‬

‫(أَﻗَ ﱡﻞ‬more little)

Two irregular elective (adjective of superiority) are ٌ‫ﺧ ْﲑ‬ َ (better, best) and ‫( َﺷﱞﺮ‬worst).

They are used as:

6.5

ِ ُ‫ َﺧ ٌﲑ ﻣْﻨﻪ‬Vَ ‫أ‬ ِ ‫ُﻫ َﻮ َﺧ ْﲑُ اﻟﻨ‬ ‫ﱠﺎس‬ ‫َﻫ َﺬا َﺷٌﺮ ِﻣﻦ ذَﻟِﻚ‬ ‫ﻚ ُﻫ ْﻢ َﺷﱡﺮ اﻟَِْﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬ َ ِ‫ْأوٰﻟﺌ‬

I am better than him. He is the best among mankind. He is worse than that. They are the worst of creatures (98:6).

Adjectives which denote colors or bodily defects have their elatives (adjective of superiority) by prefixing ‫ﺷ ﱠﺪ‬ َ َ‫ ا‬to their nouns which come in the accusative form, e.g.

‫( أَ ْﺳ َﻮ ُد‬black) ‫َﲪَُﺮ‬ ْ ‫( أ‬red)

‫( أَ َﺷ ﱡﺪ َﺳ َﻮ ًادا‬More black) ً‫( أَ َﺷ ﱡﺪ ُﲪَْﺮة‬More red)

Use of elatives (adjectives of superiority) in daily usage sentences:

‫ﺖ أَ ْﻛ َﱪُ ِﻣ ِّﲎ‬ َ ْ‫أﻧ‬ ‫أﻳْ َﻦ ا ْﳉَ ِﺎﻣ َﻌﺔُ اﻟْ ُﻜ ْﱪ ٰى؟‬

ª!$# ÏΘr& ãΝn=ôãr& öΝçFΡr&u ö≅è%

‫ﻠﻰ‬ ٰ ‫ﰉ ْاﻷ ْﻋ‬ َِّ‫ُﺳْﺒ َﺤﺎ َن َر‬

You are bigger than me. Where is the biggest university? Say, “do you know more or is it Allah (who knows better)?” Glorification of my sustainer who is the Highest.

14

‫ﺎﺿﺎ ِﻣ َﻦ اﻟْ َﻤ ِﺎء‬ ً َ‫ﱭ أَ َﺷ ﱡﺪ ﺑـَﻴ‬ َُ ‫اَﻟﻠﱠ‬ ِ ‫ﻚ‬ َ ‫َﻫ َﺬا َﺧ ٌْﲑ ِﻣ ْﻦ ذَﻟ‬ َ‫اَﻟِّﺮﻳْ ُﺢ اﻟْﻴَـ ْﻮَم اَ َﺷ ﱠﺪ ِﻣْﻨـ َﻬﺎ اﻟْﺒَﺎ ِر َﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺼ ٰﻠﻮةُ ﻟَِﻮﻗْﺘِ َﻬﺎ‬ ‫َﻋ َﻤ ِﺎل اﻟ ﱠ‬ ْ ‫ﻀ ُﻞ ْاﻷ‬ َ ْ‫أَﻓ‬ ِ ‫َﺧ ْﲑُ اﻟﻨ‬ ‫ﺎس‬ َ ‫ﱠﺎس َﻣ ْﻦ ﻳَـْﻨـ َﻔ ُﻊ اﻟﻨﱠ‬ ِِ ‫ﲔ اَ ْﺣ َﺴﻨُـ ُﻬ ْﻢ ُﺧﻠُ ًﻘﺎ‬ َ ْ‫اَﻓ‬ َْ ‫ﻀ ُﻞ اﻟْ ُﻤ ْﺆﻣﻨ‬ ِ ‫ﻚ ُﻫ ْﻢ َﺷﱡﺮ اﻟﻨ‬ ‫ﱠﺎس‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوﻟﺌ‬ ِ ‫ﻚ‬ َ ‫ُﻫ َﻮ أَ ْﺷ َﺠ ُﻊ ِﻣ ْﻦ ذَﻟ‬ ‫ﻀ ُﻞ‬ َ ‫ُﻫ َﻮ اَﻟْﱠﺮ ُﺟ ُﻞ ْاﻷَﻓ‬ ُ‫اَ­ُ أَ ْﻛ َﱪ‬ ِ ‫َﺧ ْﲑُ اﻟﻨ‬ ‫ﱠﺎس اَ ْﺣ َﺴﻨُـ ُﻬ ْﻢ ُﺧﻠًُﻘﺎ‬ ‫ﱭ اَﻧْـ َﻔ ُﻊ ِﻣ َﻦ اﻟْ َﻤ ِﺎء؟‬ َُ ‫َﻫ ِﻞ اﻟﻠﱠ‬ ِ ُ‫ﻫ َﻰ َﺣ ْﺴﻨَﺎء‬ ‫ﺾ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻫ ﱠﻦ ﺑِْﻴ‬

The milk is whiter than the water. This is better than that. Today the wind is more violent than yesterday. The best of deed is prayer (establishment of salat) with in its time.

The best man is he who serves mankind. The best of the believers is one who has best manners. They are the worst of mankind. He is bolder than that. He is the best man. Allah is the greatest (of all). The best man is he who has the best manners. Is milk more useful than water? She is very beautiful. They are white women.

7. Exaggeration Noun (‫ُﻣﺒَﺎﻟَﻐَ ٍﺔ‬

‫)اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬

It is a noun that is used to express an excess of some qualities. The following terms of the

ِ root words ‫ ﻓَـ َﻌﻞ‬are used for the exaggeration noun (‫ﺳﻢ ُﻣﺒَﺎﻟَﻐَ ٍﺔ‬ ْ ‫)ا‬: َ

Terms of the Root Word- ‫ﻓَـ َﻌﻞ‬

‫ﻓَﻌِ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ﻓَﻌِْﻴ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ﻓَـﻌُ ْﻮٌل‬ ‫ﺎل‬ ُ ‫ﻓَـ ﱠﻌ‬

‫ﺎل‬ ٌ ‫ﻓُـ ﱠﻌ‬ ِِ ‫ﻴﻞ‬ ٌ ‫ﻓ ّﻌ‬ ‫ﺎل‬ ٌ ‫ِﻣ ْﻔ َﻌ‬ ‫ِﻣ ْﻔﻌِْﻴ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ﺎل‬ ٌ ‫ﻓَـ َﻌ‬ ‫ﻓَﺎﻋُ ْﻮٌل‬ ‫ﻓَـ ﱡﻌ ْﻮٌل‬

َ

Exaggeration Noun

‫َﺣ ِﺬٌر‬ ‫َرِﺣْﻴ ٌﻢ‬ ‫أَ ُﻛ ْﻮٌل‬ ‫َﻋﻼﱠٌم‬

‫ُﻛﺒﱠ ٌﺎر‬ ‫ِﺻ ِّﺪﻳْ ٌﻖ‬ ‫ِﻣْﻨـ َﻌ ٌﺎم‬ ِ ِ ‫ﲔ‬ ٌْ ‫ﻣ ْﺴﻜ‬ ‫ﺎب‬ ٌ ‫َﻋ َﺠ‬ ‫ﻓَ ُﺎرْو ٌق‬ ‫ﻗَـﻨـ ْﱡﻮٌم‬

ُ

English Very cautious Very merciful Heavy eater Very learned Very elderly Very truthful Great bestower Very poor Very peculiar

Great differentiator Established one

15

‫ﻓُـ ﱡﻌ ْﻮٌل‬ ‫ﻓَـ ﱠﻌ ٌﻞ‬

8. Relative Noun ‫اﳌﻨﺴﻮب‬

‫س‬ ٌ ‫ﻗُﺪ ْﱡو‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗَـﻠﱠ‬

‫اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬

Very holy One who finds excuses

When “‫ى‬ ٌ ” is suffixed to certain nouns, the derived word conveys the sense of belonging, e.g.

ِ ‫ﱠوﻟ َِﺔ‬ ْ ‫ا ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟﺪ‬

Relative Noun

English

‫ب‬ ٌ ‫َﻋَﺮ‬ ‫ِﻫﻨ ٌﺪ‬ ‫َ]ﻛِ ْﺴﺘَﺎ ُن‬ ‫ﻛﺸﻤﲑ‬ ٌ ِ ‫ﲔ‬ َْ ‫ﺼ‬ ّ ْ‫اَﻟ‬ ‫اق‬ ُ ‫اَﻟْﻌَِﺮ‬ ‫َ\ َ] ُن‬ \َ‫َﻣﺎﻟِْﻴ ِﺰ‬

‫ﰉ‬ ‫َﻋَﺮِ ﱞ‬ ‫ى‬ ‫ِﻫْﻨ ِﺪ ﱞ‬ ‫َ]ﻛِ ْﺴﺘَ ِﺎﱏﱡ‬ ‫ى‬ ‫َﻛ ْﺸ ِﻤ ِْﲑ ﱞ‬ ِ ‫ﻴﲎ‬ ‫ﺼ ِﱞ‬ ّ ْ‫اَﻟ‬ ‫اَﻟْﻌَِﺮاﻗِ ﱡﻰ‬ ‫\]ِﱏﱞ‬ َ ‫ى‬ ‫َﻣﺎﻟِْﻴ ِﺰ ﱞ‬

Belonging to Arabic

The Name of Country

ِ ‫واﻟ ﱠﺰﻣ‬ 9. The Noun of Place and Time (‫ﺎن‬ َ

Belonging to Pakistan Belonging to Kashmir Belonging to China Belonging to Iraq Belonging to Japan Belonging to Malaysia

It is based on the same pattern as ism al-maful, i.e., ‫ َﻣ ْﻔ َﻌﻞ‬e.g.

ِ ٌ ‫( ﻣْﺘﺤ‬Museum). ‫ﻒ‬ ُ َ‫ أ َْﲢ‬,‫ﻒ‬ ُ ‫ ﻳـُْﺘﺤ‬,‫ﻒ‬ َ ُ 2. ‫ ﻓَـﺘَ َﺢ‬,‫ ﻳـَ ْﻔﺘَ ُﺢ‬,‫( َﻣ ْﻔﺘَ ٌﺢ‬Opening). ‫ﺼَﺮ‬ 3. َ َ‫ ﻧ‬,‫ﺼ ُﺮ‬ َ ‫ ﻳـَْﻨ‬,‫ﺼٌﺮ‬ َ ‫( َﻣْﻨ‬Helping). ِ ِ 4. ‫ﺲ‬ ٌ ‫( َْﳎﻠ‬Sitting). َ َ‫ َﺟﻠ‬,‫ﺲ‬ ُ ‫ َْﳚﻠ‬,‫ﺲ‬ Exceptions to the Rules 5. ‫ ﻣ ْﺸ ِﺮ َق‬,‫ ﻳَ ْﺸ ُﺮ َق‬,‫( َﻣ ْﺸَﺮ َق‬East). ‫ َﻣ ْﻐ ِﺮب‬,‫ب‬ 6. ُ ‫ ﻳـَ ْﻐ ُﺮ‬,‫ب‬ ُ ‫( َﻣ ْﻐَﺮ‬West). 7. ‫ َﺳ َﺠ َﺪ‬,‫ ﻳَ ْﺴ ُﺠ ُﺪ‬,‫( َﻣ ْﺴ ِﺠ ٌﺪ‬Mosque).

1.

ِ ‫)اِﺳﻢ اﻟْﻤ َﻜ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َ ُْ

Belonging to India

ٌ

16

َٔ ْ ُ َ َ ْ َ ‫۔ ﻋﺪد اﻻﲰﺎ ِء‬1.2 The Number of Nouns ٌ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬

‫َﲨْ ٌﻊ‬

(Plural)

ِ ‫َﲨْﻊ ﺗَﻜ‬ ‫ْﺴ ِْﲑ‬ ُ

(Broken Plural)

(Dual)

ِ‫و‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ

(Singular)

ِ ٌ‫َﲨْ ٌﻊ َﺳﺎﱂ‬

(Sound Plural)

ِ ِ ُ ُ‫ﲨﻊ اﳌﻮﻧﺚ اﻟﺴﺎﱂ‬

(The Sound Feminine Plural)

ِ ُ ُ‫ﲨﻊ اﳌﺬ ّﮐﺮاﻟﺴﺎﱂ‬

(The Sound Masculine Plural)

17

Introduction to the 2nd part of Unit No.01 The 2nd part of this unit is about number of nouns. In Arabic language, there are three numbers:

ِ ‫( و‬singular), ٌ‫( ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴﱠﺔ‬dual) and ‫( ﲨَْﻊ‬plural). The singular number denotes only one thing, ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ ٌ َ the dual (two things) and the plural number denotes more than two things.

ِ ‫ﱠ‬ The plural number has two kinds: sound and broken plural (‫ﺴٌﺮ‬ َ ‫َﺳﺎﱂٌ َو ﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣﻜ‬

‫)ﲨَْ ٌﻊ‬.

The sound plural is divided into two kinds: masculine sound plural and feminine sound

plural (ٌ‫ﺳ ِﺎﱂ‬ َ

ِ ‫ﺚ‬ ٌ َ‫)ﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﺳﺎﱂٌ َوﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣ َﺆﻧ‬.

There is a difference between sound plural and broken plural:

In sound plural (ٌ‫ﺳ ِﺎﱂ‬ ٌ ‫ ) ُﺣﺮْو‬of the singular noun/word remain in the same َ ‫ ) َﲨَ ٌﻊ‬alphabets (‫ف‬

ِ ِ etc. order e.g., ‫ﺴﻠِ ٌﻢ‬ ُ ْ ‫ ُﻣ‬, ‫ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠ َﻤﺎ ٌن‬, ‫ﻣ ْﺴﻠ ُﻤ ْﻮ َن‬,

ُ

In broken plural (‫ﺴٌﺮ‬ ‫ُﻣ َﻜ ﱠ‬

‫) َﲨَ ٌﻊ‬, alphabets and vowels of the singular noun do not remain in ِ ُ‫ ُﻛﺘ‬, etc. the same order e.g., ‫ق‬ ٌ ‫ َوَر‬،‫اق‬ ٌ ‫ اَْوَر‬،‫ﺎب‬ ٌ َ‫ ﻛﺘ‬،‫ﺐ‬ ٌ

Objectives of the 2nd part of Unit No.01 With the help and the grace of Allah (‫)ﺳﺒﺤﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺎﻟ ٰﯽ‬, when you complete the study of this part of unit no.01, you will achieve its objectives and will be able: 1.

to know the three kinds of noun with respect to number, i.e., singular, dual and plural.

2.

to know about the singular Arabic nouns/words.

3.

to know about dual Arabic nouns/words.

4.

to know the way of converting from singular noun to dual.

5.

to know about plural and its two kinds: sound plural and broken plural.

6.

to know about two kinds of sound plural: masculine sound plural and feminine sound plural.

7.

to know the Arabic nouns/word of masculine and feminine sound plural.

8.

to know about the broken plural and its Arabic nouns.

18

‫َﲰَ ِﺎء‬ ْ ‫۔ َﻋ َﺪ ُد ْاﻷ‬1.2

The Number of Nouns In Arabic language, there are three kinds of noun with respect to number: (singular), ٌ‫( ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬dual), and ‫ﲨْ ٌﻊ‬ َ (plural):

ِ ‫ و‬or ‫ﻣ ْﻔﺮٌد‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ َُ

ِ ‫ و‬or ‫( ﻣ ْﻔﺮٌد‬Singular) 1. ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ َُ

َِ (Hameed), ‫( أَ ْﲪَ ُﺪ‬Ahmad), ٌ‫( ﺑَ ِﺸ ْﲑ‬Bashir), ‫ﲪْﻴ ٌﺪ‬ ‫( َ]ﻛِ ْﺴﺘَﺎ ٌن‬Pakistan), \َ‫( َﻣﺎﻟِْﻴ ِﺰ‬Malaysia), ‫( َر ُﺟ ٌﻞ‬a Man), ٌ‫( اِ ْﻣَﺮأة‬a Woman), ‫( ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ ٌﻢ‬a Muslim), ‫َﻛﺎﻓٌِﺮ‬ ِ (a pious), ‫( ﻛِﺘﺎب‬a book), ٌ‫( ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬a watch), ‫( ﻃَﺎﻟِﺐ‬male student), ‫( ﻳ ُﺪ‬a (a disbeliever), ‫ﺢ‬ َ َ ٌ َ َ ٌ ‫ﺻﺎﻟ‬ َ ٌ ِ ِ ‫( ﺑِﻨ‬a daughter), ٌ‫ﻃَﺎﻟِﺒﺔ‬ hand), ‫ﺖ‬ ٌ ‫( ﺑـَْﻴ‬a house), ٌ‫( َﺳﻴﱠ َﺎرة‬a car), ‫( اﺑْ ٌﻦ‬a son), ‫( َوﻟَ ٌﺪ‬a boy), ٌ‫ اﺑْـﻨَﺔ‬, ‫ﺖ‬ ٌْ َ ِ (female student), ‫ب‬ ٌ ]َ (a door), ٌ‫ﻓ َﺬة‬Vَ (a window), ‫( َﺟﺒَ ٌﻞ‬a mountain) etc. It denotes one person, place or thing, e.g.,

2. ٌ‫( ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬Dual)

ِ ‫ ﻃَﺎﻟِﺒ‬،‫ﺎن‬ ِ َ‫( ﻃَﺎﻟِﺒـﺘ‬two It denotes two persons, places or things, and ends in “‫( ”ا ِن‬aani) e.g., ‫ﺎن‬ َ َ

ِ ‫ ﻃَ ِﺮﻳـ َﻘ‬،‫ﺎن‬ ِ َ‫( ﻃَ ِﺮﻳـ َﻘﺘ‬two ways, paths), ‫( ﻣﺴ ِﺠ َﺪ ِان‬two ‫ ِن‬V‫ﺎ‬ َ ‫( ُد ﱠﻛ‬two shops), ‫ َﺳﺒِْﻴ َﻼ ِن‬،‫ﺎن‬ ْ ْ َْ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ Mosques), ‫ﺟﺒَﻼَ ِن‬ َ (two mountains), ‫ ﺑـَﻠَ َﺪان‬،‫ن‬6َ ‫( ﺑ ْﻠ َﺪ‬two countries), ‫( َﻣﺪﻳْـﻨَـﺘَﺎن‬two cities), ‫ﻗَـ ْﺮﻳـَﺘَﺎن‬ ِ َ‫( ﺳﺎﻋﺘ‬two watches), ‫ﺎن‬ ِ َ‫( ﺑـﻴـﺘ‬two houses), ‫( ﻳ َﺪ ِان‬two hands), ‫رﺟ َﻼ ِن‬ (two villages, towns), ‫ﺎن‬ َ َ َْ َُ َ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ (two men), ‫ﺎ] ِن‬ َ َ‫( ﻛﺘ‬two books), ‫( ﻗَـﻠَ َﻤﺎن‬two pens), ‫ن‬6‫( ا ْﻣَﺮ َأ‬two women), ‫ن‬6َ‫( َﺳﻴﱠ َﺎر‬two cars), ِ ،‫ ِن‬6‫( ﺻ ِﺎﳊ َﺎ‬two men/women pious), ‫ﺎن‬ ِ َ‫( اِﺑـﻨ‬two sons), ‫ﺎن‬ ِ ‫ﺎﳊ‬ ِ ‫ ﻣﺴﻠِﻤ‬،‫ﺎن‬ ِ ِ ‫( َوﻟَ َﺪ ِان‬two boys), ‫ﺎن‬ َ َ ْ َ َ ‫ﺻ‬ َ ْ ُ َ‫ُﻣ ْﺴﻠ َﻤﺘ‬ students),

(two men/women Muslim),

ِ َ‫( ﻣ َﺪرﺳﺘ‬two schools), ‫ﺎن‬ ِ َ‫( ﺟ ِﺎﻣﻌﺘ‬two ‫ َﻛﺎﻓَِﺮ ِان‬،‫ ِن‬6َ‫( َﻛﺎﻓَِﺮ‬two disbelievers), ‫ﺎن‬ َ َ ََ َ

ِ َ‫( ُﻏﺮﻓَـﺘ‬two rooms), etc. universities), ‫ﺎن‬ ْ

Converting of Singular to Dual

The way of converting (forming) a dual from singular is by adding nominative (ُ‫اﻟْﱠﺮﻓْﻌِﻴَﺔ‬ (ُ‫ﳉَ ِﺮﻳَﺔ‬ ْ ‫)اَ ْﳊَﺎﻟَﺔُ ا‬, e.g.

ّ

Singular

‫ﲔ‬ ٌْ ‫َﻋ‬

An eye

‫ﻳَ ٌﺪ‬

A hand

‫( ﹷ ِان‬aini) for the

ُ‫ )اَ ْﳊَﺎﻟﺔ‬and ‫( ﹷ ﻳْ ِﻦ‬aini) for the accusative (ُ‫ﱠﺼﺒِﻴَﺔ‬ َ ‫ )اَ ْﳊَﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﻨ‬or the genitive Dual Nominative Case

Accusative & Singular Case

Two eyes

Two eyes

ِ َ‫ﻋﻴـﻨ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َْ ‫ﻳَ َﺪ ِان‬

Two hands

ِ ْ َ‫َﻋْﻴـﻨ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ ‫ﻳَ َﺪﻳْ ِﻦ‬

Two hands

19

ٌ‫َﻋﺎﻟِ َﻤﺔ‬

ِ َ‫ﻋﺎﻟِﻤﺘ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َ َ

ِ ْ َ‫َﻋﺎﻟِﻤﺘ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ َ

One learned woman

Two learned women

Two learned women

A king

Two kings

Two kings

A queen

Two queen

Two queen

‫ﻚ‬ ٌ ِ‫َﻣﻠ‬

ٌ‫َﻣﻠِ َﻜﺔ‬

ِ ‫ﻣﻠِ َﻜ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َ

ِ ْ ‫َﻣﻠِ َﻜ‬ ‫ﲔ‬

ِ َ‫ﻣﻠِ َﻜﺘ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َ

ِ ْ َ‫َﻣﻠِ َﻜﺘ‬ ‫ﲔ‬

3. ‫ﻊ‬ ٌ ْ‫( َﲨ‬Plural)

‫ﻮك‬ ٌ ُ‫( ُﻣﻠ‬kings), ‫( ﺑـُْﻠ َﺪا ٌن‬countries), ‫ُﻣ ُﺪ ٌن‬ ِ ِ (cities) ‫( َﻣ َﺪا ِرس‬schools), ‫ب‬ ٌ ‫ِر َﺟ‬ ٌ َ‫( ﻃَﺎﻟﺒ‬students), ‫ﺎت‬ ٌ ‫( َﺟﺎﻣ َﻌ‬universities), ‫( اَﻗْﻼَ ٌم‬pens), ‫ﺎل‬ ٌ ‫ ﻃُﻼﱠ‬،‫ﺎت‬ ُ ِ (men), ٌ‫ ﻧِﺴﺂء‬، ٌ‫ﺴﻮة‬ ٌ ‫( ﺑـُﻴُـ ْﻮ‬houses), etc. َ َ ْ ‫( ﻧ‬women), ‫ت‬ It denotes more than two persons, places or things,

‫اع ا ْﳉَ ْﻤ ِﻊ‬ ُ ‫( أﻧْـ َﻮ‬Kinds of the Plural)

ِ‫ﺳ‬ There are two kinds of plural: ٌ‫ﺎﱂ‬ َ

ِ ‫اﻟ ﱠﺴ‬ 3.1. ُ‫ﺎﱂ‬

‫( اَ ْﳉَ ْﻤ ُﻊ‬The Sound Plural)

‫( َﲨْ ٌﻊ‬Sound plural) and‫( َﲨْ ٌﻊ ُﻣ َﻜ َﺴٌﺮ‬Broken plural).

In sound plural, alphabets of the singular form remain in the same order. This kind of plural is further divided into two:

ِ ُ‫( ﲨﻊ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺬ ﱠﻛ ِﺮ اﻟ ﱠﺴﺎﱂ‬The Sound Masculine Plural) ِ ِ ُ‫( ﲨﻊ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺆﻧﱡﺚ اﻟ ﱠﺴﺎﱂ‬The Sound Feminine Plural)

i. ii.

ِ‫ﺴ‬ i. ُ‫ﺎﱂ‬ ‫اﻟ ﱠ‬

‫( ﲨَْ ُﻊ اﻟ ُْﻤ َﺬ ﱠﻛ ِﺮ‬The Sound Masculine Plural)

ِ ‫ ) و‬by adding ‫و َن‬ It is formed from the singular (‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ ْ َ

‫( ﹹ‬una) to the nominative case ( ُ‫اَ ْﳊَﺎﻟَﺔ‬

ْ ُ‫)اَ ْﳊَﺎﻟَﺔ‬, e.g. ُ‫ﱠﺼﺒِﻴَﺔ‬ َ ‫)اﻟﻨ‬, ‫( ﹻ ﻳْ َﻦ‬ina) to the accusative case (ُ‫ﱠﺼﺒِﻴَﺔ‬ َ ‫)اَ ْﳊَﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﻨ‬, or to the genitive case (ُ‫اﳉَِّﺮﻳَﺔ‬ Singular

Plural Nominative Case

Plural Accusative & genitive case

A scholar

Scholars

Scholars

A Muslim

Muslims

Muslims

A believer

Believers

Believers

A pious person

Pious

Pious

ِ ٌ‫َﻋﺎﱂ‬

‫ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ ٌﻢ‬ ِ‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﺆﻣ ٌﻦ‬ ُ

‫ﺻﺎﻟِ ٌﺢ‬ َ ‫َﺳﺎ ِر ٌق‬

A thief

‫َﻋﺎﻟِ ُﻤ ْﻮ َن‬

‫ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ ُﻤ ْﻮ َن‬ ِ‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﺆﻣﻨُـ ْﻮ َن‬ ُ

ِ‫ﺻ‬ ‫ﺎﳊُْﻮ َن‬ َ ‫َﺳﺎ ِرﻗُـ ْﻮ َن‬

Thieves

ِ ِْ‫َﻋﺎﳌ‬ ‫ﲔ‬

ِ ْ ‫َﻣﺴﻠِ ِﻤ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ ْ ِِ ‫ﲔ‬ َ ْ ‫ُﻣﺆﻣﻨ‬

ِِ ‫ﲔ‬ َ ْ ‫ﺻﺎﳊ‬ َ ِ ْ ِ‫َﺳﺎ ِرﻗ‬ ‫ﲔ‬

Thieves

20

ii. ُ‫ﺴ ِﺎﱂ‬ ‫اﻟ ﱠ‬

‫ﺚ‬ ُ ‫( اَﻟ ُْﻤ َﺆﻧﱠ‬The Sound Feminine Plural)

The feminine sound plural is made (formed) by the suffix after dropping the feminine ending ُ‫ ة‬-ٌ‫( ة‬tun-tu), e.g.

‫ات‬ ٌ ‫ﹷ‬

(atun) to the singular

Singular (f.)

Plural (f.)

Singular (f.)

Plural (f.)

A thief

Thieves

A Muslim

Muslims

ٌ‫َزْو َﺟﺔ‬

‫ﺎت‬ ٌ ‫َزْو َﺟ‬

Disbeliever

Disbelievers

ٌ‫َﺳﺎ ِرﻗَﺔ‬

‫ﺎت‬ ٌ َ‫َﺳﺎ ِرﻗ‬

Wife

Wives

ٌ‫ﺎﻋﺔ‬ َ ‫َﺳ‬

‫ﺎت‬ ٌ ‫ﺎﻋ‬ َ ‫َﺳ‬

ٌ‫ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ َﻤﺔ‬ ٌ‫َﻛﺎﻓَِﺮة‬

ٌ‫ُﻣ َﺪ ِّر َﺳﺔ‬

ِ ‫ﺎت‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ ْﺴﻠ َﻤ‬ ِ ‫ات‬ ٌ ‫َﻛﺎﻓ َﺮ‬

‫ﺎت‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺪ ِّر َﺳ‬

Watch

Watches

A teacher

Teachers

A pious

Pious women

A word

Words

A protector

Protectors

A student

Students

ِ‫ﺻ‬ ٌ‫ﺎﳊَﺔ‬ َ

ٌ‫َﺣﺎﻓِﻈَﺔ‬

ِ ‫ﺎت‬ ٌ َ‫ﺻﺎﳊ‬ َ

ِ ‫ﺎت‬ ٌ َ‫َﺣﺎﻓﻈ‬

ٌ‫َﻛﻠِ َﻤﺔ‬ ٌ‫ﻃَﺎﻟِﺒَﺔ‬

ِ ‫ﺎت‬ ٌ ‫َﻛﻠ َﻤ‬ ِ ‫ﺎت‬ ٌ َ‫ﻃَﺎﻟﺒ‬

ÏM≈s%ω≈¢Á9$#uρ tÏ%ω≈¢Á9$#uρ ÏM≈tFÏΖ≈s)ø9$#uρ tÏGÏΖ≈s)ø9$#uρ ÏM≈oΨÏΒ÷σßϑø9$#uρ šÏΖÏΒ÷σßϑø9$#uρ ÏM≈yϑÎ=ó¡ßϑø9$#uρ šÏϑÎ=ó¡ßϑø9$# β ¨ Î)﴿ ÏM≈yϑÍ×‾≈¢Á9$#uρ tÏϑÍ×‾≈¢Á9$#uρ ÏM≈s%Ïd‰|ÁtFßϑø9$#uρ tÏ%Ïd‰|ÁtFßϑø9$#uρ ÏM≈yèϱ≈y‚ø9$#uρ tÏèϱ≈y‚ø9$#uρ ÏN≡uŽÉ9≈¢Á9$#uρ tΎÉ9≈¢Á9$#uρ ﴾$Vϑ‹Ïàtã #—ô_r&uρ Zοt Ïøó¨Β Μçλm; ª!$# ‰ £ tãr& ÏN≡tÅ2≡©%!$#uρ #ZŽÏVx. ©!$# š̍Å2≡©%!$#uρ ÏM≈sàÏ≈ysø9$#uρ öΝßγy_ρãèù šÏàÏ≈ptø:$#uρ

(Indeed, the Muslim men and Muslim women, the believing men and believing women, and obedient men and obedient women, the truthful men and truthful women, the patient men and patient women, the humble men and humble women and men and women who give charity, the fasting men and fasting women, the men who guard their private parts and women who do so and the men who remember Allah often and the women who do so for them Allah has prepared forgiveness and a great reward) (33:35). Note: The plural of nouns which do not end in ٌ‫( ة‬tun) or ُ‫( ة‬tu) are also made (formed) by adding

ِ ” to the singular as in ‫َﲰﺎء‬ “‫ات‬ ٌَ

،‫ات‬ ٌ ‫( َﲰَ َﺎو‬sky, heavens).

21 Summary of Number, Singular, Dual and Sound Plural Active

ِ َ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ ‫ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ ٌﻢ‬ ِ ‫ﻣﺴﻠِﻤ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َُْ ‫ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ ُﻤ ْﻮ َن‬

Singular Dual Plural

2. ‫ﺴ ُﺮ‬ َ ‫اﻟ ُْﻤ ﱠﻜ‬

MASCULINE Passive Preposition

‫َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮ ٌل‬ ‫ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ ًﻤﺎ‬ ِ ْ ‫ُﻣﺴﻠِﻤ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ َْ ِِ ‫ﲔ‬ َْ ‫ُﻣ ْﺴﻠﻤ‬

‫ف‬ ٌ ‫َﺣ ْﺮ‬ ‫ُﻣ ْﺴﻠٍِﻢ‬

Active

ِ َ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻞ‬ ٌ‫ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ َﻤﺔ‬ ِ َ‫ﻣﺴﻠِﻤﺘ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َُْ ٍ ‫ﻣﺴﻠِﻤ‬ ‫ﺎت‬ َُْ

FEMININE Passive Preposition

‫َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮ ٌل‬ ‫ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ َﻤ ًﺔ‬ ِ ْ َ‫ُﻣﺴﻠِﻤﺘ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ َْ ٍ ‫ﻣﺴﻠِﻤ‬ ‫ﺎت‬ َ ُْ

‫ف‬ ٌ ‫َﺣ ْﺮ‬ ‫ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ َﻤ ٍﺔ‬

‫( اَ ْﳉَ ْﻤ ُﻊ‬The broken plural)

In broken plural, the original form of the singular is changed by addition or removal of alphabets, and by changing the signs associated with the original alphabets, e.g., ‫ﺳ ْﻮٌل‬ ُ ‫ َر‬is

singular, its plural is ‫ﺳﻞ‬ ٌ ‫ ِر َﺟ‬, or the change of vowels, ُ ‫ ُر‬, and ‫ َر ُﺟﻞ‬is singular, its plural is ‫ﺎل‬

ٌ

ٌ

e.g., ‫ﺳ ٌﺪ‬ َ َ‫ أ‬is singular and its plural is ‫( أُ ُﺳ ٌﺪ‬lions). In Arabic, the broken plural is very widely used, and has many patterns, e.g.

ِ‫و‬ ‫ ُﻣ ْﻔ َﺮٌد‬،‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ Singular

‫َر ُﺟ ٌﻞ‬

A man

ِ ‫ﺎب‬ ٌ َ‫ﻛﺘ‬

A book

‫ ِﺟٌﺮ‬6َ

A trader

ٌ‫َﻣْﻨ ِﺰﻟَﺔ‬

A building

‫َﺷْﻴﻄَﺎ ُن‬

A satan

‫ﺴ ٌﺮ‬ ‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣ َﻜ ﱠ‬

ِ‫و‬ ‫ ُﻣ ْﻔ َﺮٌد‬،‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ

‫ﺎل‬ ٌ ‫ِر َﺟ‬

Singular

Broken Plural

‫ﻗَـﻠَ ٌﻢ‬

‫أﻗْﻼٌَم‬

Broken Plural

‫ﺴ ٌﺮ‬ ‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣ َﻜ ﱠ‬

Men

A pen

Pens

‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ُ‫ُﻛﺘ‬

‫َْﳒ ٌﻢ‬

‫ُﳒُ ْﻮٌم‬

Books

A star

Stars

‫ُﱠﺎر‬ ٌ‫ﲡ‬

‫ﲔ‬ ُ ْ ‫َﻋ‬

‫ﻋُﻴُـ ْﻮ ٌن‬

Traders

‫َﻣﻨَﺎ ِزُل‬

Buildings

ِ ‫َﺷﻴ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ ٌْ ‫ﺎﻃ‬ َ

Satans

An eye

Eyes

ِ ‫ﲎ‬ ٌ ‫َﻏ‬

ِ ٌ‫أَ ْﻋﻨﻴَﺎء‬

‫ﻓَِﻘ ٌْﲑ‬

ُ‫ﻓﻘﺮاء‬ َ

A rich A poor

Rich Poor

Note: 1. In Arabic language, some singulars have more than one broken plurals, e.g.  

‫( َْﲝٌﺮ‬a sea), is a singular noun, it has four plurals: ‫ ِﲝَ ٌﺎر‬،‫ اَ ْﲝَ ٌﺎر‬،‫ ُﲝُ ْﻮٌر‬and ‫( اَ ْﲝٌَﺮ‬seas). ِ ‫أخ‬ ٌ (a brother) is a singular word and its plurals are: ٌ‫ ا ْﺧ َﻮاة‬،ٌ‫ إِ َﺧﺎء‬and ‫إِ ْﺧ َﻮا ٌن‬ (brothers).

22

2.

3.

It is quite common for a word/noun in Arabic to have, in some cases, both the sound

plural (ٌ‫ﺳ ِﺎﱂ‬ َ

‫ )ﲨَْ ٌﻊ‬and broken plural (‫)ﲨَْ ٌﻊ ُﻣ ﱠﻜ َﺴٌﺮ‬, e.g., in the case of ‫ﱮ‬ ٍَِّ‫( ﻧ‬Prophet), its sound plural is ‫ ﻧَﺒِﻴﱡـ ْﻮ َن‬and broken plural is ٌ‫اَﻧْﺒِﻴَﺎء‬. Some words having different plurals convey different meanings, e.g.

‫ﺖ‬ ٌ ‫( ﺑـَْﻴ‬a house): its plurals are two: (a) ‫ت‬ (b) ٌ ‫( ﺑـُﻴُـ ْﻮ‬houses)

(i)

(ii)

(iii)

‫( َﻋْﺒ ٌﺪ‬slave): It has two plurals: (a) ‫( َﻋﺒِْﻴ ٌﺪ‬slaves) (b

‫ﺎت‬ ٌ َ‫( اَﺑْـﻴ‬verses of poetry) ‫ﺎد‬ ٌ َ‫( ِﻋﺒ‬servants, mean)

‫ﲔ‬ ٌْ ‫( َﻋ‬eye) is a singular name, its plurals are: (a) ‫ﲔ‬ (b) ‫( ﻋُﻴُـ ْﻮ ٌن‬springs, fountains). ْ (eyes) ٌ ُ ‫أﻋ‬

‫ﲤَِْﺮﻳْ ُﻦ‬

‫ﲤََﺎ ِرﻳْ ُﻦ‬

ٌ‫َﺣ ِﺪﻳْـ َﻘﺔ‬

An exercise

Exercises

A garden

‫ﻇَْﻔٌﺮ‬

‫أَﻇْ َﻔ ٌﺎر‬

‫َﺟ ٌﺎر‬

‫َﺣ َﺪاﺋِ ٌﻖ‬

Gardens

‫ِﺟ ْ َﲑا ٌن‬

A nail

Nails

A neighbor

‫ﻋُﻨُ ٌﻖ‬

‫أَ ْﻋﻨَﺎ ٌق‬

‫ﺻْﻨ ُﺪ ْو ٌق‬ ُ

ِ َ‫ﺻﻨ‬ ‫ﺎدﻳْ ٌﻖ‬ َ

‫ب‬ ُ ‫َﻋ َﻘﺎ ِر‬

‫ﺻﻨَ ٌﻢ‬ َ

‫ﺎم‬ ٌ َ‫َﺻﻨ‬ ْ‫أ‬

A neck

‫ب‬ ٌ ‫َﻋ ْﻘ َﺮ‬

A scorpion

‫َﻣﻄْﺒَ ٌﺦ‬

A kitchen

Necks Scorpions

‫َﻣﻄَﺎﺑِ ُﺦ‬

Kitchens

A box

Neighbors Boxes

An idol

Idols

‫ب‬ ٌ ‫ﺛـَ ْﻮ‬

‫ﺎب‬ ٌ َ‫ﺛـَﻴ‬

Cloth

Cloths

23

ْ َْ ُ ‫۔ ا ِﳉﻨﺲ‬1.3 The Gender (2)

(1)

ِ ‫ﺚ‬ ُ ‫ﺲ اَﻟ ُْﻤﺆﻧﱠ‬ ُ ‫اَ ْﳉ ْﻨ‬

ِ ‫ﺲ اَﻟ ُْﻤ َﺬ ﱠﻛ ُﺮ‬ ُ ‫اَ ْﳉ ْﻨ‬

(The Feminine Gender) (1)

ِ ‫ﺚ ﻏَ ْﲑُ ا ْﳊَِﻘ ْﻴ ِﻘ ُﻰ‬ ُ ‫ﺲ اَﻟ ُْﻤﺆﻧﱠ‬ ُ ‫اَ ْﳉ ْﻨ‬

The Unreal Feminine Gender

ِ ‫ﻤﺎرﻋﯽ‬ ‫ﺚ ﻏَ ْﲑُ ا ْﳊَِﻘ ْﻴ ِﻘ ُﻰ اﻟ ﱠ‬ ُ ‫ﺲ اَﻟ ُْﻤﺆﻧﱠ‬ ‫ﺴ ﱡ‬ ُ ‫اَ ْﳉ ْﻨ‬ The Unreal Irregular Feminine Gender

(The Masculine Gender) (2)

ِ ‫ﺚ اَ ْﳊَِﻘ ْﻴ ِﻘ ُﻰ‬ ُ ‫ﺲ اَﻟ ُْﻤﺆﻧﱠ‬ ُ ‫اَ ْﳉ ْﻨ‬

The Real Feminine Gender

ِ ‫ﺚ ﻏَ ْﲑ ا ْﳊ ِﻘﻴ ِﻘﻰ اَﻟْ َﻘﻴ‬ ِ ‫ﺎﺳﻰ‬ َ ُ ْ َ ُ ُ ‫ﺲ اَﻟ ُْﻤﺆﻧﱠ‬ ُ ‫اَ ْﳉ ْﻨ‬ The Unreal Formal Feminine Gender

24

Introduction to the 3rd part of Unit No.01 The 3rd part of this unit is about the masculine gender and feminine gender. The feminine gender is divided into two categories:

1. 2.

‫ﱠﺚ َﺣ ِﻘْﻴ ِﻘ ٌﻰ‬ ٌ ‫( ُﻣﺆﻧ‬Real feminine). ‫ﱠﺚ َﻏ ْﲑُ َﺣ ِﻘْﻴ ِﻘ ٍﻰ‬ ٌ ‫( ُﻣﺆﻧ‬Unreal feminine). This category has two kinds: ِ ‫ﱠﺚ ﻗَـﻴ‬ (i) ‫ﺎﺳ ٌﻰ‬ َ ٌ ‫( ُﻣﺆﻧ‬Formal feminine). ِ ‫ﱠﺚ َﲰ‬ ‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻰ‬ (ii) َ ٌ ‫( ُﻣﺆﻧ‬Irregular feminine).

Objectives of 3rd part of Unit No.01 With the help of Allah, when you complete this part of unit no one then you will be able: 1.

to define the gender (‫ﳉِْﻨﺲ‬ ْ َ‫)ا‬.

2.

to know the two kinds of gender: masculine and feminine.

3.

to know the examples of masculine and feminine gender.

4.

ُ

to know about real and unreal feminine gender (‫ﺣ ِﻘْﻴ ِﻘ ٍﻰ‬ َ ُ‫َو َﻏ ْﲑ‬

5.

ِ ‫ﻗِﻴ‬ to know about the two kinds of unreal feminine gender: ‫ﺎﺳﻰ‬ َ

6.

to know about the formal feminine and its examples.

7.

to know about the irregular feminine and its examples.

ٌ

‫ﱠﺚ َﺣ ِﻘ ِﻴﻘ ٌﻰ‬ ٌ ‫ ) ُﻣﺆﻧ‬and its example.

ِ ‫ﱠﺚ َﲰ‬ ‫ﱠﺚ‬ ٌ ‫ ُﻣﺆﻧ‬and ‫ﺎﻋ ٌﻰ‬ َ ٌ ‫ ُﻣ َﺆﻧ‬.

25

ِ ‫ﺲ‬ ُ ‫۔ اَ ْﳉ ْﻨ‬1.3

The Gender Gender is used to differentiate between male and female. For a noun it is used to differentiate whether it is a masculine or feminine noun. In the Arabic grammar (like some other languages), with respect to gender, the noun is divided into the following two types/kinds.

‫اﻟ ُْﻤ َﺬ ﱠ‬ 1. ‫ﻛ ُﺮ‬

ِ ‫ﺲ‬ ُ ‫( اَ ْﳉ ْﻨ‬The Masculine Gender)

‫( ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠ‬masculine), e.g., ‫( َر ُﺟﻞ‬a man), ‫ب‬ The nouns related to the male sex are ‫ﻛٌﺮ‬ ٌ َ‫( ا‬a father), ٌ







‫( اِﺑْ ٌﻦ‬a son), ‫( َﲨَ ٌﻞ‬a camel), ‫( َوﻟَ ٌﺪ‬a boy), ‫( ِﲪَ ٌﺎر‬a donkey), ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ُ‫( َﻛﻠ‬a dog). ‫) ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠ‬, e.g., ٌ‫( َﻋﻼﱠَﻣﺔ‬learned), Some nouns have ta “‫ ”ة‬ending but they are used as masculine (‫ﻛٌﺮ‬ ٌ‫( اُ َﺳ َﺎﻣﺔ‬a male name), ٌ‫( َﺧﻠِْﻴـ َﻔﺔ‬caliph), ٌ‫( ﻃََﺮﻓَﻪ‬name of An Arabic poet). ِ ‫) ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠ‬, e.g., ‫أس‬ Some parts of body (single) are also considered masculine (‫ﻛٌﺮ‬ ٌ ‫( َر‬a head), ‫ﺳ ﱞﻦ‬ (a tooth), ‫ﻦ‬ َ (a chest), etc. ٌ ْ‫( ﺑَﻄ‬a belly), ‫ﺻ ْﺪٌر‬ ِ Some nouns are considered masculine gender by form, e.g., ‫ﺟﺪار‬ ٌ َ‫( ﻛﺘ‬a book), ٌ (a wall), ‫ﺎب‬ ِ ‫( ﻗَـﻠَ ٌﻢ‬a pen), ‫( ِﺻَﺮا ٌط‬a path), ‫( َﻣ ْﺴ ِﺠ ٌﺪ‬a mosque), ‫ﺖ‬ ٌ ‫( ﺑـَْﻴ‬a house), ‫( ُﻛ ْﺮﺳ ﱞﻰ‬a chair), ‫( َ»ٌْﺮ‬a canal), ‫ب‬ ٌ ]َ (a door).

2. ‫ﺚ‬ ُ ‫اﻟ ُْﻤ َﺆﻧﱠ‬

ِ ‫ﺲ‬ ُ ‫( اَ ْﳉ ْﻨ‬The Feminine Gender)

The nouns related to the female sex are ‫ﱠﺚ‬ ٌ ‫( ُﻣ َﺆﻧ‬feminine). The feminine gender has two

basic kinds: real and unreal.

i. ‫ﳊَِﻘ ْﻴ ِﻘﻰ‬ ُ ‫( اَﻟ ُْﻤ َﺆﻧﱠ‬The Real Feminine) ُ ْ‫ﺚا‬

The real feminine is the female living being that has its equivalent male living beings. In other words, the noun which has the concept of pair i.e., male and female. The male is

ِ ‫ﱠﺚ‬ ٌ ‫( ُﻣ َﺆﻧ‬real feminine), e.g. ‫( أُﱡم‬a mother), ٌ‫ا ْﻣ َﺮأَة‬ ِ (a woman), ٌ‫( ﺑَـ َﻘﺮة‬a cow), ٌ‫ﻗَﺔ‬Vَ (a female camel), ‫ﺖ‬ ٌ ‫( ﺑِْﻨ‬a daughter), ٌ‫( اﺑْـﻨَﺔ‬a daughter), ‫ﺖ‬ ٌ ‫أﺧ‬ ْ َ ِِ called masculine and female is called ‫ﻰ‬ ‫َﺣﻘْﻴﻘ ﱞ‬ (a sister), etc.

26

ِ ‫ا ْﳊَِﻘ ْﻴ ِﻘ‬ ii. ‫ﻰ‬

ُ ‫( اَﻟ ُْﻤ َﺆﻧﱠ‬The Unreal Feminine) ُ‫ﺚ ﻏَ ْﲑ‬

The nouns which do not have the concept pair, i.e., male and female are called “unreal feminine”, e.g., ‫ض‬ ٌ ‫( ْأر‬earth), ٌ‫( َﺷ َﺠﺮة‬tree), ٌ‫( ﻏُ ْﺮﻓَﺔ‬room) etc.

َ

The unreal feminine, according to the Arabic grammar, is classified into two categories:

ِ ‫ﱠﺚ ﻗَـﻴ‬ ِ ٌ ‫ ﻣﺆﻧ‬. ‫ﺎﺳ ٌﻰ‬ َُ َ ٌ ‫ ُﻣ َﺆﻧ‬and ‫ﱠﺚ َﲰَﺎﻋ ٌﻰ‬ ِ (a) ‫ﺎﺳﻰ‬ ُ ‫( اَﻟ ُْﻤ َﺆﻧﱠ‬The Formal Feminine) ُ َ‫ﺚ اﻟْ َﻘﻴ‬

The words/ nouns which are neither masculine nor feminine in reality are called formal

ِ ‫ﻗَـﻴ‬ feminine (‫ﺎﺳﻰ‬ َ ٌ

‫ﱠﺚ‬ ٌ ‫) ُﻣ َﺆﻧ‬.

The general way of identification of gender (masculine and

feminine) for such nouns/ words is that the words which end without the following

ِ ‫اﻟﺘَﺄَﻧِﻴ‬ feminine signs (‫ﺚ‬ ْ

a.

b.

ِ ٌ ‫)ﻣﺆﻧ‬: ‫ﺎت‬ َُ ُ ‫ ) َﻋ َﻼ َﻣ‬are called formal feminine (‫ﱠﺚ ﻗَﻴﺎﺳ ٌﻰ‬ ِ ٌ‫ َﻣ ْﺮﺑـُ ْﻮﻃَﺔ‬-‫( ة‬round ta), e.g., ٌ‫ﺎﻋﺔ‬ َ ‫( َﺳ‬watch), ٌ‫( َﻣ ْﺪ َر َﺳﺔ‬school), ٌ‫( ﻣ ْﺮَو َﺣﺔ‬fan), ٌ‫( َﺷ َﺠَﺮة‬tree), ٌ‫( َﺳﻴﱠ َﺎرة‬car), ِ ‫ﱠ‬ ٌ‫( آﻳَﺔ‬sign) ٌ‫( َﺟﻨﱠﺔ‬garden), ٌ‫( َﺣﻴَﺎة‬life), ٌ‫ْﻤﺔ‬ َ ‫( ﺣﻜ‬wisdom), ٌ‫( أُﱠﻣﺔ‬nation), ٌ‫( َﻣﻜﺔ‬Mecca), ٌ‫( ﻏُ ْﺮﻓَﺔ‬room), ٌ‫ َﻣ ِﻈﻠﱠﺔ‬،ٌ‫( َﴰْ ِﺴﻴﱠﺔ‬umbrella), ٌ‫( ِﳑْ َﺴ َﺤﺔ‬duster), ٌ‫( َﺳﺒﱡـ ْﻮَرة‬black-board), ٌ‫ﻓِ َﺬة‬Vَ (window), ٌ‫اﺳﺔ‬ َ ‫( ُﻛﱠﺮ‬noteِ book), ٌ‫ ﻃَﺎ ِوﻟَﺔ‬،ٌ‫ﻀ َﺪة‬ َ ‫( ﻣْﻨ‬table), etc. ِ ٌ‫ﺼ ْﻮَرة‬ ٌ ْ‫( اَﻟ‬short alif): The nouns ending in “‫” َى‬, “‫ ”ى‬called "ٌ‫ﺼ ْﻮَرة‬ ٌ ‫ "اَﻟ‬e.g., ‫ُﻛ ْﱪ ٰی‬ ُ ‫ﻒ َﻣ ْﻘ‬ ُ ‫ﻒ َﻣ ْﻘ‬ (great), ‫ی‬ ٰ ‫ﺻ ْﻐﺮ‬ ُ (small), ‫( ُﺣ ْﺴﻨ ٰﯽ‬good, beautiful), ‫( ﺑُ ْﺸﺮ ٰی‬good news), ‫( اُ ْﺧﺮ ٰی‬other).

ِ ِ ٌ‫ﻒ ﳑَْ ُﺪ ْوَدة‬ ٌ ‫( اَﻟ‬lengthened alif): The nouns/words ending in "ُ‫ "آء‬or “‫ ”آء‬called “ٌ‫ﻒ ﳑَْ ُﺪ ْو ُدة‬ ٌ ‫”اَﻟ‬, e.g., ُ‫ﺤﺮآء‬ َ (harm), ‫ﻀﺂء‬ َ ‫( ﺑـَْﻴ‬white), ‫ﻀَﺮآء‬ َ ‫( َﺣ‬green), ُ‫( َزْرﻗَﺂء‬blue) etc. َ (desert), ُ‫ﺿﱠﺮاء‬ َْ ‫ﺻ‬ ِ Note: It may also be understood that feminine gender (‫ﱠﺚ‬ ٌ ‫ﺲ ُﻣﺆﻧ‬ ٌ ‫ )ﺟْﻨ‬is often formed from the masculine by suffixing “‫”ة‬, e.g.

c.

(M.) Word

(F.) Word

‫ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ ٌﻢ‬ ‫َﻛﺎﻓٌِﺮ‬ ِ‫ﺻ‬ ‫ﺎد ٌق‬ َ ِ ‫ﺻﺎﻟ ٌﺢ‬ َ ِ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ﻃَﺎﻟ‬

ٌ‫ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ َﻤﺔ‬ ٌ‫َﻛﺎﻓَِﺮة‬ ِ‫ﺻ‬ ٌ‫ﺎدﻗَﺔ‬ َ ِ ٌ‫ﺻﺎﳊَﺔ‬ َ ِ ٌ‫ﻃَﺎﻟﺒَﺔ‬

English Tralsntaion Muslim Disbeliever Truthful Pious Student

(M.) Word

(F.) Word

‫َﻛﺜِ ٌْﲑ‬ ‫ُﻣ َﻌﻠِّ ٌﻢ‬ ‫س‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺪ ِّر‬ ِ ‫س‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﻬْﻨ ّﺪ‬ ِ َ‫ُﳏ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬

ٌ‫َﻛﺜِ ْﲑَة‬ ٌ‫ُﻣ َﻌﻠِّ َﻤﺔ‬ ٌ‫ُﻣ َﺪ ِّر َﺳﺔ‬ ٌ‫ُﻣ َﻬْﻨ ِّﺪ َﺳﺔ‬ ِ َ‫ُﳏ‬ ٌ‫ﺎﺿَﺮة‬

English Translation Many Teacher Teacher Engineer Lecturer

27

ِ ‫ﺴﻤ‬ 2. ‫ﺎﻋﻰ‬ َ ‫اﻟ ﱠ‬ ُ

‫ﺚ‬ ُ ‫( اَﻟ ُْﻤ َﺆﻧﱠ‬The Irregular Feminine)

According to the Arabic Grammar, though some nouns are called “irregular feminine”,

because they have neither concept of pair (i.e., male and female), nor have they “‫( ”ة‬ta) ending (a sign of feminine), yet they are feminine by usage, e.g. a.

b.

c.

d. e.

Some natural and artificial things: ٌ‫ﲰَﺎء‬ َ (sky), ‫ب‬ ٌ ‫( َﺣ ْﺮ‬battle, war), ‫( َﴰْﺲ‬sun), ‫ ٌر‬Vَ (fire), ‫ﱠﻢ‬ ٌ ‫َﺟ َﻬﻨ‬

ٌ ِ ِ (hell), ‫ﺢ‬ ٌ ْ‫( رﻳ‬wind), ‫( ﲬٌَْﺮ‬wine), ‫ﺲ‬ ٌ ‫( َﻛ‬cup), ٌ ‫( ﻧـَ ْﻔ‬soul, self person), ‫( َد ٌار‬house), ‫( ﺑْﺌـٌﺮ‬well), ‫ﺄس‬ ‫ض‬ ٌ ‫( أَْر‬earth), ‫( َﺳﺒِْﻴ ٌﻞ‬path), \َ‫( ُرْؤ‬dream). ِ Proper names of countries and towns are feminine by significance, e.g., ‫ﺼﺮ‬ ُ ْ ‫( ﻣ‬Egypt), ‫اق‬ ُ ‫( اَﻟْﻌَِﺮ‬Iraq), ‫( َو ِاﺷْﻨﻄَ ْﻦ‬Washington), ‫( ﻻَ ُﻫ ْﻮُر‬Lahore), ‫( َ]ﻛِ ْﺴﺘَﺎ ُن‬Pakistan), ‫( أَﻓْ ِﺮﻳْـ َﻘﺎ‬Africa), ‫أَْﻣ ِﺮﻳ َﻜﺎ‬ (America), ُ‫ﺸ ِﻤ ْﲑ‬ ْ ‫( َﻛ‬Kashmir), etc. The parts of the body which are in pair, e.g., ‫( ﻳَ ٌﺪ‬hand), ‫ﲔ‬ ٌْ ‫( َﻋ‬eye), ‫( اُذُ ٌن‬ear), ‫( ﻗَ َﺪ ٌم‬foot), ‫( ِر ْﺟ ٌﻞ‬leg), ‫ﺎق‬ ٌ ‫( َﺳ‬shin), ‫( ﺧ ﱞﺪ‬cheek). All Arabic letters of alphabet are considered as feminine.

Some collective nouns, e.g., ‫( ﻗَـ ْﻮٌم‬people) ‫ﻂ‬ ٌ ‫( َرْﻫ‬tribe), are used as feminine. However, ‫أ َْﻫﻞ‬ (family),

‫آل‬ ٌ

ٌ

(progeny) are feminine, some broken plural are treated as feminine, e.g.,

‫( اَﻟْﻴَـ ُﻬ ْﻮ ُد‬the Jews), ‫( اَﻟْﱡﺮ ُﺳ ُﻞ‬the messengers).

f.

Some nouns are used as masculine as well as feminine, e.g., ‫ﺎب‬ ٌ ‫( َﺳ َﺤ‬clouds), ‫( ﺑَـ َﻘٌﺮ‬cattle),

‫( َﺟَﺮ ٌاد‬locust), ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫( ذَ ْﻫ‬gold), ‫( َْﳓ ٌﻞ‬bees), ‫( َﺷ َﺠٌﺮ‬trees).

‫‪28‬‬

‫َ ْ َٔ ْ َ ُ‬ ‫اﻻﺳ ِﺌﻠﺔ‬

‫َٔ ْ َ ْ َٔ َ ْ ٓ‬ ‫‪ e‬اﻻ ْﺳ ِﺌﻠ ِﺔ اﻻ ِﺗ َﻴ ِﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ا ِﺟﺐ ِ‬

‫‪QUESTIONS‬‬ ‫‪Answer the following Questions:‬‬

‫ﺎص و َْاﻷﻣﺎﻛِ ِﻦ و َْاﻷ ْﺷ ِ‬ ‫ف ِاﻹ ﺳﻢ وأذ ْﻛُﺮ ﻣ ﺜﺎﻟَِﲔ ﻟِ ُﻜﻞ ِﻣﻦ ْ ِ‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻋﱢﺮ ِ‬ ‫ﻴﺎء ِ[ﻟْ َﻌَﺮﺑِﻴﱠﺔ ُﰒ ﱠ ﺗَ ْـﺮ ِْﲨ َﻬﺎ َإﱃ‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ََ ْ ََ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫أﲰ ﺎء َاﻷ ْﺷ َﺨ ِ َ َ َ‬ ‫ِاﻹ ْﳒ ﻠِﻴ ِﺰﻳﱠﺔ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﺎت ِاﻻ ْﺳ ِﻢ ؟‬ ‫‪ 2‬ـ َﻣﺎ ﻫ َﻲ َﻋ َﻼ َﻣ ُ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ـ َﻣﺎ ِﻫ َﻲ أَﻧْ َـﻮاع ُ ِاﻻ ْﺳ ِﻢ ؟‬ ‫ف اﻟْ َﻤ َﻌﱢﺮﻓْﺔ ِ ﱠُﰒ أَذ ْﻛ ُْﺮ أَﻧْ َـﻮاﻋ ََﻬ ﺎ ـ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ـ َﻋﱢﺮ ْ‬ ‫اﺳ َﻢ اﻟْﻌ َﻠَ ِﻢ [ ِِْﻹ ِْﳒ ﻠِ ْﻴ ِﺰ ﻳَﺔ ِـ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ـ َﻋﱢﺮ ْ‬ ‫ف ْ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﻀﻤﺎﺋِﺮ اﻟْﻤْﻨـ َﻔ ِ‬ ‫ﺼﻠَﺔ ُ ؟‬ ‫‪ 6‬ـ َﻣﺎ ﻫ َﻲ اﻟ ﱠ َ ُ ُ‬ ‫‪ 7‬ـ ﻋﺮ ْ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﺐ أَﻧْ َـﻮاﻋ ََﻬ ﺎـ‬ ‫َﱢ‬ ‫ف ا ْﺳ َﻢ اﻟﻨﱠﻜَﺮة ِ ُﰒ ﱠ ا ُْﻛﺘُ ْ‬ ‫ﺼ َﻔ ِﺔ [ ِِْﻹ ِْﳒ ﻠِ ْﻴ ِﺰ ﻳَِﺔ‬ ‫اﺳ َﻢ اﻟ ﱢ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ـ َﻋﱢﺮ ْ‬ ‫ف ْ‬ ‫ـ‬ ‫‪ 9‬ـ ﻣﺎ ِﻫﻲ أَﻧْـﻮاع ُ ِاﻹ ﺳﻢ ﻏ َُﲑ اﺳ ِﻢ اﻟْﻤﻌﱢﺮﻓْﺔ ِ واﻟﻨ ِ‬ ‫ﱠﻜَﺮة ِ‬ ‫ْ َ ْ ْ ََ َ‬ ‫َ َ َ‬ ‫‪ 10‬ـ َﻣﺎ ِﻫ َﻲ َﻋ ﱠﺪ د ُ َاﻷ َْﲰ ِﺎء ؟‬ ‫‪َ -11‬ﻣﺎ ِﻫﻲ أَﻧْ َـﻮاع ُ َْ‬ ‫اﳉ ْﻤ ِﻊ ؟‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪ 12‬ـ ﻋﱢﺮ ِ‬ ‫ﻮاﻋﻪ ُ‬ ‫ف ِْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ﺲ َوأذ ْﻛ ُْﺮ أﻧْ َ‬ ‫اﳉْﻨ َ‬ ‫ﺲ اﻟْﻤﺆﻧﱠ ِ‬ ‫ﺚ ؟‬ ‫‪َ - 13‬ﻣﺎ ِﻫ َﻲ أَﻧْ َـﻮاع ُ ِْ‬ ‫اﳉْﻨ ِ ُ َ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫اﻟﺴ َﻤﺎﻋ ِ‬ ‫ِﻰ ؟‬ ‫‪ 14‬ـ َﻣﺎ اﻟْ ُﻤَﺮ ُاد [ ِﻟْ ُﻤ َﺆﻧﱠﺚ ﱠ‬

29

َٔ ْ َ ُ َ َ ّ ْ ُ َ ْ َ ْ َ ْ َ ُ (2)‫اﻻﲰﺎء‬:‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪۃ ااﻟﺜﺎ ِﻧﻴﺔ‬ Unit No.02.The Nouns(2) ُ (َ ْ َ‫۔ اَ ْﻟ َّﻀ َﻤﺎﺋ ُِﺮ َو ا‬2.1 ‫اﻋ َﻬﺎ‬ The Pronouns and its Kinds

َ ّ ْ َ ُ َ ْ َٔ َ (1)‫۔ ا(اع اﻟﻀﻤﺎﺋ ِِﺮ‬2.2

The Kinds of Pronoun (1)

َ ّ ْ َ ُ ْ َٔ (2)‫۔ ا َ(اع اﻟﻀ َﻤﺎﺋ ِِﺮ‬2.3

The Kinds of Pronoun (2)

‫ اﻷﺳﺘﺎذ اﻟﺪﮐﺘﻮر ﻋﺒﺪ اﻤﯿﺪ ﺧﺎن ﻋﺒﺎ‬:‫ِإ ْﻋ َﺪاد‬ '()‫ اﻟﺪﮐﺘﻮر ﺷ)ﻨﺎز ﻇ‬:‫ﻣﺮاﺟﻊ‬ Written by: Reviewed by:

Prof. Dr. Abdul Hameed Khan Abbasi Dr. Shahnaz Zaheer

30

ُ َ َْ ُ‫اع اَ ْﻟ َّﻀ َﻤﺎﺋِﺮ‬ (‫۔ا‬2.1 Kinds of the Pronouns

ِ ‫ﻀ ﱠﻤﺎﺋِﺮ اﻟْﻤﺘ‬ ُ‫ﱠﺼﻠَﺔ‬ ُ ُ َ ْ‫اَﻟ‬

ِ ‫اَﻟْﻀﱠﻤﺎﺋِﺮ اﻟْﻤ ْﻨـ َﻔ‬ ُ‫ﺼﻠَﺔ‬ ُ ُ َ

(The Attached Pronouns)

The Detached Pronouns

ِ ‫اَﻟْﻀﱠﻤﺎﺋِﺮ اﻟْﻤ ْﻨـ َﻔ‬ ُ‫ﺼﻠَﺔ‬ ُ ُ َ

The Detached Pronouns

DUAL

ِ‫و‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ

SINGULAR

(Forms)

‫ُﳘَﺎ‬

‫ُﻫ َﻮ‬

ِ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﻏﺎﺋ‬

‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ‬

‫ ُﻣﺜَ ﱠﲎ‬/ٌ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬

‫ُﻫ ْﻢ‬

PLURAL

They

They/Both of them

‫ُﻫ ﱠﻦ‬

‫ُﳘَﺎ‬

He

3rd person (m.) 3rd person (f.)

‫ِﻫ َﻰ‬

They

They/Both of them

She

‫اَﻧْـﺘُ ْﻢ‬

‫أﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ‬

‫ﺖ‬ َ ْ‫أَﻧ‬

You (all)

(Both of) You

‫ﱳ‬ ‫اَﻧْ ُ ﱠ‬

‫أﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ‬

ِ ‫ﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛﺮ ﺣ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ َ ٌ ُ

2nd person (m.) 2nd person (f.)

ِ ْ‫أﻧ‬ ‫ﺖ‬

(Both of) You

You

‫َْﳓ ُﻦ‬

‫َْﳓ ُﻦ‬

Vَ ‫أ‬

We

ِ ٌ ‫ﻣﺆﻧﱠ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ َُ ٌ ‫ﺚ َﻏﺎﺋ‬

You

You (all) We

ِ ‫ﺻ ْﻴ ٌﻎ‬

I

ِ ‫ﺚﺣ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ َ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬

‫ُﻣﺘَ َﻜﻠِّ ٌﻢ‬

1st person (m.) & (f.)

31

Introduction to the first part of Unit No.02 The first part of this Unit, which you are going to study, consists of the detached pronouns in Arabic language. (‫اﻟْ َﻌﺮﺑِﻴَ ِﺔ‬

ِ‫ِ ِ ﱡ‬ ِ ‫)اَﻟْﻀ‬. These pronouns are 14 in number: َ َ ‫ﱠﻤﺎﺋﺮ اﻟْ ُﻤْﻨـ َﻔﺼﻠَﺔُ ﰱ اﻟﻠﻐَﺔ‬ ِ ْ‫ أَﻧ‬،‫ أَﻧْـﺘُﻢ‬،‫ أَﻧْـﺘُﻤﺎ‬،‫ أَﻧْﺖ‬،‫ ﻫ ﱠﻦ‬،‫ ُﳘﺎ‬،‫ ِﻫﻰ‬،‫ ﻫﻢ‬،‫ ُﳘﺎ‬،‫ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ َْﳓ ُﻦ‬،Vَ َ‫ أ‬،‫ﱳ‬ ‫ أَﻧْ ُ ﱠ‬،‫ أَﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ‬،‫ﺖ‬ ُ َ َ ْ ُ َ َُ ْ َ َ

This part of Unit No.02 covers four aspects of these detached pronouns: 1.

Their conjugations/inflections.

2.

Their examples from Al-Quran Al-Hakeem.

3.

Their examples from sentences of daily usage.

4.

ِ ‫)ﻣ‬, present (‫ع‬ Their usage with different kinds of verbs: past (‫ﺎﺿﻰ‬ ٌ ‫ﻀﺎ ِر‬ َ ‫) ُﻣ‬, imperative (‫) ْأﻣٌﺮ‬, َ

ِ ‫اﻟْ َﻔ‬ active participle (‫ﺎﻋ ِﻞ‬

ٌ

‫ )اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬and passive participle (‫)اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮل‬.

Objectives of 1st part of Unit No.02 With the help and Taufiq (conciliation) of Allah Taalah, as you start and complete the study of the 1st part of this unit no.02, which is about the detached pronouns (

ِ ‫ )اﻟْﻤْﻨـ َﻔ‬you will then discover that you have the ability: ُ‫ﺼﻠَﺔ‬ ُ

‫ﱠﻤﺎﺋُِﺮ‬ َ ‫اَﻟْﻀ‬

1.

to conjugate the detached pronouns

2.

to give examples of these pronouns

3.

to use them in sentences of daily usage

4.

to use them with past tense, present tense (ٌ‫ﻀﺎ ِرع‬ َ ‫) ُﻣ‬, imperative verbs active and passive

participle (‫اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮل‬

ِ ‫)اِﺳﻢ اﻟْ َﻔ‬. ‫ﺎﻋ ِﻞ َو‬ ُْ

32

2.1.‫ﱠﻤﺎﺋِ ِﺮ‬ َ ‫اﻟﻀ‬

‫ﻒ‬ ُ ْ‫( ﺗَـ ْﻌ ِﺮﻳ‬Definition of the Pronoun)

ِ ِ ‫اَﻟْﻀ‬ ِ ‫اﺣ ُﺪﻫﺎ اَﻟْﻀ‬ .‫ﻆ اﻟﱠ ِﺬ ْى ﻳُ ْﺴﺘَ ْﺨ َﺪ ُم ِﰱ َﳏَ ِﻞ اِ ْﺳ ٍﻢ‬ ُ ‫ َوُﻫ َﻮ اﻟﻠﱠ ْﻔ‬.ُ‫ﱠﻤ ْﲑ‬ َ ‫ﱠﻤﺎﺋ ُﺮ ﲨَْ ٌﻊ َو َو‬ َ

Plural pronoun has singular pronoun. It is a word which is used in place of a noun.

ٍ ِ ‫ﱠﻤﲑ ﺑﺪﻻً ِﻣﻦ ْاﻹﺳ ِﻢ ِﻋْﻨﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻧَ ُﻜﻮ َن ﻋﻠَﻰ ِﻋ ْﻠ ٍﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻦ أو ﻋﻦ أ‬ ِ ِ .‫ﱠث‬ ُ ‫ى َﺷﻰء ﻧـَﺘَ َﺤﺪ‬ َ ْ َ َ ْ َ َ َ َ ْ ‫ﻧَ ْﺴﺘَ ْﺨﺪ ُم اﻟْﻀ‬ ّ َْ َْ َْ

A pronoun is used instead of the noun when it is clear who or what we are talking about,

ِ ‫ﺐ ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬ ٌﺪ ُﻫ َﻮ ﻳَ ْﺴ ُﻜ ُﻦ ِﰱ َدا ِر‬ ٌ ‫( أَ ْﲪَ ُﺪ ﻃَﺎﻟ‬Ahmad is a hardworking student. He lives in the hostel). Here ٌ‫ﺿ ِﻤ ْﲑ‬ َ (pronoun) is ‫( ُﻫ َﻮ‬He). ِ ‫اﻟ ﱠﺴ َﻜ‬/‫ْاﻹﻗَ َﺎﻣ ِﺔ‬ e.g., ‫ﻦ‬

2.2‫ﻀ ﱠﻤﺎﺋِﺮ‬ َ ْ‫اﻟ‬

‫اع‬ ُ ‫( أﻧْـ َﻮ‬Kinds of the Pronoun)

There are eight kinds of Pronoun in the Arabic language:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

ِ ‫ﻀ ﱠﻤﺎﺋِﺮ اَﻟْﻤْﻨـ َﻔ‬ ُ‫ﺼﻠَﺔ‬ ُ ُ َ ْ‫( اَﻟ‬The Detached Pronouns) ِ ‫ﻀ ﱠﻤﺎﺋِﺮ اﻟْﻤﺘ‬ ُ‫ﱠﺼﻠَﺔ‬ ُ ُ َ ْ‫( اَﻟ‬The Attached Pronouns) ‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋِﺮ اﻟْ ُﻤ ْﻠ ِﻜﻴﱠ ِﺔ‬ َ (The Possessive Pronouns) ِ (The Demonstrative Pronouns) ِ‫ﻹﺷﺎرة‬ َ َ َ َ‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋﺮ ا‬ ِ (The Relative Pronouns) ‫ﺻ ِﻞ‬ َ ْ ‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋ ُﺮ اﻟْ َﻮ‬ ِْ ‫( ﺿﻤﺎﺋِﺮ‬The Interrogative Pronouns) ‫اﻻ ْﺳﺘَـ ْﻔ َﻬ ِﺎم‬ ُ ََ ِْ ‫( اﻟﻀﱠﻤﺎﺋِﺮ‬The Reflexive Pronouns) ُ‫اﻻﻧﻌِ َﻜﺎﺳﻴَﺔ‬ ُ َ ِ‫( ﺿﻤﺎﺋِﺮ اﻟْﻤ ْﻔﻌﻮِل ﺑِﻪ‬The Objective Pronouns) ُْ َ ُ َ َ

33 12 ِ ‫ﻀ ﱠﻤﺎﺋِﺮ اَﻟْﻤ ْﻨـ َﻔ‬ ُ‫ﺼﻠَﺔ‬ ُ ُ َ ْ‫( اَﻟ‬The Detached Pronouns)

ِ ‫( ﻣْﻨـ َﻔ‬munfasila) comes from verb “‫ ”اِﻧْـ َﻔﺼﻞ‬which gives the meaning of The term ٌ‫ﺼﻠَﺔ‬ َ ُ

َ ِ standing alone, separated, e.g. ‫ ُﻫﻮ‬, ‫ ُﳘَﺎ‬, ‫ ُﻫ ْﻢ‬, ‫ﺖ‬ َ ْ‫أَﻧ‬, ‫اَﻧْﺖ‬, etc. َ Conjugation of the Detached Pronoun

DUAL

ِ‫و‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ

SINGULAR

(Forms)

‫ُﳘَﺎ‬

‫ُﻫ َﻮ‬

ِ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﻏﺎﺋ‬

‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ‬

‫ ُﻣﺜَ ﱠﲎ‬/ٌ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬

‫ُﻫ ْﻢ‬

PLURAL

They

They/Both of them

‫ُﻫ ﱠﻦ‬

‫ُﳘَﺎ‬

He

3rd person m. 3rd person f.

‫ِﻫ َﻰ‬

They

They/Both of them

She

‫اَﻧْـﺘُ ْﻢ‬

‫أﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ‬

‫ﺖ‬ َ ْ‫اَﻧ‬

You (all)

You/Both of you

‫ﱳ‬ ‫اَﻧْ ُ ﱠ‬

‫أﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ‬

ِ ‫ﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛﺮ ﺣ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ َ ٌ ُ

2nd person m. 2nd person f.

ِ ْ‫أﻧ‬ ‫ﺖ‬

You/Both of you

You

‫َْﳓ ُﻦ‬

‫َْﳓ ُﻦ‬

Vَ ‫أ‬

We

ِ ٌ ‫ﻣﺆﻧﱠ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ َُ ٌ ‫ﺚ َﻏﺎﺋ‬

You

You (all) We

ِ ‫ﺻﻴَ ٌﻎ‬

I

ِ ‫ﺚﺣ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ َ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬

‫ُﻣﺘَ َﻜﻠِّ ٌﻢ‬

1st person m. & f.

Examples of the Detached Pronouns from Al-Quran Al-Hakeem 1.

‫( ُﻫ َﻮ‬He): This pronoun is used 265 times in Al-Quran, e.g. Νä3s9 šYn=y{ “Ï%©!$# uθèδ |=≈tGÅ3ø9$# y7ø‹n=tã tΑt“Ρr& ü“Ï%©!$# uθèδ

It is He who has sent down to you the book (3:7).

î‰ymr& ª!$# uθèδ ö≅è%

Say (O! Muhammad ‫ )ﷺ‬He is Allah, the one and only (112:1).

Ó‰‹Åg¤Χ ×β#uöè% uθèδ ö≅t/

2.

Both of them were in the cave (9:40).

‫( ُﻫ ْﻢ‬They): This pronoun is used 261 times in Al-Quran, e.g. Ïπyϑt↔ô±yϑø9$# Ü=≈ysô¹r& öΝèδ

12

Nay, this is a Glorious Quran (85:21).

‫( ُﳘَﺎ‬Both of them): This pronoun is used only one time in Al-Quran, e.g. Í‘$tóø9$# †Îû $yϑèδ øŒÎ)

3.

It is He who has created all of you (2:29).

They are the (unhappy) companions of the left hand (90:19).

ِ َ (Personal ِ ‫ْﻀ ﱠﻤﺎﺋِﺮ اَﻟْﻤْﻨـ َﻔ‬ ِ Detached Pronouns (ُ‫ﺼﻠَﺔ‬ ُ ُ َ ‫ )اَﻟ‬are also called Independent/ Disconnected/ Separated/ ٌ‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋٌﺮ َﺷ ْﺨﺼﻴﱠﺔ‬ ِ ‫ﺿﻤﺎﺋِﺮ اﻟْ َﻔ‬ Pronouns) and ‫ﺎﻋ ِﻞ‬ َ َ (Subjective Pronouns).

34 Ïπ−ƒÎŽy9ø9$# çŽöy{ ö/ãφ y7Í×‾≈s9'ρé&

tβθèδ$y™ öΝÍκÍEŸξ|¹ tã öΝèδ tÏ%©!$# tβθàÎ=tGøƒèΧ Ïµ‹Ïù ö/ãφ “Ï%©!$# tβθßϑÍ←!#yŠ öΝÍκÍEŸξ|¹ 4’n?tã öΝèδ tÏ%©!$# tβθ‘ΖÝàtƒ āωÎ) öΛèε ÷βÎ)

4.

About whom they cannot agree (78:3). Those who remain steadfast in their prayer (70:23). They merely conjecture (45:24).

̍ôfxø9$# Æì=n ôÜtΒ 4®Lym }‘Ïδ íΟ≈n=y™

Peace! This is until the rise of the morning (97:5).

3“uρù'yϑø9$# }‘Ïδ sπ¨Ψpgø:$# ¨βÎ*sù

Verily, Then indeed Paradise will be (his) abode (79:41).

/ä.äτ!$t/#uuρ öΝçFΡr& !$yδθßϑçGø‹®ÿxœ Ö!$oÿôœr& HωÎ) }‘Ïδ ÷βÎ) $u‹øtwΥuρ ßNθßϑtΡ $u‹÷Ρ‘‰9$# $uΖè?$uŠym āωÎ) }‘Ïδ $tΒ (#θä9$s%uρ

Hell-fire will be his home (79:39). These are nothing but names which you have devised, you and your fathers (53:23). And they say: What is there but our life in this world? We shall die and we shall live (45:24).

‫( ُﻫ ﱠﻦ‬They all women): In Al-Quran Al-Hakeem, this pronoun is utilized 07 times, e.g. £ßγ©9 Ó¨$t6Ï9 öΝçFΡr&uρ öΝä3©9 Ó¨$t6Ï9 £èδ É=≈tGÅ3ø9$# ‘Πé& £èδ óΟÎγÏF≈yγ¨Βé& €∅èδ $¨Β

They are your garments and you are their garments (2:187).

They are the foundation of the Book (3:7). They cannot be their mothers (58:2).

öΝä3s9 ãyγôÛr& £èδ ’ÎA$uΖt/ ÏIωàσ‾≈yδ ÉΘöθs)≈tƒ tΑ$s%

He said: O my people! Here are my daughters: they are pure for you (if you marry!) (11:78).

÷ρr& ÿÍνÎhŽàÑ àM≈xϱ≈x. £èδ ö≅yδ AhŽÛØÎ/ ª!$# u’ÎΤyŠ#u‘r& ÷βÎ)

If Allah intended me harm, and would they remove His harm; or if He intended mercy for me, would they withhold His mercy? (39:38).

ϵÏGuΗ÷qu‘ àM≈s3Å¡ôϑãΒ €∅èδ ö≅yδ >πyϑômtÎ/ ’ÎΤyŠ#u‘r&

6.

Those who are neglectful of their prayers (107:5).

‫( ِﻫ َﻰ‬She): This is used 47 times in Al-Quran, e.g.

3“uρù'yϑø9$# }‘Ïδ tΛÅspgø:$# ¨βÎ*sù

5.

They are the best creature (98:7).

‫ﺖ‬ َ ْ‫( أَﻧ‬You): This pronoun is used 55 times in Al-Quran Al-Hakeem, e.g. ֍Åe2x‹ãΒ |MΡr& !$yϑ‾ΡÎ) öÏj.x‹sù

$yγ9t±øƒs† tΒ â‘É‹ΖãΒ |MΡr& !$yϑ‾ΡÎ) ÞΟŠÅ3ptø:$# Ⓝ͕yèø9$# |MΡr& y7¨ΡÎ) ( !$oΨ−/u‘

5Θθè=yϑÎ/ |MΡr& !$yϑsù öΝåκ÷]tã ¤ΑuθtGsù

So, remind them, [O Muhammad! (S.A.W.)] you are only one who reminds (88:21). You [O Muhammad! (S.A.W.)] are only a warner for those who fear it (79:44). Our Lord! Verily, You, only You are All-Mighty, the All-wise (60:5). So, turn away, [(O Muhammad! (S.A.W.)] from them (Quraish pagans), you are not blame worthy (as you have conveyed Allah’s Message) (51:54).

35 9≅ŠÏ.uθÎ/ ΝÍκöŽn=tã |MΡr& !$tΒuρ

7.

‫( أَﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ‬Both of you): This pronoun is used only once in Al-Quran Al-Hakeem, e.g. tβθç7Î=≈tóø9$# $yϑä3yèt7¨?$# ÇtΒuρ $yϑçGΡr&

8.

tΑt“Ρr& !$tΒuρ $oΨè=÷WÏiΒ ×Ž|³o0 āωÎ) óΟçFΡr& !$tΒ (#θä9$s% tβθç/É‹õ3x? āωÎ) óΟçFΡr& ÷βÎ) >óx« ÏΒ ß≈oΗ÷q§9$# šχθèù͎ô£•Β ×Πöθs% óΟçFΡr& ö≅t/ tβθàÊ̍÷èãΒ çµ÷Ζtã ÷ΛäΡr& ߉ç7ôãr& !$tΒ tβρ߉Î7≈tã óΟçFΡr& Iωuρ

(The speaker) said: will you look down. (37:54) They (people of the town) said: “You are only human beings like ourselves and the Most Gracious (Allah) has revealed nothing. You are only telling lies. (36:15) Nay, but you are a people transgressing all bounds. (36:19) From which you do turn away. (38:68) Nor will you worship that which I worship. (109:3)

fَ َ‫( ا‬I): It is used 66 times in Al-Quran Al-Hakeem, e.g. šÏϑn=≈yèø9$# Uu‘ ª!$# $tΡr&

10.

You and those who follow you will be the pre dominant. (28:35)

‫( أﻧْـﺘُ ْﻢ‬You all): In Al-Quran Al-Hakeem, this pronoun is used 86 times, e.g. tβθãèÎ=©Ü•Β ΟçFΡr& ö≅yδ tΑ$s%

9.

And you [O Muhammad! (S.A.W.)] are not a Waki’l (guardian of their affairs) over them. (42:6)

Verily, I am Allah, the Lord of the worlds. (28:30)

×Î7•Β ֍ƒÉ‹tΡ āωÎ) O$tΡr& !$tΒuρ

I am but a Warner open and clear. (46:9)

ω‹Î7yèù=Ïj9 5Ο≈‾=sàÎ/ O$tΡr& !$tΒuρ

And I do not do the least injustice to My servants. (50:29)

4’n?ôãF{$# ãΝä3š/u‘ O$tΡr& tΑ$s)sù

Saying, I am your Lord, the Most High. (79:24)

÷Λ–n‰t6tã $¨Β Ó‰Î/%tæ O$tΡr& Iωuρ

And I shall not worship that which you are worshipping (109:4).

‫( َْﳓ ُﻦ‬We): This pronoun is used 65 times in Al-Quran Al-Hakeem, e.g. ZοtÏ.õ‹s? $yγ≈oΨù=yèy_ ßøtwΥ

We have made it a memorial (of our handiwork).

tβθãΒρãøtxΧ ßøtwΥ ö≅t/

Indeed we are shutout (of the fruits of our labor). (68:27) And we are not to be defeated (in our plan). (70:41) It is We who have sent down the Quran to you in stages. (76:23)

tÏ%θç6ó¡yϑÎ/ ßøtwΥ $tΒuρ WξƒÍ”∴s? tβ#uöà)ø9$# y7ø‹n=tã $uΖø9¨“tΡ ßøtwΥ $‾ΡÎ) öΝßγ≈oΨø)n=s{ ßøtªΥ

(56:73)

It is We Who created them. (76:28)

36

ِ ‫اﻟْ َﻔ‬ Use of the Detached Pronouns with ‫ﺎﻋﻞ‬ ‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ‬

‫ ُﻣﺜَ ﱠﲎ‬/ٌ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬

‫ُﻫ ْﻢ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ ُﻤ ْﻮ َن‬

ِ ‫ُﳘﺎ ﻣﺴﻠِﻤ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َ ُْ َ

PLURAL

‫( اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬The Active Participle) ِ‫و‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ

ِ ‫ﺻﻴَ ٌﻎ‬

DUAL

SINGULAR

They are Muslims

Both of them are Muslims

He is a Muslim

3rd person m.

They are Muslims

Both of them are Muslims

She is a Muslim

3rd person f.

All of you are Muslims

Both of you are Muslims

You are a Muslim

2nd person m.

All of you are Muslims

Both of you are Muslims

You are a Muslim

2nd person f.

ِ ‫ﺎت‬ ٌ ‫ُﻫ ﱠﻦ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠ َﻤ‬ ‫أَﻧْـﺘُ ْﻢ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ ُﻤ ْﻮ َن‬

ِ ‫أَﻧْ ﱠ‬ ‫ﺎت‬ ٌ ‫ﱳ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠ َﻤ‬ ُ ‫َْﳓ ُﻦ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ ُﻤ ْﻮ َن‬ ِ ‫ﺎت‬ ٌ ‫َْﳓ ُﻦ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠ َﻤ‬

We are Muslims

‫ُﻫ َﻮ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ ٌﻢ‬

ِ َ‫ُﳘﺎ ﻣﺴﻠِﻤﺘ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َ ُْ َ

ٌ‫ِﻫ َﻰ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ َﻤﺔ‬

ِ َ‫أَﻧْـﺘُﻤﺎ ﻣﺴﻠِﻤﺘ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َُْ َ

‫ﺖ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ ٌﻢ‬ َ ْ‫أَﻧ‬

ِ َ‫أَﻧْـﺘُﻤﺎ ﻣﺴﻠِﻤﺘ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َُْ َ

ِ ْ‫أَﻧ‬ ٌ‫ﺖ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ َﻤﺔ‬

ِ ‫َْﳓﻦ ﻣﺴﻠِﻤ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َ ُُْ ِ‫َْﳓﻦ ﻣﺴﻠِﻤﺘَﺎن‬ َُُْ

‫ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ ٌﻢ‬Vَ ‫أ‬ ُ‫ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ َﻤﺔ‬Vَ ‫أ‬

We are Muslims

‫ ُﻣﺜَ ﱠﲎ‬/ٌ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬

‫ﺼ ْﻮَرْو َن‬ ُ ‫ُﻫ ْﻢ َﻣْﻨ‬

‫ﺼ ْﻮَر ِان‬ ُ ‫ُﳘَﺎ َﻣْﻨ‬

PLURAL

They are helped

‫ات‬ ٌ ‫ﺼ ْﻮَر‬ ُ ‫ُﻫ ﱠﻦ َﻣْﻨ‬

They are helped

‫ﺼ ْﻮُرْو َن‬ ُ ‫أَﻧْـﺘُ ْﻢ َﻣْﻨ‬

All of you are helped

‫ات‬ ‫أَﻧْ ُ ﱠ‬ ٌ ‫ﺼ ْﻮَر‬ ُ ‫ﱳ َﻣْﻨ‬

All of you are helped

‫ﺼ ْﻮُرْو َن‬ ُ ‫َْﳓ ُﻦ َﻣْﻨ‬ ‫ات‬ ُ ‫ﺼ ْﻮَر‬ ُ ‫َْﳓ ُﻦ َﻣْﻨ‬

We are helped

ِ ‫ﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛﺮ ﺣ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ َ ٌ ُ

ِ ‫ﺚﺣ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ َ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬

‫ُﻣﺘَ َﻜﻠِّ ٌﻢ‬

1st person m. & f.

DUAL

ِ‫و‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ

(Forms)

‫ﺼ ْﻮٌر‬ ُ ‫ُﻫ َﻮ َﻣْﻨ‬

ِ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﻏﺎﺋ‬

SINGULAR

ِ ‫ﺻﻴَ ٌﻎ‬

Both of them are helped

He is helped

3rd person m.

Both of them are helped

She is helped

3rd person f.

‫ ِن‬6َ‫ﺼ ْﻮَر‬ ُ ‫ُﳘَﺎ َﻣْﻨ‬

‫ﺼ ْﻮَر ِان‬ ُ ‫أَﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ َﻣْﻨ‬

ِ ُ‫ﺼ ْﻮَرة‬ ُ ‫ﻫ َﻰ َﻣْﻨ‬

‫ﺼ ْﻮٌر‬ َ ْ‫أَﻧ‬ ُ ‫ﺖ َﻣْﻨ‬

ِ ٌ ‫ﻣﺆﻧﱠ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ َُ ٌ ‫ﺚ َﻏﺎﺋ‬ ِ ‫ﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛﺮ ﺣ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ َ ٌ ُ

Both of you are helped

You are helped

2nd person m.

Both of you are helped

You are helped

2nd person f.

‫ﺼ ْﻮٌر‬ ُ ‫ َﻣْﻨ‬V‫َأ‬ ُ‫ﺼ ْﻮَرة‬ ُ ‫ َﻣْﻨ‬V‫َأ‬

‫ُﻣﺘَ َﻜﻠِّ ٌﻢ‬

‫ ِن‬6َ‫ﺼ ْﻮَر‬ ُ ‫أَﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ َﻣْﻨ‬ ‫ﺼ ْﻮَر ِان‬ ُ ‫َْﳓ ُﻦ َﻣْﻨ‬ ‫ ِن‬6َ‫ﺼ ْﻮَر‬ ُ ‫َْﳓ ُﻦ َﻣْﻨ‬

ِ ٌ‫ﺼ ْﻮَرة‬ ُ ‫أَﻧْﺖ َﻣْﻨ‬

We are helped

I am helped

َ

ِ‫و‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ

‫َﲨْ ٌﻊ‬

‫ ُﻣﺜَ ﱠﲎ‬/ٌ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬ DUAL

SINGULAR

‫ُﻫ ْﻢ ﻓَـ َﻌﻠُ ْﻮا‬

‫ُﳘَﺎ ﻓَـ َﻌ َﻼ‬

‫ُﻫ َﻮ ﻓَـ َﻌ َﻞ‬

They did

ِ ٌ ‫ﻣﺆﻧﱠ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ َُ ٌ ‫ﺚ َﻏﺎﺋ‬

‫( اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬The Passive Participle)

Use of Detached Pronouns with the Past Tense Verb “‫”ﻓَـ َﻌﻞ‬ PLURAL

ِ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﻏﺎﺋ‬

I am a Muslim

Conjugation of the Detached Pronoun with ‫ْﻤ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮ ِل‬ ُ ‫اﻟ‬

‫َﲨْ ٌﻊ‬

(Forms)

Both of them did

He did

ِ ‫ﺚﺣ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ َ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬

1st person m. & f.

ِ ‫ﺻﻴَ ٌﻎ‬

(Forms)

ِ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﻏﺎﺋ‬

3rd person m.

37

They did

‫ُﳘَﺎ ﻓَـ َﻌﻠَﺘَﺎ‬

Both of them did

ِ ‫ﺖ‬ ْ َ‫ﻫ َﻰ ﻓَـ َﻌﻠ‬

‫أَﻧْـﺘُ ْﻢ ﻓَـ َﻌ ْﻠﺘُ ْﻢ‬

All of you did

‫أَﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ ﻓَـ َﻌ ْﻠﺘُ َﻤﺎ‬

Both of you did

‫ﺖ‬ َ ‫ﺖ ﻓَـ َﻌ ْﻠ‬ َ ْ‫أَﻧ‬

‫ﱳ‬ ‫ﱳ ﻓَـ َﻌ ْﻠ ُ ﱠ‬ ‫أَﻧْ ُ ﱠ‬

All of you did

‫أَﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺄ ﻓَـ َﻌ ْﻠﺘُ َﻤﺎ‬

Both of you did

ِ ‫ﺖ ﻓَـﻌ ْﻠ‬ ِ ‫ﺖ‬ َ ْ‫أَﻧ‬

‫َْﳓ ُﻦ ﻓَـ َﻌ ْﻠﻨَﺎ‬

‫َْﳓ ُﻦ ﻓَـ َﻌ ْﻠﻨَﺎ‬

‫ﺖ‬ ُ ‫ ﻓَـ َﻌ ْﻠ‬Vَ ‫أ‬

‫ُﻫ ﱠﻦ ﻓَـ َﻌ ْﻠ َﻦ‬

We did

We did

ِ ٌ ‫ﻣﺆﻧﱠ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ َُ ٌ ‫ﺚ َﻏﺎﺋ‬

3rd person f.

She did

ِ ‫ﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛﺮ ﺣ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ َ ٌ ُ

You did

2nd person m.

You did

2nd person f.

ِ ‫ﺚﺣ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ َ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬

‫ُﻣﺘَ َﻜﻠِّ ٌﻢ‬

1st person m. & f.

I did

Use of Detached Pronouns with the Present Tense Aorist Verb “‫”ﻳَـ ْﻔ َﻌﻞ‬

‫َﲨْ ٌﻊ‬

‫ ُﻣﺜَ ﱠﲎ‬/ٌ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬

‫ُﻫ ْﻢ ﻳـَ ْﻔ َﻌﻠُ ْﻮ َن‬

‫ُﳘَﺎ ﻳـَ ْﻔ َﻌ َﻼ ِن‬

PLURAL

They do They will do They are doing

‫ُﻫ ﱠﻦ ﻳـَ ْﻔ َﻌ ْﻠ َﻦ‬

They do They will do They are doing

‫أَﻧْـﺘُ ْﻢ ﺗَـ ْﻔ َﻌﻠُ ْﻮ َن‬

All of you do All of you will do All of you are doing

‫ﱳ ﺗَـ ْﻔ َﻌ ْﻠ َﻦ‬ ‫أَﻧْ ُ ﱠ‬

All of you do All of you will do All of you are doing

‫َْﳓ ُﻦ ﻧـَ ْﻔ َﻌ ُﻞ‬

We do We shall do We are doing

DUAL

ِ‫و‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ

SINGULAR

‫ُﻫ َﻮ ﻳـَ ْﻔ َﻌ ُﻞ‬

Both of them do Both of them will do Both of them are doing

He does He will do He is doing

Both of them do Both of them will do Both of them are doing

She does She will do She is doing

‫ُﳘَﺎ ﺗَـ ْﻔ َﻌﻼَ ِن‬

‫أَﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ ﺗَـ ْﻔ َﻌﻼَ ِن‬

‫ِﻫ َﻰ ﺗَـ ْﻔ َﻌ ُﻞ‬

‫ﺖ ﺗَـ ْﻔ َﻌ ُﻞ‬ َ ْ‫أَﻧ‬

Both of you do Both of you will do Both of you are doing

You do You will do You are doing

Both of you do Both of you will do Both of you are doing

You do You will do You are doing

‫أَﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺄ ﺗَـ ْﻔ َﻌﻼَ ِن‬

‫َْﳓ ُﻦ ﻧـَ ْﻔ َﻌ ُﻞ‬

We do We shall do We are doing

ِ ِ ‫ﲔ‬ َ ْ ‫أَﻧْﺖ ﺗَـ ْﻔ َﻌﻠ‬

‫ أﻓْـ َﻌ ُﻞ‬Vَ ‫أ‬

I do I shall do I am doing

ِ Use of Detached Pronouns with Imperative Verb “‫ﻞ‬ ْ ‫”اﻓْـ َﻌ‬ ‫َﲨْ ٌﻊ‬

‫ ُﻣﺜَ ﱠﲎ‬/ٌ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬

‫أَﻧْـﺘُ ْﻢ اِﻓْـ َﻌﻠُ ْﻮا‬

َ‫أَﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ اِﻓْـ َﻌﻼ‬

PLURAL

(All 0f) You do

ُ

ِ‫و‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ

ِ ‫ﺻﻴَ ٌﻎ‬

(Forms)

ِ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﻏﺎﺋ‬

3rd person m.

ِ ٌ ‫ﻣﺆﻧﱠ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ َُ ٌ ‫ﺚ َﻏﺎﺋ‬

3rd person f.

ِ ‫ﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛﺮ ﺣ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ َ ٌ ُ

2nd person m.

ِ ‫ﺚﺣ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ َ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬

2nd person f.

‫ُﻣﺘَ َﻜﻠِّ ٌﻢ‬

1st person mg. & f.g

ِ ‫ﺻﻴَ ٌﻎ‬

DUAL

SINGULAR

(Forms)

(Both of) You do

You do

‫ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ‬

‫ﺖ اِﻓْـ َﻌ ْﻞ‬ َ ْ‫أَﻧ‬

‫‪38‬‬

‫أﻧْ ِ‬ ‫ﺖ اِﻓْـ َﻌﻠِﻰ‬

‫ﺚ‬ ‫ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ ٌ‬

‫‪You do‬‬

‫”ﻻَ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﺻﻴَ ٌﻎ‬

‫)‪(Forms‬‬

‫اَﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ اِﻓْـ َﻌﻼَ‬

‫وِ‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ ‫َ‬

‫‪(Both of) You do‬‬

‫ﱳ اِﻓْـ َﻌ ْﻠ َﻦ‬ ‫اَﻧْ ُ ﱠ‬

‫‪(All of) You do‬‬

‫ﻞ“ ‪Use of Detached Pronouns with Negative Verb‬‬ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻔ َﻌ ْ‬

‫‪SINGULAR‬‬

‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔٌ‪ُ /‬ﻣﺜَ ﱠﲎ‬ ‫‪DUAL‬‬

‫َﲨْ ٌﻊ‬

‫ﺖ ﻻَ ﺗَـ ْﻔ َﻌ ْﻞ‬ ‫أَﻧْ َ‬

‫أَﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ ﻻَ ﺗَـ ْﻔ َﻌﻼَ‬

‫أَﻧْـﺘُ ْﻢ ﻻَ ﺗَـ ْﻔ َﻌﻠُ ْﻮا‬

‫ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ‬

‫‪You do not do‬‬

‫ﺚ‬ ‫ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ ٌ‬

‫‪You do not do‬‬

‫أَﻧْ ِ‬ ‫ﺖ ﻻَ ﺗَـ ْﻔ َﻌﻠِﻰ‬

‫‪PLURAL‬‬

‫‪(Both of) You do not do‬‬

‫‪(All of) You do not do‬‬

‫أَﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ ﻻَ ﺗَـ ْﻔ َﻌﻼَ‬

‫ﱳ ﻻَ ﺗَـ ْﻔ َﻌ ْﻠ َﻦ‬ ‫أَﻧْ ُ ﱠ‬

‫‪(Both of) You do not do‬‬

‫‪(All of) You do not do‬‬

‫‪Use of Detached Pronouns in Sentences of Daily Usage‬‬

‫ﺿ ِﻤ ْﲑ اﻟْﻐَﺎﺋِ ِ‬ ‫ﺐ اﻟْ ُﻤ ْﻔ َﺮِد اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺬ ﱠﻛ ِﺮ ‪ُ (He):‬ﻫ َﻮ‬ ‫َﻫ َﺬا َ ُ‬ ‫ﺐ ُﻛﱠﺮة اﻟْ َﻘ َﺪِم‬ ‫‪He plays football.‬‬ ‫ُﻫ َﻮ ﻳـَ ْﻠ َﻌ ُ‬ ‫ُﻫ َﻮ ﺑَﻄْ ٌﻞ‬ ‫‪He is a hero.‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﺐ اﻟْﻤ ْﻔﺮِد اﻟْﻤﺆﻧ ِ‬ ‫ﻫ َﺬا َ ِ‬ ‫ﱠﺚ ‪ِ (She):‬ﻫ َﻰ‬ ‫ﺿﻤ ْﲑُ اﻟْﻐَﺎﺋ ِ ُ َ ُ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﺐ ُﻛَﺮَة اﻟْ َﻘ َﺪِم‬ ‫‪She plays football.‬‬ ‫ﻫ َﻰ ﺗَـ ْﻠ َﻌ ُ‬ ‫‪She is a heroin.‬‬ ‫ِﻫ َﻰ ﺑَﻄْﻠَﺔٌ‬ ‫ﱠﺚ و َﻏ ِﲑ ِ‬ ‫ﻫ َﺬﻩ ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺎﻗِﻞ ‪ُ (They):‬ﻫ ﱠﻦ‪ُ ،‬ﻫ ْﻢ‪ُ ،‬ﳘَﺎ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋ ُﺮ ﲨْﻊ اﻟﻐَﺎﺋﺒِ ْ َ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﺎﻗ ِﻞ َو َ‬ ‫ﲔ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺬ ﱠﻛ ِﺮ َو اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺆﻧ َ ْ َ‬ ‫‪Both of them play football.‬‬ ‫‪They (m) play football.‬‬ ‫‪They (f) play football.‬‬ ‫‪Both of them are heroes.‬‬ ‫‪They (m) are heroes.‬‬ ‫‪They (f) are heroes.‬‬

‫‪Both of you play football.‬‬ ‫‪Both of you play football.‬‬

‫‪2.‬‬

‫‪3.‬‬

‫ُﳘﺎ ﻳـ ْﻠﻌﺒ ِ‬ ‫ﺎن ُﻛﺮة اﻟْ َﻘ َﺪِم‬ ‫َ َ ََ‬ ‫ُﻫ ْﻢ ﻳـَ ْﻠ َﻌﺒُـ ْﻮ َن ُﻛ َﺮَة اﻟْ َﻘ َﺪِم‬ ‫ﱭ ُﻛﱠﺮةَ اﻟْ َﻘ َﺪِم‬ ‫ُﻫ ﱠﻦ ﻳـَ ْﻠ َﻌ َ‬ ‫ُﳘَﺎ ﺑَﻄْﻼَ ِن‬ ‫ﺎل‬ ‫ُﻫ ْﻢ أﺑْﻄَ ٌ‬ ‫ت‬ ‫ُﻫ ﱠﻦ ﺑَﻄﻼَ ٌ‬

‫ِ‬ ‫ﻫ َﺬﻩ َ ِ‬ ‫ﱠﺚ ‪ (You):‬أﻧْ ﱠ ِ‬ ‫ﺐ اﻟْﻤ ْﻔﺮِد وا ْﳉﻤ ِﻊ واﻟْﻤ َﺬ ﱠﻛ ِﺮ و اﻟْﻤﺆﻧ ِ‬ ‫ﺖ‬ ‫اﻟﻀ َﻤﺎﺋ ُﺮ َﻋ ِﻦ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺨﺎﻃ ِ ُ َ َ َ ْ َ ُ َ ُ َ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ﱳ‪ ،‬أﻧْﺖ‪ ،‬أﻧْـﺘُ ْﻢ‪ ،‬اَﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ‪ ،‬أﻧْ َ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫‪You (m) play football.‬‬

‫‪1.‬‬

‫ﺐ ُﻛَﺮةَ اﻟْ َﻘ َﺪِم‬ ‫أَﻧْ َ‬ ‫ﺖ ﺗَـ ْﻠ َﻌ ُ‬ ‫أَﻧْـﺘُﻤﺎ ﺗَـ ْﻠﻌﺒ ِ‬ ‫ﺎن ُﻛَﺮةَ اﻟْ َﻘ َﺪِم‬ ‫َ ََ‬ ‫أَﻧْـﺘُ ْﻢ ﺗَـ ْﻠ َﻌﺒُـ ْﻮ َن ُﻛَﺮةَ اﻟْ َﻘ َﺪِم‬

‫‪4.‬‬

39

5.

6.

ِ ‫ﲔ ُﻛَﺮةَ اﻟْ َﻘ َﺪِم‬ You (f) play football. َ ْ ِ‫أَﻧْﺖ ﺗَـ ْﻠ َﻌﺒ‬ ‫ﱭ ُﻛَﺮةَ اﻟْ َﻘ َﺪِم‬ All of you play football. ‫أَﻧْ ُ ﱠ‬ َ ْ ‫ﱳ ﺗَـ ْﻠ َﻌ‬ ‫ﺖ ﺑَﻄْ ٌﻞ‬ You (m) are a hero. َ ْ‫أَﻧ‬ ‫أَﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ ﺑَﻄْﻼَ ِن‬ Both of you are heroes. ‫ﺎل‬ All of you are heroes. ٌ َ‫أَﻧْـﺘُ ْﻢ أﺑْﻄ‬ ِ ْ‫أَﻧ‬ You (f) are a heroin. ٌ‫ﺖ ﺑَﻄْﻠَﺔ‬ ِ َ‫أَﻧْـﺘُﻤﺎ ﺑﻄْﻠَﺘ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ Both of you are hero. َ َ ‫ت‬ All of you are heroes. ‫أَﻧْ ُ ﱠ‬ ٌ َ‫ﱳ ﺑَﻄْﻼ‬ ِ ‫ﱠﻤﲑ ﻋ ِﻦ اﻟْﻤﺘَ َﻜﻠِّﻢ اﻟْﻤ َﺬ ﱠﻛ ِﺮ و اﻟْﻤﺆﻧ‬ ِ V‫( َأ‬I): ‫ﱠﺚ‬ َُ َ ُ ُ َ ُ ْ ‫َﻫ َﺬا اﻟﻀ‬ ‫ﺐ ُﻛ َﺮَة اﻟْ َﻘ َﺪِم‬ I play football. ُ ‫ أَﻟْ َﻌ‬V‫َأ‬ ‫ ﺑَﻄْ ٌﻞ‬Vَ ‫أ‬ I am a hero. ِ ‫ﱠﻤﲑ ﻋ ِﻦ اﻟْﻤﺘَ َﻜﻠِّ ِﻤﲔ ِﲝ‬ ِ ‫( َْﳓ ُﻦ‬We): ‫اﳉَ ْﻤ ٍﻊ‬ ْ ‫ﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﱠـﺜْﻨِﻴَ ِﺔ َو‬ َ َ ْ ُ َ ُ ْ ‫َﻫ َﺬا اﻟﻀ‬ ‫ﺐ ُﻛَﺮةُ اﻟْ َﻘ َﺪِم‬ We play football. ُ ‫َْﳓ ُﻦ ﻧـَ ْﻠ َﻌ‬ ‫ﺎل‬ We are heroes. ٌ َ‫َْﳓ ُﻦ أَﺑْﻄ‬

‫ﺺ‬ ُ َ‫( اَﻟ ُْﻤ ْﺴﺘَ ْﺨﻠ‬The Abstract) 1.

2. 3. 4. 5.

ِ ِ ‫ﱠﻤﲑ اﻟْﻤْﻨـ َﻔ‬ ِ ‫ﺼ ُﻞ‬ ُ ُ ْ ‫( اَﻟﻀ‬The Detached Pronoun) is a type of noun (‫ ا ْﺳ ٌﻢ‬, ism) that is used to indicate ِ ِ the ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫( َﻏﺎﺋ‬absent), or the ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫( ُﳐَﺎﻃ‬addressed), or the ‫( ُﻣﺘَ َﻜﻠﱠ ٌﻢ‬Speaker). ِ ِ َ ). You can begin a sentence with it (‫ﺼﻞ‬ ٌ ‫ﺿﻤ ْﲑٌ ُﻣْﻨـ َﻔ‬ ِ ‫ﱠﻤﲑ اﻟْﻤْﻨـ َﻔ‬ ِ ‫ﺼ ُﻞ‬ ُ ُ ْ ‫ اَﻟﻀ‬is a type of a ‫( ُﻣْﺒـﺘَ َﺪأ‬subject). ِ ‫ﱠﻤﲑ اﻟْﻤْﻨـ َﻔ‬ ِ ‫ﺼ ُﻞ‬ ُ ُ ْ ‫ اَﻟﻀ‬is ٌ‫( َﻣ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَﺔ‬definite). ِ َ (dhameer) ‫ ﻫﻮ‬and ‫ ِﻫﻰ‬can be used for those who possess intellect ‫ﻋﺎﻗِﻞ‬, and for The ‫ﲑ‬ ٌْ ‫ﺿﻤ‬ َُ ٌ َ َ things that do not possess intellect ‫ َﻏ ْﲑُ َﻋﺎﻗِ ٍﻞ‬. If they are used for the latter they will have the meaning of “it”.

‫‪40‬‬

‫َ ْ ُ َ ْ َّ‬ ‫‪2.2‬۔ا َ(اع اﻟﻀ َﻤﺎﺋ ِِﺮ)‪(1‬‬ ‫)‪The Kinds of Pronouns (1‬‬ ‫اَﻟْﻀﱠﻤﺎﺋِﺮ اﻟْﻤﺘ ِ‬ ‫ﱠﺼﻠَﺔُ‬ ‫َ ُ ُ‬

‫‪The Attached Pronoun‬‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬

‫)‪(2‬‬

‫)‪(3‬‬

‫)‪(4‬‬

‫)‪(5‬‬

‫)‪(6‬‬

‫)‪(7‬‬

‫ُه‬

‫ُﳘَﺎ‬

‫ُﻫ ْﻢ‬

‫َﻫﺎ‬

‫ُﳘَﺎ‬

‫ُﻫ ﱠﻦ‬

‫َك‬

‫‪His‬‬

‫‪Him‬‬

‫ِ‬ ‫ﻛﺘَﺎﺑُﻪُ‬

‫‪Your‬‬

‫َ‬ ‫ﺿَﺮﺑَﻪُ‬

‫‪Them‬‬

‫‪Their‬‬

‫ﻛِﺘَ ُﺎ‪َ ُË‬ﻤﺎ‬

‫ﺿَﺮُ‪َ ُË‬ﻤﺎ‬ ‫َ‬

‫)‪(8‬‬

‫)‪(9‬‬

‫ُﻛ َﻤﺎ‬

‫ُﻛ ْﻢ‬ ‫‪You‬‬

‫‪Your‬‬

‫ِ‬ ‫ﺿَﺮﺑَ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ ﻛِﺘَﺎﺑُ ُﻜ ْﻢ‬ ‫ﻛﺘَﺎﺑُ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ َ‬

‫‪Them‬‬

‫‪Their‬‬

‫ﻛِﺘَ ُﺎ‪ُْË‬ﻢ‬

‫ﺿَﺮَ‪ُْË‬ﻢ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫)‪(10‬‬

‫ِك‬

‫‪You‬‬

‫ﺿَﺮﺑَ ُﻜ ْﻢ‬ ‫َ‬

‫‪Your‬‬

‫ﻛِﺘَﺎﺑ ِ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ ‫ُ‬

‫‪You‬‬

‫‪Her‬‬

‫‪Her‬‬

‫ﻛِﺘَ ُﺎ‪َË‬ﺎ‬

‫ﺿَﺮَ‪َË‬ﺎ‬ ‫َ‬

‫‪Them‬‬

‫‪Their‬‬

‫ﻛِﺘَ ُﺎ‪َ ُË‬ﻤﺎ‬

‫ﺻَﺮَ‪َ ُË‬ﻤﺎ‬ ‫َ‬

‫‪Them‬‬

‫‪Their‬‬

‫ﻛِﺘَ ُﺎ‪ ُË‬ﱠﻦ‬

‫ﺿَﺮَ‪ ُË‬ﱠﻦ‬ ‫َ‬

‫‪You‬‬

‫‪Your‬‬

‫ﻚ‬ ‫ﻛِﺘَﺎﺑُ َ‬

‫ﻚ‬ ‫ﺿَﺮﺑَ َ‬ ‫َ‬

‫)‪(11‬‬

‫)‪(12‬‬

‫)‪(13‬‬

‫)‪(14‬‬

‫ُﻛ َﻤﺎ‬

‫ُﻛ ﱠﻦ‬

‫ى‬

‫َن‬

‫‪Your‬‬

‫‪You‬‬

‫‪Your‬‬

‫‪You‬‬

‫ِ‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺑ ِ ِ‬ ‫ﺿَﺮﺑَ ُﻜ ﱠﻦ‬ ‫ﺿَﺮﺑَ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ ﻛﺘَﺎﺑُ ُﻜ ﱠﻦ َ‬ ‫ﻚ ﻛﺘَﺎﺑُ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ َ‬ ‫َ ََ‬

‫‪My‬‬

‫ﻛِﺘَ ِﺎﰉ‬

‫‪Me‬‬

‫ﺿَﺮﺑَِﲎ‬ ‫َ‬

‫‪Our‬‬

‫ﻛِﺘَﺎﺑـُﻨَﺎ‬

‫‪Us‬‬

‫ﺿَﺮﺑـَﻨَﺎ‬ ‫َ‬

41

Introduction to the 2nd part of Unit No.02 The 2nd part of the unit no.02, which you are going to study, is about the attached

pronouns in Arabic language. (‫اﻟْ َﻌﺮﺑِﻴَ ِﺔ‬

ِ‫ِ ِ ﱡ‬ ِ ‫)اَﻟْﻀ‬. There are 14 pronouns and َ َ ‫ﱠﻤﺎﺋﺮ اﻟْ ُﻤﺘﱠﺼﻠَﺔُ ﰱ اﻟﻠﻐَﺔ‬

they are used with a noun as its annexed noun (‫إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬

(‫ﺑِِﻪ‬

1. 2.

‫) َﻣ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮٌل‬.

Vَ ،‫ ِى‬،‫ ُﻛ ﱠﻦ‬،‫ ُﻛ َﻤﺎ‬،‫ ِك‬،‫ ُﻛ ْﻢ‬،‫ ُﻛ َﻤﺎ‬،‫ َك‬،‫ ُﻫ ﱠﻦ‬،‫ ُﳘَﺎ‬،‫ ُﻫﺎ‬،‫ ُﻫ ْﻢ‬،‫ ُﻫﺎ‬،‫ُه‬

This unit covers three aspects of the attached pronouns: Their introduction Their usage with a noun as annexed (‫إﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬

ِ ‫ ﻛﺘَﺎﺑ‬،‫ﻛِﺘَﺎﺑﻪ‬. ِ َ‫ ﻛِﺘ‬،‫ﻚ‬ e.g., ‫ﺎﰉ‬ ُ ُُ 3.

4.

‫ﺎف‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ ) ُﻣ‬and with a verb as its object

Their usage with a verb as object (‫ﺑِِﻪ‬

‫ﺿ َﺮﺑـَﻨَﺎ‬ َ ،‫ﺿ َﺮﺑَِﲎ‬ َ ،‫ﺿَﺮﺑـَْﺘـ َﻬﺎ‬ َ.

‫ﺎف‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ ) ُﻣ‬in the form of conjugation/ inflection,

‫ ) َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮٌل‬in the form of conjugation, e.g., ‫ ِﻫ َﻰ‬،‫ﺿَﺮﺑَﻪ‬ َ ‫ُﻫ َﻮ‬

Their examples in sentences of daily usage.

Objectives of 2nd part of Unit No.02 nd With the help of Allah (‫ﺗﻌﺎﻟﯽ‬ ٰ ‫)ﺳﺒﺤﺎﻧﻪ و‬, when you complete the study of the 2 part of Unit

ِ ‫اﻟْﻤﺘ‬ No.02, which consists of 14 attached pronouns (ُ‫ﱠﺼﻠَﺔ‬ ُ

‫ﱠﻤﺎﺋُِﺮ‬ َ ‫)اَﻟْﻀ‬, you will then discover

that you will be able to do the following work easily: 1.

to introduce the attached pronouns.

2.

to conjugate the attached pronouns and use them with a noun (ism) as its

3.

to conjugate the attached pronouns and use them with a verb as its object, e.g.,

ِ ِ ‫ﺎف إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ُ‫( ﻛِﺘَﺎﺑ‬your book), etc. َ ‫( ُﻣ‬annexed), e.g. ُ‫ه= ﻛﺘَﺎﺑُﻪ‬+ ُ ‫ﺎب‬ ُ َ‫( ﻛﺘ‬his book), ‫ﻚ‬

َ ‫ب‬ َ َ‫ﺿَﺮﺑ‬ َ = (He struck him), ‫ﻚ‬ َ = ‫ك‬+ َ (He struck you), etc. ُ‫ﺿَﺮﺑَﻪ‬ َ ‫ﺿَﺮ‬ 4.

to use them in sentences of daily usage.

‫ه‬+ َ ُ ‫ب‬ َ ‫ﺿَﺮ‬

42

ِ ‫اَﻟْﻀﱠﻤﺎﺋِﺮ اﻟْﻤﺘ‬ ُ‫ﱠﺼﻠَﺔ‬ ُ ُ َ

(The Attached Pronouns)13

ِ ‫( ﻣﺘ‬muttasila) comes from the verb “‫ ”اِﺗﱠﺼﻞ‬which has the meaning of being The term ٌ‫ﱠﺼﻠَﺔ‬ َ ُ

linked or connected, e.g.,m

Vَ (our), etc.

‫ُه‬

(his),

‫َﻫﺎ‬

َ

(her),

‫َك‬

(your),

‫ِى‬

(my),

‫ِﰱ‬

(me),

Conjugation of the Detached and the Attached Pronouns with Examples of Using the Attached Pronouns with Noun as its ‫َﻴ ِﻪ‬ ْ ‫إِﻟ‬

‫ﺎف‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ ُﻣ‬14

ٍ ‫ﻀ‬ ِ ِ ‫ﺻﻴﱠ ُﻎ اﻟﻀﱠﻤﺎﺋِ ِﺮ اﻟْﻤْﻨـ َﻔ‬ ِ ِ ‫ﱠﺼﻠَﺔ ﻣﻊ أﻣﺜِﻠَ ِﺔ اِﺳﺘِ ْﺨ َﺪ ِام اﻟﻀﱠﻤﺎﺋِﺮ اﻟْﻤﺘ‬ (‫ﺎف إﻟ َْﻴﻪ ﻟَﻪُ )أى اِ ْﺳ ٍﻢ‬ َ ‫ﱠﺼﻠَﺔ ِ@ ِﺳ ٍﻢ َﻛ ُﻤ‬ ْ ْ َ َ ِ ‫ﺼﻠﱠﺔ َواﻟ ُْﻤﺘ‬ ُ َ ُ

‫َﲨْ ٌﻊ‬

‫ ُﻣﺜَ ﱠﲎ‬/ٌ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬

(Their) ‫ﻫﻢ‬ ْ , (They)‫ُﻫ ْﻢ‬

(Their) ‫ ﳘﺎ‬،(they)‫ُﳘَﺎ‬

PLURAL

DUAL

‫ُْﻢ‬Ë‫ﻛِﺘَ ُﺎ‬

‫ُ َﻤﺎ‬Ë‫ﻛِﺘَ ُﺎ‬

ِ‫و‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ

SINGULAR

(His)

‫ ه‬،(He)‫ُﻫ َﻮ‬ ِ ُ‫ﻛﺘَﺎﺑُﻪ‬

Their book

Their book

His book

(Their) ‫ﻫﻢ‬ ْ , (They)‫ُﻫ ْﻢ‬

(Their) ‫ ﳘﺎ‬،(they)‫ُﳘَﺎ‬

(Her)‫ َﻫﺎ‬, (She)‫ﻫﻰ‬

Their book

Their book

Her book

(your)‫ﻛ ْﻢ‬ ُ , (you)‫أﻧْـﺘُ ْﻢ‬

(your)‫ﻛ َﻤﺎ‬ ُ , (you)‫أﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ‬

(your)‫ك‬, (you)‫ﺖ‬ َ ْ‫أﻧ‬

Your book

Your book

Your book

(your)‫ﻦ‬ ‫أﻧْ ُ ﱠ‬ ‫ ُﻛ ﱠ‬, (you)‫ﱳ‬

(your)‫ﻛ َﻤﺎ‬ ُ , (you)‫أﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ‬

‫ُ ﱠﻦ‬Ë‫ﻛِﺘَ ُﺎ‬

‫ُ َﻤﺎ‬Ë‫ﻛِﺘَ ُﺎ‬

‫ﻛِﺘَﺎﺑُ ُﻜ ْﻢ‬

‫ﻛِﺘَﺎﺑُ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ‬

‫ﻛِﺘَﺎﺑُ ُﻜ ﱠﻦ‬

‫ﻛِﺘَﺎﺑُ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ‬

‫َﺎ‬Ë‫ﻛِﺘَ ُﺎ‬

‫ﻚ‬ َ ُ‫ﻛِﺘَﺎﺑ‬

ِ ْ‫أﻧ‬ (your)‫ ِك‬, (you)‫ﺖ‬ ِ ‫ﻛِﺘَﺎﺑ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ ُ

Your book

Your book

Your book

(Our)Vَ , (We)‫ﻦ‬ ُ ‫َْﳓ‬

(Our)Vَ , (We)‫ﻦ‬ ُ ‫َْﳓ‬

(My)‫ى‬, (I)Vَ ‫أ‬

‫ﻛِﺘَﺎﺑـُﻨَﺎ‬

‫ﻛِﺘَﺎﺑـُﻨَﺎ‬

(Our book)

(Our book)

‫ﻛِﺘَ ِﺎﰉ‬

ِ ‫ﺻ ْﻴ ٌﻎ‬

(Forms)

ِ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﻏﺎﺋ‬

3rd person m.

ِ ٌ ‫ﻣﺆﻧﱠ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ َُ ٌ ‫ﺚ َﻏﺎﺋ‬

3rd person f.

ِ ‫ﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛﺮ ﺣ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ َ ٌ ُ

2nd person m.

ِ ‫ﺚﺣ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ َ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬

2nd person f.

‫ُﻣﺘَ َﻜﻠِّ ٌﻢ‬

1st person m. & f.

My book

Note: Memorize these pronouns thoroughly because they often occur a number of times in AlQuran Al-Hakeem.

13

Attached pronouns are also named: linked, connected, suffexted pronouns (‫اﻷﺿﺎﻓَ ِﺔ‬ َ

ِ ‫اﻟ َﻔ‬ and subject pronouns (‫ﺎﻋ ِﻞ‬ 14

‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋِﺮ‬ َ ).

‫ﺎف إﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫( ُﻣ‬the annexed and the determining noun).

‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋِﺮ‬ َ ) possessive pronouns

43 Conjugation of the Attached Pronouns with Examples of Using it with a Verb as its Object (‫) َﻣ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮ ٌل‬:

ِ ‫ﺻﻴﱠ ُﻎ اﻟﻀﱠﻤﺎﺋِﺮ اﻟْﻤﺘ‬ ِ (‫ﱠﺼﻠَ ِﺔ َﻣ َﻊ اِ ْﺳﺘِ ْﺨ َﺪ ِاﻣ َﻬﺎ ﺑِِﻔ ْﻌ ٍﻞ َﻛ َﻤ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮ ٍل ﻟَﻪُ )أى ﻓِ ْﻌﻞ‬ ُ َ

DUAL

ِ‫و‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ

SINGULAR

(Forms)

‫ُ َﻤﺎ‬Ëَ‫ﺿ َﺮ‬ َ -‫ُﳘَﺎ‬

َ -‫ه‬ ُ‫ﺿَﺮﺑَﻪ‬

ِ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﻏﺎﺋ‬

‫َﲨْ ٌﻊ‬

‫ ُﻣﺜَ ﱠﲎ‬/ٌ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬

‫ُْﻢ‬Ëَ‫ﺿ َﺮ‬ َ -‫ُﻫ ْﻢ‬

PLURAL

He stucked them

He strucked both of them

He strucked him

‫ُ ﱠﻦ‬Ëَ‫ﺿ َﺮ‬ َ -‫ُﻫ ﱠﻦ‬

‫ُ َﻤﺎ‬Ëَ‫ﺿ َﺮ‬ َ -‫ُﳘَﺎ‬

‫َﺎ‬Ëَ‫ﺿَﺮ‬ َ -‫َﻫﺎ‬

She strucked them

He stucked both of them

He strucked her

‫ﺿَﺮﺑـَْﺘـ ُﻬ َﻦ‬ َ -‫َﻫ ﱠﻦ‬

‫ﺿَﺮﺑـَْﺘـ ُﻬ َﻤﺎ‬ َ -‫ُﳘَﺎ‬

‫ﺿَﺮﺑـَْﺘـ َﻬﺎ‬ َ -‫َﻫﺎ‬

She strucked them

She strucked both of them

She strucked her

‫ﺿَﺮﺑَ ُﻜ ْﻢ‬ َ -‫ُﻛ ْﻢ‬

‫ﺿَﺮﺑَ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ‬ َ -‫ُﻛ َﻤﺎ‬

‫ﻚ‬ َ َ‫ﺿَﺮﺑ‬ َ -‫َك‬

He strucked you

He strucked both of you

‫ﺿَﺮﺑَ ُﻜ ﱠﻦ‬ َ -‫َﻛ ﱠﻦ‬

‫ﺿَﺮﺑَ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ‬ َ -‫ُﻛ َﻤﺎ‬

He strucked you

He strucked both of you

‫ﺿَﺮﺑَـْﺘ ُﻜ ﱠﻦ‬ َ -‫ُﻛ ﱠﻦ‬

‫ﺿَﺮﺑَـْﺘ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ‬ َ -‫ُﻛ َﻤﺎ‬

She strucked you

She strucked both of you

‫ﺿَﺮﺑـَﻨَﺎ‬ َ -Vَ

‫ﺿَﺮﺑـَﻨَﺎ‬ َ -Îَ

He strucked us

He strucked us

ِ ‫ﺻﻴَ ٌﻎ‬

3rd person m.

ِ ٌ ‫ﻣﺆﻧﱠ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ َُ ٌ ‫ﺚ َﻏﺎﺋ‬

3rd person f.

ِ ‫ﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛﺮ ﺣ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ َ ٌ ُ

He strucked you

2nd person m.

He strucked you

2nd person f.

ِ ِ ‫ﺿﺮﺑ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ ََ َ -‫ك‬

ِ ِ ‫ﺿﺮﺑـْﺘ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ ََ َ -‫ك‬

ِ ‫ﺚﺣ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ َ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬

She strucked you

‫ﺿَﺮﺑَﻨِﯽ‬ َ -‫ِى‬

He strucked me

‫ُﻣﺘَ َﻜﻠِّ ٌﻢ‬

1st person m. & f.

ِ Use of the Attached Pronouns in Sentences of Daily Usage with Nouns as ‫ﻟﻴ ِﻪ‬ ْ‫ا‬

1. ‫ه‬ ُ (His)

ِ ِ .‫ى‬ ٌ ‫ُﻫ َﻮ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠ ٌﻢ َو ا ْﳝَﺎﻧُﻪُ ﻗَ ِﻮ‬ ِ .‫ﺐ َو ﻛِﺘَﺎﺑُﻪُ َﺟ ِﺪﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻫ َﻮ ﻃَﺎﻟ‬ ِ ْ‫ُﻫ َﻮ ُﻣ َﻌﻠِّ ٌﻢ َو َﻣْﻨـ َﻬ ُﺠﻪُ ِﰱ اﻟﺘَ ْﺪ ِرﻳ‬ .‫ﺲ َﺟﻴِ ٌﺪ ﺟ ًﺪا‬ ِ ‫ﻫﻮ ﺟْﻨ ِّﺪى و ﻟِﺒ‬ .‫ﲔ‬ ً ْ ‫ﺎﺳﻪُ َﲦ‬ ُ َ َ ٌ ُ َُ .ٌ‫ُﻫ َﻮ َﺳﺎﺋِ ٌﻖ َو َﺳﻴﱠ َﺎرﺗُﻪُ َﺟ ِﺪﻳْ َﺪة‬

‫ﺎف‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ ُﻣ‬:

He is a Muslim and his belief is strong. He is a student and his book is new. He is a teacher and his method of teaching is very good. He is a soldier and his dress is precious. He is a driver and his car is new.

2. ‫ﳘَﺎ‬ ُ (Their)

ِ ‫ُﳘﺎ ﻣ‬ ِ َ‫ﺆﻣﻨ‬ .‫ى‬ ‫ﺎن َو اِْﳝَﺎ ُ»ُ ْﻤﺎ ﻗَ ِﻮ ﱞ‬ ُ َ ِ ‫ُﳘﺎ ﻃَﺎﻟِﺒ‬ .ٌ‫ﺎن و ُﻛﺘُـﺒُـ ُﻬ َﻤﺎ ُﻣ ِﻔْﻴ َﺪة‬ َ َ ِ ‫ُﳘﺎ ﺻ ِﺪﻳـ َﻘ‬ .ٌ‫ﺎن َو ِﺻ َﺪاﻗَـﺘُـ ُﻬ ْﻤﺎ َﻣ ْﺸ ُﻬ ْﻮَرة‬ ْ َ َ ِ ِ ِ ِ .‫ﺺ‬ ٌ ‫ﺎﺳ ُﻬ َﻤﺎ َرﺧْﻴ‬ ُ َ‫ُﳘَﺎ ﻻَﻋﺒَﺎن َو ﻟﺒ‬

Both of them are believers and their belief is strong. Both of them are students and their books are useful. Both of them are friends and their friendship is famous. Both of them are players and their dresses are cheap.

44

ِ ِ .ٌ‫ُ َﻤﺎ َﻣ ْﺸ ُﻜ ْﻮَرة‬Ñُ‫ﺼَﺮ‬ ْ ُ‫ﺻَﺮان َو ﻧ‬Vَ ‫ُﳘَﺎ‬

Both of them are helpers and their help is recognizable.

3. ‫( ُﻫ ْﻢ‬Their)

.ً‫ُْﻢ ﻗَ ِﻮﻳﱠﺔٌ ﺟﺪا‬Ñُ‫ب َو ذاﻛِﺮ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻫ ْﻢ ﻃَﻼﱠ‬ ِ ِ ِ .‫ﻶﺧ ِﺮﻳْ َﻦ‬ َ ‫ُﻫ ْﻢ ُﺟ ُﻬﻼَءٌ َو ﺟ َﻬﺎﻟَﺘُـ ُﻬ ْﻢ َﺧﻄ ْﲑٌ ﻟ‬ ِ ِ ِ .‫ﻶﺧَﺮﻳْ َﻦ‬ َ ‫ُﻫ ْﻢ ﻋُﻠَ َﻤﺎءٌ َو ﻋ ْﻠ ُﻤ ُﻬ ْﻢ ُﻣﻔْﻴ ٌﺪ ﻟ‬ ٍ ‫ﺆﻣﻨـﻮ َن و اِْﳝﺎ ُ»ُﻢ ﻟَﻴﺲ ﺑ َﻘﻮ‬ ِ .‫ىء‬ َ َ ْ ْ َ َ ْ ُ ‫ُﻫ ْﻢ ُﻣ‬ .ٌ‫ُ ْﻢ ﻗَ ِﺪ ْﳝَﺔ‬Ñُ‫ُﻫ ْﻢ َﻋ ِﺎﻣﻠُ ْﻮ ٌن َو ﺑـُﻴُﻮ‬

4. ‫( َﻫﺎ‬Her)

ِ ِ .ٌ‫َﺎ ﻃَﻴِّﺒَﺔ‬Ñُ ‫ﺎدا‬ َ ‫ﻫ َﻰ ﻃَﺎﻟﺒَﺔٌ ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬ َﺪةٌ َو َﻋ‬ .‫ِﻫ َﻰ َزْو َﺟﺔٌ َﻣﻠِْﻴ َﺤﺔٌ َو ﺑـَ ْﻌﻠُ َﻬﺎ َﻣﻠِْﻴ ٌﺢ‬ ِ ِ ِ ِ .‫ﱴ ﳑَْﺘَ ٌﺎز‬ ُ ‫ﻫ َﻰ ﻃَﺎﻟﺒَﺔٌ ﻧَﺸْﻴﻄَﺔٌ َو َﻋ َﻤﻠُ َﻬﺎ اَﻟْﺒَـْﻴ‬ ِ ِ .ٌ‫َﺎ َﺳﻴّـﺌَﺔ‬Ñُ ‫ﺎدا‬ َ ‫ﻫ َﻰ ﻃَﺎﻟﺒَﺔٌ َﺷ ِﺮﻳْـَﺮةٌ َو َﻋ‬ َِ ٌ‫ِﻫﻰ اِﻣﺮأة‬ ‫ﲨْﻴـﻠَﺔٌ َو َﲨَﺎ ُﳍَﺎ‬ َْ َ ِ .‫ف ِﰱ اﻟ َْﻌﺎﱂ‬ ٌ ‫َﻣ ْﻌ ُﺮْو‬

ِ ‫ِﻫﻰ ﺣ‬ .‫ﻀ ْﻮُرَﻫﺎ َﲦَﺎﻧِ ْﲔ ِﰱ اﻟْ َﻤﺎﺋﺔ‬ ُ ‫ﺎﺿ َﺮةٌ َو ُﺣ‬ َ َ

They are students and their memory is very strong. They are ignorant people and their ignorance is dangerous to other people. They are scholars and their knowledge is useful for other people. They are believers and their belief is not so strong. They are workers and their houses are old.

She is a hard working student and her manners are very good. She is a pretty wife and her husband is handsome. She is an active student and her homework is excellent. She is a naughty student and her manners are bad. She is a beautiful woman and her beauty is famous worldwide. She is present and her presence is eighty out of hundred (80%).

5. ‫ﳘَﺎ‬ ُ (Their (of two))

ِ َ‫ُﳘﺎ ﻃَﺎﻟِﺒـﺘ‬ .‫ ِن َو ا ِﺟﺒُ ُﻬ َﻤﺎ اﳌ َ ْ ِ ِ ّﱃُ ُﻣ َﻜ ﱠﻤ ٌﻞ‬6َ ‫ﺎن ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬ َﺪ‬ َ َ

ِ ‫ﺎن ﻣ‬ ِ َ ‫ُﳘﺎ ﳑَُِﺮ‬ .ٌ‫ُ َﻤﺎ َﻛﺜِ ْ َﲑة‬Ñُ ‫ ِن َو ِﺧ ْ َﱪ‬6َ‫ﺎﻫَﺮ‬ َ َ‫ﺿﺘ‬ ّ َ ٍ ‫ﺄن و اِْﳝﺎ ُ»ُﻤﺎ ﻟَﻴﺲ ﺑَِﻘ ِﻮ‬ ِ ِ .‫ىء‬ َ ْ َ َ َ َ‫ُﳘَﺎ ُﻣﺆﻣﻨَـﺘ‬ ِ ِ ِ ِ .ٌ‫ﺼﺔ‬ َ ‫ﺎﺳ ُﻬ َﻤﺎ َرﺧْﻴ‬ ُ َ‫ُﳘَﺎ ﻻَﻋﺒَـﺘَﺎن َو ﻟﺒ‬ ِ ِ ‫ُﳘﺎ‬ ‫ﺻ َﺪاﻗَـﺘُـ ُﻬ َﻤﺎ‬ َ ‫ﺻﺪﻳْـ َﻘﺘَﺎن َو‬ َ َ ِ.‫ﻣ ْﺸﻬﻮرةُ ِﰱ اﻟْ َﻘ ِﺮﻳﺔ‬ َ َْ ُ َ

6. ‫ﻦ‬ ‫( ُﻫ ﱠ‬Their)

ِ ِ .ٌ‫ﺎت و ُﲝُﺜـُ ْﻮُﻫ ﱠﻦ ﳑَْﺘَ َﺎزة‬ ٌ َ‫ﺎت َ]ﺣﺜ‬ ُ َ‫ُﻫ ﱠﻦ ﻃَﺎﻟﺒ‬ ِ ِ .‫ُ ﱠﻦ ُﻣ ِﻄْﻴـ َﻌﺎت‬Ñُ ‫ﺎت َو ﺑَـﻨَﺎ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻫ ﱠﻦ ﻧ ْﺴ َﻮةٌ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠ َﻤ‬

ِ ِ ِ .‫ﺎت‬ ٌ ‫ َﻋﺎﻟ َﻤ‬/‫ت َو اَْوﻻَ ُد ُﻫ ﱠﻦ َﻋﺎﻟ ُﻤ ْﻮ َن‬ ٌ َ‫ُﻫ ﱠﻦ َﺟﺎﻫﻼ‬

Both of them are hardworking students and their homework is complete. Both of them are expert nurses and their experience is a lot. Both of them are believers and their belief is not so strong. Both of them are players and their dresses are cheap.

They both are friend and their friendship is famous in the village/ town.

They are research students and their research theses are excellent. They are Muslim women and their daughters are obedient. They are ignorant ladies and their sons and daughters are scholars.

45

ِ ‫ُ ﱠﻦ‬Ñُ ‫ُ ﱠﻦ َو ﻃَﺎﻟِﺒَﺎ‬Ëُ ‫ﺎت َو ﻃُﻼﱠ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻫ ﱠﻦ ُﻣ َﻌﻠّ َﻤ‬ .‫ات‬ ٌ ‫ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬ ُﺪ ْو َن َو ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬ َﺪ‬ .ٌ‫ُ ﱠﻦ ﻗَﻠِْﻴـﻠَﺔ‬Ñُ‫ﺎت َو ِﺧ ْ َﲑ‬ ٌ َ‫ُﻫ ﱠﻦ ﻃَﺒِْﻴـﺒ‬

They

are

teachers

and

their

students

are

hardworking. They are lady doctors and their experience is little.

7. ‫( َك‬Your)

.‫ﺼٌﺮ ِﺟ ًﺪا‬ ٌ ‫ﺖ َ] ِﺣ‬ َ ُ‫ﺚ َو َْﲝﺜ‬ َ ْ‫أَﻧ‬ َ َ‫ﻚ ﳐُْﺘ‬ ِ ‫أَﻧْﺖ ﻣ‬ .‫ى‬ َ ُ‫ﺆﻣ ٌﻦ َو إِْﳝَﺎﻧ‬ ُ َ ٌ ‫ﻚ ﻗَِّﻮ‬ .‫ﺖ ُﻣ َﻌﻠﱠ ٌﻢ َو ﺗِْﻠ ِﻤْﻴ ُﺬ ُﻛ ْﻢ ُﻣ ِﻄْﻴ ٌﻊ ِﺟ ًﺪا‬ َ ْ‫أَﻧ‬ ِ ِ ُ‫ ِﺟﺮ و ِﲡﺎرﺗ‬6َ ‫أَﻧْﺖ‬ .‫ﻶﺧ ِﺮﻳْ َﻦ‬ َ َ َ َ َ ‫ﻓ َﻌﺔٌ ﻟ‬Vَ ‫ﻚ‬

ِ ‫أَﻧْﺖ‬ َِ ‫ﻚ‬ ِ ‫ﺎﺣﺐ اﻟْﺒـﻴ‬ .‫ﲨْﻴ ٌﻞ َو َو ِاﺳ ٌﻊ‬ َ ُ‫ﺖ َو ﺑـَْﻴـﺘ‬ َْ ُ ‫ﺻ‬ َ َ

You are a researcher and your thesis is very short. You are a believer and your belief is strong. You are a teacher and your pupil is very obedient. You are a trader (merchant) and your trading is useful (beneficial) for other people. You are the owner of house and your house is beautiful and vast.

8. ‫ﻛ َﻤﺎ‬ ُ (Your (of two))

ِ .‫ﺲ ِﲜَﻴِّ ٍﺪ‬ َ ‫أَﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ َر ُﺟﻼَن َو ﺑـَْﻴـﺘُ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ ﻟَْﻴ‬

ِ ِ ِ ِِ .‫ُﺳﺘَﺎذُ ُﻛ َﻤﺎ َﻣ ْﺴ ُﺮْوٌر ﺑِ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ‬ ْ ‫أَﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ ﺗ ْﻠﻤْﻴ َﺬان ُﻣﻄْﻴـ َﻌﺎن َوأ‬

ِ َ‫أَﻧْـﺘُﻤﺎ ﻧَ ِﺸﻴﻄ‬ ‫ﺎن َو ُﻣ ِﺪﻳْﺮُﻛ َﻤﺎ‬ ْ َ ِ ِ .‫ُﻣﺘ ِﱠﻔ ٌﻖ ﺑِﻨ َﺸﺎﻃَﺎﺗ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ‬ ِ ِ ِ ‫أَﻧْـﺘُﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺻْﻴ َﺪﻟِﻴﱠـﺘُ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ‬ َ ‫ﺻْﻴ َﺪﻟﻴﱠﺎن َﻣ ْﺸ ُﻬ ْﻮَران َو‬ َ َ .‫اﻷد ِوﻳﱠِﺔ‬ ْ ‫ﳑَْﻠُ ْﻮءَةٌ ﺑِ َﺴﺎﺋِﺮ‬ َِ ‫ﺎن و ﻛِﺘَﺎﺑـﺘُ ُﻜﻤﺎ‬ ِ ِ ‫ﲨْﻴـﻠَﺔَ ِﺟ ًﺪا‬ َ َ َ َ‫أَﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ َﻛﺎﺗﺒ‬ .‫َو َﻣ ْﻘُﺮْوءَةٌ ﺑِ َﺴ ُﻬ ْﻮﻟَ ٍﺔ‬

9. ‫ﻛ ْﻢ‬ ُ (Your)

.‫أَﻧْـﺘُ ْﻢ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ ُﻤ ْﻮ َن َو َﺳﻠُ ْﻮُﻛ ُﻜ ْﻢ َﺣ َﺴ ٌﻦ‬ ِ ‫ب َو ِﻋ ْﻠ ُﻤ ُﻜ ْﻢ ُﻣ ِﻔْﻴ ٌﺪ ﻟِﻠﻨ‬ .‫ﱠﺎس‬ ٌ ‫أَﻧْـﺘُ ْﻢ ﻃَﻼﱠ‬ ِ ‫أَﻧْـﺘُﻢ‬ .‫أﻃﺒﱠﺎءٌ َو ِﺧ ْﱪَﺗُ ُﻜ ْﻢ َﻛﺎﻓِﻴَﺔَ ِﳍَ ِﺬﻩِ اﻟْ َﻮ ِﻇْﻴـ َﻔ ِﺔ‬ ْ .‫ط َو َﺧﻴﱠﺎﻃَﺘُ ُﻜ ْﻢ َﻣ ْﺸ ُﻬ ْﻮَرةٌ ِﺟ ًﺪا‬ ٌ ‫أَﻧْـﺘُ ْﻢ َﺧﻴﱠﺎ‬

Both of you are men and your house is not so good.

Both of you are obedient pupil and your teacher is happy with you. Both of you are active and your director supports your activities. Both of you are famous Pharmacists and your pharmacy is full with all kinds of medicines. Both of you are writers and your handwriting is very beautiful and easy to read.

All of you are Muslims and your method/way is very good. All of you are students and your knowledge is useful for the people. All of you are doctors and your experience is enough for this job. All of you are tailors and your tailoring is very famous.

ِ All of you are worshipers and your act of worship .‫ﺎدﺗُ ُﻜ ْﻢ َﻣ ْﻘﺒُـ ْﻮﻟَﺔٌ ِﻋْﻨ َﺪ ﷲِ ﺗَﻌﺎ ٰﱃ‬ َ َ‫أَﻧْـﺘُ ْﻢ َﻋﺎﺑِ ُﺪ ْو َن َو ﻋﺒ‬

ٌ‫أَﻧْـﺘُ ْﻢ َ] ِﺣﺜـُ ْﻮ َن ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬ ُﺪ ْو َن َو ُﲝُﺜـُ ْﻮُﻛ ْﻢ ُﻣ ِﻔْﻴ َﺪة‬ ِِ ِ .‫ﲔ ِﰱ اﻟْ ُﻤ ْﺴﺘَـ ْﻘﺒَ ِﻞ‬ َْ ‫ﻟ ْﻠﺒَﺎﺣﺜ‬

is accepted by Allah (‫)ﺳﺒﺤﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺎﻟ ٰﯽ‬.

You are hardworking researchers and your theses will be useful for the future researchers.

46

ِ (Your) 10. ‫ك‬ [

ِ ِ ِ ِ‫ﺎد ِك ﻣﺴﺮور ﺑ‬ .‫ﻚ‬ ٌ ْ ُ ْ َ ُ َ‫أَﻧْﺖ ﻃَﺎﻟﺒَﺔٌ ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬ َﺪةٌ َو اُ ْﺳﺘ‬

ِ ْ‫أَﻧ‬ ِ ُ‫ﺖ َﻋﺎﺑِ َﺪةٌ و ِﻋﺒ َﺎدﺗ‬ .‫ﻚ َﻣ ْﻘﺒُـ ْﻮﻟَﺔٌ ِﻋْﻨ َﺪ ﷲِ ﺗَـ َﻌﺎ ٰﱃ‬ َ َ

ِ ِ ‫ﺖ اِﻣﺮأةٌ َﻋﺎﻟِﻤﺔٌ و ِﻋ ْﻠﻤ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ ُ َ َ َ ْ ْ‫أَﻧ‬ ٍِ ِ .‫ﻶﺧَﺮﻳْ َﻦ‬ َ ‫َﻏ ْﲑُ ُﻣﻔْﻴﺪ ﻟ‬ ِ ‫ﺖ ﳑَُِﺮ‬ ِ‫ﻀ‬ /‫ﻚ َﺷ ِﺮﻳْـٌﺮ‬ ُ ْ‫ﺿﺔٌ ﻧَﺸْﻴﻄَﺔٌ َو َﻣ ِﺮﻳ‬ َ ّ ِ ْ‫أَﻧ‬ ِ ُ‫ﻀﺘ‬ .ُ‫ﻚ َﺷ ِﺮﻳْـَﺮة‬ َ ْ‫َﻣ ِﺮﻳ‬ ِ ِ ُ‫ﺖ ] ِﺣﺜَﺔٌ ﳑَْﺘَ َﺎزةٌ و َْﲝﺜ‬ .‫ﻚ ﳑُْﺘَ ٌﺎز‬ َ ْ‫أَﻧ‬ َ ِ ِ ِ ِ .‫أﺳﺘَﺎذٌ ﳑُْﺘَ ٌﺎز‬ ْ ‫أَﻧْﺖ َ]ﺣﺜَﺔٌ ﻧَﺸْﻴﻄَﺔٌ َو ُﻣ ْﺸ ِﺮﻓُﻚ‬

You are a hardworking student and your teacher is happy with you. You are a worshiper and your act of worship is accepted by Allah (◌ٰ ‫)ﺳﺒﺤﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﻰ‬. You are a scholar woman and your knowledge is not useful for others. You are an active nurse and your patient is naughty. You are an excellent researcher and your thesis is excellent. You are an active researcher and your supervisor is an excellent professor.

11. ‫ﻛ َﻤﺎ‬ ُ (You of two)

ِ َ‫أَﻧْـﺘُﻤﺎ ﻃَﺎﻟِﺒـﺘ‬ ‫ﺎن َو َﺟ ِﺎﻣ َﻌﺘُ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ‬ َ َ ِ .ً‫اﻟﻌﺎﱂ‬ َ ‫َﻣ ْﻌُﺮْوﻓَﺔٌ ِﰱ ُﻛ ِﻞ‬ ِ ِ ِ .‫ى‬ ٌ ‫أَﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ ُﻣ ْﻮﻣﻨَـﺘَﺎن َو ا ْﳝَﺎﻧُ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ ﻗَ ِﻮ‬ ِ .‫ﻒ‬ ٌ ‫ ِن َو ﺑـَْﻴـﺘُ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ ﻧَ ِﻈْﻴ‬6َ ‫أَﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ ا ْﻣَﺮأ‬ ِ ِ ‫أَﻧْـﺘُﻤﺎ‬ ٌ‫ﺻ َﺪاﻗَـﺘُ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ َﻣﻌُُﺮْوﻓَﺔ‬ َ ‫ﺻﺪﻳْـ َﻘﺘَﺎن َو‬ َ َ ِ ِ َ‫ﲔ اﻟﻄﱡﻼ‬ .‫ب‬ ََْ‫ﺟ ًﺪا ﺑ‬

َِ ‫ﺎن و ﻛِﺘَﺎﺑـﺘُ ُﻜﻤﺎ‬ ِ ِ ُ‫ﲨْﻴـﻠَﺔ‬ َ َ َ َ‫أَﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ َﻛﺎﺗﺒَـﺘ‬ .‫ﺑﺴ ُﻬ ْﻮﻟٍَﺔ‬ َ ٌ‫َو َﻣ ْﻘ ُﺮْوَرة‬

Both of you are students and your university is famous worldwide. Both of you are believers and your belief is strong. Both of you are women and your house is clean. Both of you are friends and your friendship is known among the students. Both of you are writers and your handwriting is beautiful and easy to read.

12. ‫( ُﻛ ﱠﻦ‬Your)

ِ ‫أَﻧْ ﱠ‬ .‫ﺎت َو ُﻣ ْﺪ َر َﺳﺘُ ُﻜ ﱠﻦ ﻗَﺮﻳْـﺒَﺔٌ ِﻣﻨﱠﺎ‬ ٌ َ‫ﱳ ﻃَﺎﻟﺒ‬ ُ ِ ‫أَﻧْ ﱠ‬ .‫ﺎت‬ ٌ ‫ﺎت َو ﺑـَﻨَﺎﺗُ ُﻜ ﱠﻦ ُﻣ ِﻄْﻴـ َﻌ‬ ٌ ‫ﱳ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠ َﻤ‬ ُ َِ ‫ﺎت و ﻏُﺮﻓُ ُﻜ ﱠﻦ و ِاﺳﻌﺔٌ و‬ ِ ‫أَﻧْ ُ ﱠ‬ .ٌ‫ﲨْﻴـﻠَﺔ‬ َ َ َ ُ َ ٌ َ‫ﱳ ﻃَﺒْﻴـﺒ‬

ِ ‫ﱳ‬ ‫ف‬ ٌ ‫ﺎت َو ِﺻ ْﺪﻗُ ُﻜ ﱠﻦ َﻣ ْﻌُﺮْو‬ ٌ َ‫ﺻﺎدﻗ‬ َ ‫أَﻧْ ُ ﱠ‬ .‫ِﰱ اﻟْ ُﻤ ْﺠﺘَ َﻤ ِﻊ‬ ‫ ﻃَﺎﻟِﺒَﺎﺗُ ُﻜ ﱠﻦ‬/‫ﺎت َو ﻃُﻼَﺑُ ُﻜ ﱠﻦ‬ ‫أَﻧْ ُ ﱠ‬ ٌ ‫ﱳ ُﻣ َﺪ ِّر َﺳ‬ .‫ات‬ ٌ ‫ َﻣ ْﻮ ُﺟ ْﻮَد‬/‫َﻣ ْﻮ ُﺟ ْﻮ ُد ْو َن‬

All of you are students and your school is near us. All of you are Muslims and your daughters are obedient. All of you are doctors and your rooms are vast and beautiful.

All of you are truthful women and your truthful is known in the society. All of you are teachers and your (male and female) students are present.

47

ِ (Me) 13. ‫ى‬

ِ ِ .ِ‫ﻀ َﺪة‬ َ ‫ﺐ َو ﻛﺘَ ِﺎﰉ َﻋﻠَﻰ اﻟْ ِﻤْﻨ‬ ٌ ‫ ﻃَﺎﻟ‬Vَ ‫أ‬ ِ .‫ﺐ ِﻣ َﻦ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﺴ ِﺠ ِﺪ‬ ٌ ْ‫ َر ُﺟ ٌﻞ َو ﺑْﻴ ِ ْﱴ ﻗَ ِﺮﻳ‬Vَ ‫أ‬ ِ ‫ ﻣ َﺪ ِرﺳﺔٌ و ﺗَﻼَِﻣ َﺬﺗِﻰ ُﻛﻠﱡﻬﻢ ﺣ‬V‫َأ‬ ‫ﺎﺿُﺮْو َن ِﰱ‬ َ ُْ َ َّ ُ ِ ِ.‫ﺎﺿﺮة‬ َ َ ‫ﻏُ ْﺮﻓَﺔ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺤ‬ ‫ ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬ َﺪةُ ِﺟ ًﺪا َو أَ َﺳﺎﺗِ َﺬﺗِ ْﻰ ُﻛﻠﱡ ُﻬ ْﻢ َﳛﺒﱡﻮﻧَِﲎ‬Vَ ‫أ‬ .‫َﻛﺜِ ْ ًﲑا‬ .‫ﻂ ِﻣﺜْﻠِ ْﻰ‬ ٌ ‫ﺻ ِﺪﻳِْﻘﻰ ﻧَ ِﺸْﻴ‬ ٌ ‫ ﻧَ ِﺸْﻴ‬Vَ ‫أ‬ َ ‫ﻂ َو‬

I am a student and my book is on the table. I am a man and my house is near to the mosque. I am a teacher and all my pupils are present in the classroom. I am very hard working and all my teachers like me very much. I am active and my friend is active like me.

14. fَ (Our)

.‫َْﳓ ُﻦ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ ُﻤ ْﻮ َن َو َرﺑـﱡﻨَﺎ ﷲ‬ .‫َْﳓ ُﻦ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ ُﻤ ْﻮ َن َو ﻛﺘَﺎﺑـُﻨَﺎ اَﻟْ ُﻘ ْﺮآ ُن اﻟْ َﻤ ِﺠْﻴ ُﺪ‬ ٌ‫ب َو َﻣ ْﻜﺘَـﺒَـﺘُـﻨَﺎ ﳑَْﻠُ ْﻮءَة‬ ٌ ‫َْﳓ ُﻦ ﻃُﻼﱠ‬ ِ ‫ِ]ﻟْ ُﻜ‬ .‫ﺘﺐ اﻟْ ُﻤﺘَـﻨَـ ِّﻮ َﻋ ِﺔ‬ ِ ‫َْﳓ ُﻦ ُﺟ َﻬﻼءُ َو ِﺟ َﻬﺎﻟﺘُـﻨَﺎ َﺧ ِﻄ ْﲑَةٌ ﻟِﻠﻨ‬ .‫ﱠﺎس‬ .‫َْﳓ ُﻦ ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬ ُﺪ ْو َن َوأَ ْﺳﺎﺗِ َﺬﺗـُﻨَﺎ ُﳛَﺒﱡـ ْﻮﻧـَﻨَﺎ‬

We are Muslims and our God is Allah. We are Muslims and our book is Al-Quran Al-Majid.

We are students and our library is full of different kinds of books. We are ignorant people and our ignorance is dangerous for the people. We are hardworking and our teachers like us.

‫‪48‬‬

‫َٔ ْ َ ُ َ ْ ّ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫‪2.3‬۔ا(اع اﻟﻀﻤﺎﺋ ِِﺮ)‪(2‬‬ ‫)‪The kinds of Pronoun (2‬‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬

‫)‪(2‬‬

‫ﺿﻤﺎﺋِﺮ اﻟ ِْﻤﻠ ِ‬ ‫ْﻜﻴﱠ ِﺔ‬ ‫ََ‬

‫‪The Possessive Pronouns‬‬

‫ﻟَﻪُ‬ ‫َﳍَﺎ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ ‫ﻟَ َ‬ ‫ﻟَ ِ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ ‫ِﱃ‬

‫َﳍَُﻤﺎ‬ ‫َﳍَُﻤﺎ‬

‫ﻟَ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻟَ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻟَﻨَﺎ‬

‫َﳍُْﻢ‬ ‫َﳍُ ﱠﻦ‬

‫ﻟَ ُﻜ ْﻢ‬ ‫ﻟَ ُﻜ ﱠﻦ‬

‫)‪(3‬‬

‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋِﺮ ِْ‬ ‫ﺎرِة‬ ‫َ‬ ‫اﻹ َﺷ َ‬

‫‪The Demonstrative Pronouns‬‬

‫ﻟِْﻠ َﻘ ِﺮﻳْ ِ‬ ‫ﺐ‬

‫‪For Near‬‬

‫ﻟِْﻠﺒَﻌِْﻴ ِﺪ‬

‫‪For Distant‬‬

‫ِ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ ‫ﻚ‪ ،‬أ َْوﻟَﺌِ َ‬ ‫ﻚ‪ ،‬ذَاﻧِ َ‬ ‫َﻫ َﺬا‪َ ،‬ﻫ َﺬ ِان‪َ ،‬ﻫ ُﺆﻻَِء ذَﻟ َ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ ‫ﻚ‪ ،‬أ َْوﻟَﺌِ َ‬ ‫ﻚ‪6َ ،‬ﻧِ َ‬ ‫َﻫ ِﺬﻩ‪َ ،‬ﻫ َﺎ‪ِ 6‬ن‪َ ،‬ﻫ ُﺆﻻَِء ﺗِْﻠ َ‬

‫ﺻ ِﻞ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋِﺮ اﻟ َْﻮ ْ‬

‫)‪(4‬‬

‫ﺿﻤﺎﺋِﺮ ِْ ِ‬ ‫ﺎم‬ ‫اﻹ ْﺳﺘ ْﻔ َﻬ ُ‬ ‫ََ‬

‫‪The Relative Pronouns‬‬

‫‪The Interrogative Pronouns‬‬

‫اَﻟﱠ ِﺬى‪ ،‬اﻟﻠﱠ َﺬ ِان‪ ،‬اَﻟﱠ ِﺬﻳْ َﻦ‬ ‫اَﻟﱠِﱴ‪ ،‬اﻟﻠﱠﺘَﺎن‪ ،‬اَﻟﻼﱠﺗِﻰ‪/‬اَﻟﻼﱠﺋﻰ‬

‫ﻒ‪،‬‬ ‫َﻣ ْﻦ‪َ ،‬ﻣﺎ‪َ ،‬ﻣﺎذَا‪ ،‬أ ﱡ‬ ‫ى‪/‬أَﻳﱠﺔُ‪َ ،‬ﻛ ْﻢ‪َ ،‬ﻛْﻴ َ‬ ‫َﱏ‬ ‫أﻳْ َﻦ‪َ ،‬ﻣ َﱴ‪ ،‬ﻟِ َﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟِ َﻤﺎذَا‪ ،‬أ ﱠ‬

49

Introduction to 3rd part of Unit No.02 The 3rd part of Unit No.02, which you are going to study, contains the following kinds of pronouns: 1. 2. 3. 4.

ِ ‫اﻟْ ِﻤ ْﻠ‬ The Possessive Pronouns (ُ‫ﻜﻴﱠﺔ‬

‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋِﺮ‬ َ ). ِْ ‫ﺿﻤﺎﺋِﺮ‬ The Demonstrative Pronouns (‫ﺎرِة‬ َ ‫اﻹ َﺷ‬ َ َ ). ِ ). Their Relative Pronouns (‫ﺻ ِﻞ‬ َ ْ ‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋﺮ اﻟْ َﻮ‬ ِ ‫ﺿﻤﺎﺋِﺮ ْاﻹ ْﺳﺘِ ْﻔﻬ‬ The Interrogative Pronouns (‫ﺎم‬ َ َ َ ). This unit covers the following aspects of these pronouns. 1.

Rules and conjugations.

2.

Using of pronouns in beneficial sentences.

Objectives of 3rd part of Unit No.02 After studying this Unit No.02, InshaAllah, it will be very easy for you to do the following: 1.

to conjugate these pronouns.

2.

to present examples of these pronouns.

3.

to use them in sentences of daily usage.

50

َّ ْ َ ُ

َْ

َ ‫۔ا‬2.3 (2)‫(اع اﻟﻀ َﻤﺎﺋ ِِﺮ‬ ِ ‫اﻟْﻤﻠ‬ 3. ‫ْﻜﻴﱠ ِﺔ‬ ُ

The Kinds of Pronoun (2)

‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋُِﺮ‬ َ (The Possessive Pronouns)

Use of the Possessive Pronouns in Sentences of Daily Usage

ُ‫َﻫ َﺬا اﻟْ َﻤْﻨ ِﺰُل ﻟَﻪ‬ ‫َﻫ َﺬا اﻟْ َﻤْﻨ ِﺰُل َﳍَُﻤﺎ‬ ‫َﻫ َﺬا اﻟْ َﻤْﻨ ِﺰُل َﳍُْﻢ‬ ‫َﻫ َﺬا اﻟْ َﻤْﻨ ِﺰُل َﳍَﺎ‬ ‫َﻫ َﺬا اﻟْ َﻤْﻨ ِﺰُل َﳍَُﻤﺎ‬ ‫َﻫ َﺬا اﻟْ َﻤْﻨ ِﺰُل َﳍُ ﱠﻦ‬

‫ﻚ‬ َ َ‫َﻫ َﺬا اﻟْ َﻤْﻨ ِﺰُل ﻟ‬ ‫َﻫ َﺬا اﻟْ َﻤْﻨ ِﺰُل ﻟَ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ‬ ‫َﻫ َﺬا اﻟْ َﻤْﻨ ِﺰُل ﻟَ ُﻜ ْﻢ‬ ِ َ‫ﻫ َﺬا اﻟْﻤْﻨ ِﺰُل ﻟ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ َ َ ‫َﻫ َﺬا اﻟْ َﻤْﻨ ِﺰُل ﻟَ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ‬ ‫َﻫ َﺬا اﻟْ َﻤْﻨ ِﺰُل ﻟَ ُﻜ ﱠﻦ‬ ‫َﻫ َﺬا اﻟْ َﻤْﻨ ِﺰُل ِﱃ‬ ‫َﻫ َﺬا اﻟْ َﻤْﻨ ِﺰُل ﻟَﻨَﺎ‬

ِ ‫اﻟ ِْﻤﻠ‬ The Possessive Adjectives (‫ْﻜﻴﱠ ِﺔ‬ ُ‫َﻫ َﺬا َﻣْﻨ ِﺰﻟُﻪ‬ ‫َﻫ َﺬا َﻣْﻨ ِﺰُﳍَُﻤﺎ‬ ‫َﻫ َﺬا َﻣْﻨ ِﺰُﳍُْﻢ‬ ‫َﻫ َﺬا َﻣْﻨ ِﺰُﳍَﺎ‬ ‫َﻫ َﺬا َﻣْﻨ ِﺰُﳍَُﻤﺎ‬

‫َﻫ َﺬا َﻣْﻨ ِﺰُﳍُ ﱠﻦ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ َ ُ‫َﻫ َﺬا َﻣْﻨ ِﺰﻟ‬ ‫َﻫ َﺬا َﻣْﻨ ِﺰﻟُ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ‬

This house is his. This house is theirs. (both of them) This house is theirs. (all of them) This house is hers. This house is theirs. (both of them) This house is theirs. (all of them) This house is yours. This house is yours. (both of you) This house is yours. (all of you) This house is yours. This house is yours. (both of you) This house is yours. This house is mine. This house is ours.

ِ) ‫ﺎت‬ ُ ‫ﺻ َﻔ‬ This/It is his house. This/It is their house. (both of them) This/It is their house. This/It is her house. (both of them) This/It is their house. (both of them) This/It is their house.(all of them-f) This/It is your house. This/It is your house. (both of you)

51

‫َﻫ َﺬا َﻣْﻨ ِﺰﻟُ ُﻜ ْﻢ‬ ِ ُ‫ﻫ َﺬا ﻣْﻨ ِﺰﻟ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ َ َ ‫َﻫ َﺬا َﻣْﻨ ِﺰﻟُ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ‬ ‫َﻫ َﺬا َﻣْﻨ ِﺰﻟُ ُﻜ ﱠﻦ‬ ‫َﻫ َﺬا َﻣْﻨِﺰِﱃ‬

This/It is your house. (all of you) This/It is your house. This/It is your house. (both of you) This/It is your house. (all of you) This/It is my house.

‫َﻫ َﺬا َﻣْﻨ ِﺰﻟُﻨَﺎ‬

This/It is our house.

Note: From the above mentioned fourteen forms of the possessive pronouns and the possessive adjectives, it seems that there is a difference between the both. The students of the Arabic language should know this difference, e.g.

ِ ِ ْ ‫ َذﻫﺒﺖ َإﱃ‬Vَ ‫أ‬ (‫ﺿ ِﻤ ْﲑ اﻟ ِْﻤ ْﻠ ِﻜﻴﱠ ِﺔ‬ ُ ‫ﺻﺪﻳْ ٍﻖ ِﱃ‬ َ ‫)ﻣﺜﺎل‬ ُ َْ َ ‫اﳉَﺎﻣ َﻌﺔ َﻣ ْﻊ‬

ِ ِ ‫ ذَﻫﺒﺖ َإﱃ ا ْﳉ ِﺎﻣﻌ ِﺔ ﻣﻊ‬Vَ ‫أ‬ ِ ‫ﺎل ِﺻﻔ‬ (‫ﱠﺔ اﻟْ ِﻤ ْﻠ ِﻜﻴﱠ ِﺔ‬ ُ َ‫)ﻣﺜ‬ ُ َْ َ ََ َ َ َ ‫ﺻﺪﻳْﻘﻰ‬

I went to the university with a friend of mine (example of possessive pronoun). I went to the university with my friend (example of possessive adjective).

ِ ِ ِ ‫ﺿﻤﺎﺋِﺮ اﻟ ِْﻤﻠ‬ "s‫ْﻜﻴﱠ ِﺔ ﺑِﻠَ ْﻔ ِﻆ "اِ ﱠ‬ ُ ‫( ا ْﺳﺘَﺨ َﺪ‬Usage of Possessive Pronouns with Word “s‫)”ا ﱠ‬ ُ َ َ ‫ام‬

The word \‫ اِ ﱠ‬is prefixed to the attached pronouns. The word “\‫ ”اِ ﱠ‬confines the meaning of “only/ alone”, e.g. ÚÏètGó¡nΣ y‚$−ƒÎ)uρ ߉ç7÷ètΡ x‚$−ƒÎ)

You alone we worship, and you alone we ask for help (1:4).

Conjugation of the Possessive Pronouns with the Word “s‫”اِ ﱠ‬

‫َﲨْ ٌﻊ‬

‫ ُﻣﺜَ ﱠﲎ‬/ٌ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬

‫ اِ ﱠ\ ُﻫ ْﻢ‬-‫ُﻫ َﻢ‬

‫ إِ ﱠ\ ُﳘَﺎ‬-‫ُﳘَﺎ‬

PLURAL

ِ‫و‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ

ِ ‫ﺻﻴَ ٌﻎ‬

(Forms)

DUAL

SINGULAR

They alone (only all of them-m)

They alone (only both of them-m)

He alone

3rd person m.

They alone (only all of them-f)

They alone (only both of them-f)

‫ اِ ﱠ\ َﻫﺎ‬-‫َﻫﺎ‬

She alone

ِ ٌ ‫ﻣﺆﻧﱠ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ َُ ٌ ‫ﺚ َﻏﺎﺋ‬

3rd person f.

You alone (only all of you)

You alone (only both of you)

‫ اِ ﱠ\ َك‬-‫َك‬

You alone

ِ ‫ﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛﺮ ﺣ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ َ ٌ ُ

2nd person m.

You alone (only all of you)

You alone (only both of you)

‫ اِ ﱠ\ ِك‬-‫ِك‬

You alone (f)

ِ ‫ﺚﺣ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ َ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬

2nd person f.

We alone

We alone

‫ اِ ﱠ\ َى‬-‫ى‬ I alone

‫ُﻣﺘَ َﻜﻠِّ ٌﻢ‬

‫ اِ ﱠ\ ُﻫ ﱠﻦ‬-‫ُﻫ ﱠﻦ‬ ‫ اِ ﱠ\ ُﻛ ْﻢ‬-‫ُﻛ ْﻢ‬

‫ اِ ﱠ\ ُﻛ ﱠﻦ‬-‫ُﻛ ْﻢ‬ ‫ اِ ﱠ\ َن‬-Vَ

‫ اِ ﱠ\ ُﳘَﺎ‬-‫ُﳘَﺎ‬

‫ اِ ﱠ\ ُﻛ َﻤﺎ‬-‫ُﻛ َﻤﺎ‬ ‫ اِ ﱠ\ ُﻛ َﻤﺎ‬-‫ُﻛ َﻤﺎ‬ Vَ \‫ اِ ﱠ‬-Vَ

ِ ُ‫ ا ﱠ\ﻩ‬-‫ُه‬

ِ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﻏﺎﺋ‬

1st person m. & f.

52

ِْ ‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋُِﺮ‬ 4. ِ‫ﺎرة‬ َ (The Demonstrative Pronoun) َ ‫اﻹ َﺷ‬ ‫اﻟْ َﻤ ْﺤ ُﺴ ْﻮ َﺳ ِﺔ َو‬

ِْ ‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋُِﺮ‬ ‫اﻹ َﺷ َﺎرِة‬ ُ ْ‫ﺗَـ ْﻌ ِﺮﻳ‬ َ ‫ﻒ‬

ِ V‫ أو ا ْﳊﻴـﻮ َا‬،‫ﱠﺎس‬ ِ ِ َ ‫اﻹﺷﺎرةِ ِﻫﻰ اﻟﱠِﱴ ﺗُﺴﺘَ ْﺨ َﺪ ُم‬ ‫ أ َْو ْاﻷ ْﺷﻴَ ِﺎء اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮﻟَِﺔ‬،‫ت‬ َ ْ ْ َ َ َ ‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋﺮ‬ َ ََ ْ ِ ‫ﻟﻺﺷ َﺎرة إ َﱃ اﻟﻨ‬ ٍ ‫ إﺿﺎﻓَﺔً إِ َﱃ اﻷ ْﺷﻴ ِﺎء ِﻣﺜْﻞ ر‬،‫اﻟْﻤ ْﻠﻤﻮﺳ ِﺔ‬ .‫ َو ﻓِ ْﻜ ٍﺮ َو َﻣﺎ إِ َﱃ ٰذﻟِﻚ‬،‫ َو ِﻋ ْﻠ ٍﻢ‬،‫أىء‬ َ َ ُْ َ َُ َ

The Definition of Demonstrative Pronouns

Demonstrative pronouns are those which are used to point or to indicate people, animals, objects or things, that could be felt or touched, and could also indicate things that have

ِ meanings such as ٌ‫( َراىء‬opinion), ‫( ِﻋ ْﻠ ٌﻢ‬knowledge) or ‫ْﺮ‬ ٌ‫( ﻓﻜ‬thought), etc. Conjugation of the Demonstrative Pronouns

‫َﲨْ ٌﻊ‬

‫ ُﻣﺜَ ﱠﲎ‬/ٌ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬

‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَ ِء‬

‫َﻫ َﺬ ِان‬

PLURAL

DUAL

ِ‫اِﺳﻢ اﻹ َﺷﺎرة‬ َ ُْ

ِ‫و‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ

(The Noun of Indication)

‫َﻫ َﺬا‬

ِ ْ‫ﻟِْﻠﻤ َﺬ ﱠﻛ ِﺮ اﻟ َﻘ ِﺮﻳ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ُ

‫َﻫ ِﺬ ِﻩ‬

ِ ‫ﻟِﻠﻤﺆﻧ‬ ِ ْ‫ﱠﺚ اﻟْ َﻘ ِﺮﻳ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ُ

ِ ‫ﻚ‬ َ ‫ذَﻟ‬

‫ﻟِْﻠ ُﻤ َﺬ ﱠﻛ ِﺮ اﻟْﺒَﻌِْﻴ ِﺪ‬

SINGULAR

These

These (two)

This

These

These (two)

This

Those

Those (two)

That

For distant m.

Those

Those (two)

That

For distant f.

‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَ ِء‬

‫ ِن‬6‫ﺎ‬ َ ‫َﻫ‬

‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوﻟﺌ‬

‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫ذَاﻧ‬

‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوﻟَﺌ‬

‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫ﻧ‬6َ

‫ﻚ‬ َ ‫ﺗِْﻠ‬

For near m. For near f.

ِ ‫ﻟِْﻠﻤﺆﻧ‬ ‫ﱠﺚ اﻟْﺒَﻌِْﻴ ِﺪ‬ َُ

Use of the Nouns of Indication in Sentences of Daily Usage

1. ‫( َﻫ َﺬا‬This)

.‫َﻫ َﺬا َر ُﺟ ٌﻞ‬

.‫ب‬ ٌ ]َ ‫َﻫ َﺬا‬ .‫َﻫ َﺬا ِﻋ ْﻠ ٌﻢ ُﻣ ِﻔْﻴ ٌﺪ‬ ِ .‫ﺎب َﺟ ِﺪﻳْ ٌﺪ‬ ٌ َ‫َﻫ َﺬا ﻛﺘ‬ .‫ﻓِ ٌﻊ‬Vَ ٌ‫َﻫ َﺬا َﺷﻰء‬

This is a man. This is a door. It is a useful knowledge. This is a new book. This is a beneficial thing.

ِ ‫( َﻫ َﺬ‬These both) 2. ‫ان‬

ِ ‫ﻫ َﺬ ِان ﻃَﺎﻟِﺒ‬ .‫ﺎن ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬ َﺪ ِان‬ َ َ ِ ِ ‫ﻫ َﺬ ِان َﲨﻼَ ِن رﺧﻴﺼ‬ .‫ﺎن‬ َ َْ َ ِ ِ ِ .‫َﻫ َﺬان ر َأ\ن َﻣ ْﻘﺒُـ ْﻮﻻَن‬

These two students are hard working. These two camels are cheap. These two opinions are acceptable.

53

ِ ‫ﻫ َﺬ ِان ﺟﺒﻼَن ﻋﺎﻟِﻴ‬ .‫ﺎن‬ َ َ َ ََ ِ َ‫ﻫ َﺬ ِان ﻣ َﻔ ِّﻜﺮ ِان ﻣﻌﺮوﻓ‬ .‫ﺎن ِﰱ اﻟْ َﻌﺎ َِﱂ‬ ُْ ْ َ َ ُ َ

These two mountains are high. These two thinkers are famous worldwide.

3. ‫( َﻫ ُﺆﻻَ ِء‬These all)

ِ .‫ب ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬ ُﺪ ْو َن‬ ٌ ‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَء ﻃُﻼﱠ‬ .‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَِء ﻋُﻠَ َﻤﺎءٌ َﻣ ْﻌُﺮْوﻓُـ ْﻮ َن‬ .‫ُﻫ ُﺆﻻَِءأَﻓْ َﻜ ٌﺎر َﻣ ْﺮُد ْو ُد ْو َن‬ ِ ِ ‫اﻷﺻ ِﺪﻗِﺎءُ؟‬ ْ ‫ﻣ ْﻦ أﻳْ َﻦ ُﻫ ُﺆﻻَء‬ ‫َﻣ ْﻦ َﻫ ُﺆﻻَِء ْاﻷ َوﻻَ ُد؟‬ .‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَِء اَْﻷ ِﻃﺒﱠﺎءُ ﳑُْﺘَ ُﺎزْو َن‬

These are hard working students.

.ٌ‫َﻫ ِﺬ ِﻩ ﻟُﻐَﺔٌ َﺳ ْﻬﻠَﺔ‬ .ٌ‫َﻫ ِﺬ ِﻩ َﺳﻴﱠ َﺎرة َﺟ ِﺪﻳْ َﺪة‬ .ٌ‫َﻫ ِﺬ ِﻩ ﻃَﺎﻟِﺒَﺔٌ َﺷ ِﺮﻳْـَﺮة‬ .ٌ‫َﻫ ِﺬ ِﻩ اﻟﻨﱠﺎﻓِ َﺬةٌ َﻣ ْﻔﺘُـ ْﻮ َﺣﺔ‬ َِ ُ‫ﻫ ِﺬ ِﻩ اﻟْﺒـ َﻘﺮة‬ .ٌ‫ﻓِ َﻌﺔ‬Vَ ٌ‫ﲨْﻴـﻠَﺔ‬ ََ َ

This is an easy language.

ِ َ‫ ِن ﺻ ِﺪﻳـ َﻘﺘ‬6‫ﺎ‬ .‫ﺎن‬ ْ َ َ ‫َﻫ‬ ِ َ‫ﺎن و ِاﺳﻌﺘ‬ ِ ِ .‫ﺎن‬ َ َ َ‫ن ﻏُ ْﺮﻓَـﺘ‬6َ ‫َﻫﺎ‬ ِ َ‫ﺎن َﺷ ِﻘﻴـ َﻘﺘ‬ ِ َ‫ ِن اُ ْﺧﺘ‬6َ ‫ﻫﺎ‬ .‫ﺎن‬ َ ْ ِ ِ .‫ن ﻃَ ِﻮﻳْـﻠَﺘَﺎن‬6َ‫ َن َﺷ َﺠَﺮ‬6َ ‫َﻫﺎ‬ ِ َ‫ ِن ﻣﺴﻠِﻤﺘ‬6‫ ِن اِﻣﺮ َأ‬6‫ﺎ‬ .‫ﺎن‬ َ ْ ُ َ ْ َ ‫َﻫ‬

These two (people) are friends.

These are famous scholars. These are rejected thoughts. From where are these friends? Who are these boys? These doctors are excellent.

4. ‫( ُﻫ ِﺬ ِﻩ‬This)

This car is new. This is a naughty student. This window is opened. This cow is beautiful and beneficial.

5. ‫ ِن‬w‫ﺎ‬ َ ‫( َﻫ‬These two)

These two rooms are beautiful. These two (people) are real sisters. These two trees are tall. These two women are Muslims.

6. ‫( َﻫ ُﺆﻻَ ِء‬These all)

ِ ِ .‫ﺎت‬ ٌ َ‫ﺎت ﻃَﺎﻟﺒ‬ ُ َ‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَء اﻟْ َﻔﺘَـﻴ‬ ِ َِ ‫ﺎت‬ .‫ت‬ ٌ َ‫ﲨْﻴﻼ‬ ٌ َ‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَء ﺑـَﻨ‬ ِ ِ .‫ات‬ ٌ ‫ﺎت َﻣﺎﻫَﺮ‬ ٌ ‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَء ُﻣ َﺪ ِّر َﺳ‬ ِ ِ ‫ﺎت؟‬ ٌ ‫ﺎت ُﻣ ْﺴﻠ َﻤ‬ َ ‫َأﻫ ُﺆﻻَء اﻟْ ُﻤ َﻤِّﺮ‬ ُ ‫ﺿ‬

These girls are students. These are beautiful daughters. These are expert teachers. Are these nurses Muslims?

54

ِ .‫اﺟ ُﻬ ﱠﻦ ُﻣ َﺪ ِّر ُﺳ ْﻮ َن‬ ٌ َ‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَء ﻃَﺒِْﻴـﺒ‬ ُ ‫ﺎت أَْزَو‬ ِ .‫ﺎت ِﻷ ْزَو ِاﺟ ِﻬ ﱠﻦ‬ ٌ ‫ﺎت ُﻣ ِﻄْﻴـ َﻌ‬ ٌ ‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَء َزْو َﺟ‬

These are doctors. Their husbands are teachers. These are obedient wives to their husbands.

7. ‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫( َذﻟ‬That)

ِ ِ .‫ﺐ‬ َ ‫ذَﻟ‬ ٌ ‫ﻚ ﻃَﺎﻟ‬ ِ .‫ﺻ ِﺪﻳِْﻘﻰ‬ َ ‫ذَﻟ‬ َ ‫ﻚ‬ ِ .‫أﺧﻰ‬ َ ‫ذَﻟ‬ ُ ‫ﻚ ﺑـَْﻴ‬ َ ‫ﺖ‬ ِ َ ِ‫ذَﻟ‬ .‫ﺐ ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ ٌﻢ‬ ُ ‫ﻚ اﻟﻄﱠﺒْﻴ‬ ِ ِ ِ ِ .‫ﺼَﺮ‬ َ ‫ذَﻟ‬ ْ ‫ﻚ اﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟ ُﻞ َﻋﺎﱂُ َﻛﺒِ ْﲑٌ ﻣ ْﻦ ﻣ‬

That is a student. That is my friend. That is my brother’s house. That doctor is Muslim/That is a Muslim doctor. That man is a great scholar from Egypt.

8. ‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫( َذاﻧ‬Those two)

ِ ِ ‫ﻚ ﻣﺴﻠِﻤ‬ .‫ﺎن‬ َ ْ ُ َ ‫ذَاﻧ‬ .‫ﻚ اَﻟْ َﻮﻟَ َﺪ ِان ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬ َﺪ ِان‬ َ ِ‫ذَاﻧ‬ .‫ﻚ ﻛِﺘَ َﺎ] ِن ُﻣ ِﻔْﻴ َﺪ ِان‬ َ ِ‫ذَاﻧ‬ ِ ِ ‫ﻓِﻌ‬Vَ ‫ﺎن‬ ِ ‫ﻚ اﳌ َﺪ ِرﺳ‬ .‫ﺎن َﺟ ًﺪا‬ َ َ ّ ُ َ ‫ذَاﻧ‬ ِ ‫ﺎن ﻣ‬ ِ .‫ﺎﻫ َﺮا َن‬ َ ِ‫ذَاﻧ‬ َ َ‫ﻚ اﻟﻄﱠﺒِْﻴـﺒ‬

Those two are Muslims.

.‫ﺎل ُﻣ َﺪ ِّر ُﺳ ْﻮ َن‬ ُ ‫ﻚ اﻟِّﺮ َﺟ‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوﻟَﺌ‬ ‫ﻚ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺪ ِّر ُﺳ ْﻮ َن؟‬ َ ِ‫ِﻣ ْﻦ أﻳْ َﻦ أ ُْوﻟَﺌ‬ .‫ﻚ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺪ ِّر ُﺳ ْﻮ َن ِﻣ ْﻦ َ]ﻛِ ْﺴﺘَﺎ َن‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوﻟَﺌ‬ ِ ِ ‫ﻫﺆﻻَ ِء اﻟﻄﱡﻼﱠ‬ ِ ِ‫ﲔ و أُوﻟَﺌ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ َُ ّ ‫ب ﻣﻦ‬ ُ ْ َ ِ ْ ‫اﻟﺼ‬ .ِ‫اﳊُﱠﺮة‬ ْ ‫ِﻣ ْﻦ َﻛ ْﺸ ِﻤ ْ َﲑ‬ .‫ﱡﺠ ُﺎر ِﻣ ْﻦ َﻛ ْﺸ ِﻤ ْ َﲑ اﻟْ ُﻤ ْﺤﺘَـﻠﱠ ِﺔ‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوﻟَﺌ‬ َ ‫ﻚ اﻟﺘ‬

Those men are teachers.

Those two boys are hard working. Those two books are useful. Those two teachers are very beneficial. Those two doctors are expert.

9. ‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫( أ ُْوﻟَﺌ‬Those all)

From where are those teachers? Those teachers are from Pakistan. These students are from China and those are from Azad Kashmeer. Those traders are from the occupied Kashmeer.

55

10. ‫ْﻚ‬ َ ‫( ﺗِﻠ‬That)15

.ٌ‫ﻚ َﺷ َﺠَﺮٌة ﻃَ ِﻮﻳْـﻠَﺔ‬ َ ‫ﺗِْﻠ‬ .ٌ‫ﻚ َﺳﻴﱠ َﺎرةٌ ﻗَ ِﺪ ْﳝَﺔ‬ َ ‫ﺗِْﻠ‬ .ٌ‫ﻚ اﻟﻄﱠﺎﻟِﺒَﺔُ ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬ َﺪة‬ َ ‫ﺗِْﻠ‬ .ٌ‫ﻚ ُﻣ َﺪ ِّر َﺳﺔٌ ﻧَ ِﺸْﻴﻄَﺔ‬ َ ‫ﺗِْﻠ‬ .ٌ‫ﻚ اِ ْﻣﺮأَة َﻋﺎﻟِ َﻤﺔ‬ َ ‫ﺗِْﻠ‬

That is a tall tree. That is an old car. That student is hard working. That is an active teacher. That is a scholarly lady.

11. ‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫ﻧ‬wَ (Those)

ِ ِ َ‫ﺎن ﻧَ ِﺸﻴﻄَﺘ‬ ِ َ‫ﻚ ﻃَﺎﻟِﺒـﺘ‬ .‫ﺎن‬ ْ َ َ ‫ﻧ‬6َ ِ َ‫ﻓِﻌﺘ‬Vَ ‫ ِن‬6‫ﺮ‬ .‫ﺎن ِﺟ ًﺪا‬ َ ِ‫ﻧ‬6َ َ َ ‫ﻚ ﺑـَ َﻘ‬ ِ َ‫ﺎن ﻣﺴﻠِﻤﺘ‬ ِ ِ َ ِ‫ﻧ‬6َ .‫ﺎن‬ ُ ْ ُ َ‫ﻚ اﻟﻄﱠﺒْﻴـﺒَـﺘ‬ ِ ِ ‫ﻚ اﻟْﻤﺤ‬ .‫ ِن ِﻣﻦ ا ْﳍِْﻨ ِﺪ‬6َ‫ﺎﺿَﺮ‬ َ ُ َ ‫ﻧ‬6َ ِِ .‫اﻟﻴﺎ] ِن‬ َ ِ‫ﻧ‬6َ َ ‫ن ﻣ ْﻦ‬6َ‫ﻚ اﻟْ ﱠﺴﻴَ َﺎر‬

Those two are active students.

ِ .‫ﺎت ِﻣﻦ إِ ِْﳒ ْﻠ ََﱰا‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوﻟَﺌ‬ ُ َ‫ﻚ اﻟﻄﱠﺎﻟﺒ‬ ِ ‫ات؟‬ َ ِ‫ِﻣ ْﻦ أَﻳْ َﻦ أ ُْوﻟَﺌ‬ ُ ‫ﻚ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺤﺎﺿَﺮ‬ ِ َ ِ‫أُوﻟَﺌ‬ .‫ﺎت‬ ٌ ‫ﻚ اﻟﻨّ ْﺴ َﻮةُ ُﻣ َﺪ ِّر َﺳ‬ ْ

Those students are from England.

Those two cows are very beneficial. Those two doctors are Muslims. Those two lecturers are from India. Those two cars are from Japan.

12. ‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫( أ ُْوﻟَﺌ‬Those)

ِ ِ ‫ﻫﺆﻻَ ِء اﻟْ َﻔﺘَـﻴ‬ .‫ﻚ ِﻣ ْﻦ ﻓَـَﺮﻧْ َﺴﺎ‬ َ ِ‫ﺼ َﺮ َو أ ُْوﻟَﺌ‬ َُ ُ َ ْ ‫ﺎت ﻣ ْﻦ ﻣ‬ Note:

15

From where are those (female) lecturers? Those women are teachers. Those girls are from Egypt and those are from France.

Those students are very hard working. ِ ِ َ ِ‫أُوﻟَﺌ‬ .‫ات ِﺟ ًﺪا‬ ٌ ‫ﻚ اﻟﻄﱠﺎﻟﺒَﺎت ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬ َﺪ‬ ْ ِْ ‫( أَ ْﲰَﺎء‬nouns of indication) are ٌ‫َﻣ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَﺔ‬ All the ِ‫ﺎرة‬ َ ‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋُِﺮ‬ َ (demonstrative pronouns)/ ِ‫اﻹ َﺷ َﺎرة‬ َ ‫اﻹﺷ‬ ُ (definite). These can be used to indicate or point to those possessing intellect (‫) َﻋﺎﻗِﻞ‬, and ٌ ِ to things that do not possess intellect (‫) َﻏ ْﲑ َﻋﺎﻗ ٍﻞ‬. ُ

It is a noun of indication which is used to indicate/point to object (‫ ) َﻣ ْﻔﻌُﻮل‬or people that are distant/far and

feminine. ‫ﻚ‬ َ ‫ ﺗِْﻠ‬can be broken into three parts:

iii.

ٍ َ‫ف ِﺧﻄ‬ ‫ﺎب‬ ُ ‫ َﺣْﺮ‬-‫(ك‬Particle of address) .

ِ .(Noun of indication) ِ‫ﺎرة‬ َ ‫ ا ْﺳ ُﻢ‬-‫ﺗِﻰ‬ َ ‫اﻹﺷ‬

.(The Laam is for the far/ distant) ‫ اﻟﻼم ﻟِْﻠﺒُـ ْﻌ ِﺪ‬-‫ِل‬

.i .ii

56

ِ ‫ﻚ‬ َ ‫ ذَﻟ‬is a noun of indication. It is used to indicate/point to objects or people that are distant ِ or far. ‫ﻚ‬ َ ‫ ذَﻟ‬can be broken down in to three parts: Noun of indication The Laam is for the far/distant Particle of address

ِ ِ‫اﻹ َﺷﺎرة‬ َ ِْ ‫ا ْﺳ ُﻢ‬ ‫اَﻟﻼﱠ ُم ﻟِْﻠﺒُـ ْﻌ ِﺪ‬ ٍ َ‫ف َﺧﻄ‬ ‫ﺎب‬ ُ ‫َﺣ ْﺮ‬

‫ذَا‬ ‫ل‬ ‫َك‬

Some of the grammarians say that the “‫ ” َك‬particle of address also indicates far/distant, and the “‫ ”ل‬shows even further distant. The letter/particle of address “‫ ” َك‬is used if the person or object, we are addressing, is masculine.

ِ ِ ‫ﻚ‬ َ ‫ ذَﻟ‬is pronounced as ‫ﻚ‬ َ ‫ ذَاﻟ‬but it is written without the alif (‫)ا‬. ِْ ‫ أَ ْﲰَﺎء‬have three levels (‫ث َﻣﺮاﺗِﺐ‬ Some of the grammarians say that the ِ‫ﺎرة‬ َ ‫اﻹ َﺷ‬ ُ َ َ ُ َ‫)ﺛَﻼ‬: ِ ْ‫)ﻟِْﻠ َﻘ ِﺮﻳ‬: ‫َﻫ َﺬا‬ For near (‫ﺐ‬ ِ For far/distant (‫)ﻟِْﻠﺒَﻌِْﻴ ِﺪ‬: ‫ﻚ‬ َ ‫ذَﻟ‬ ِ ‫)ﻟِْﻠﻮﺳ‬: ‫ذَ َاك‬ For the middle between near and far (‫ﻂ‬ ََ ِ ٍ ‫اﻹﺷ َﺎرِة ﺗُ ِﺸ ْﲑُ إﱃ إِ ْﺳ ٍﻢ أ َْو َﺷ ْﺨ‬ .ُ‫ﺺ َﺳﺒَ َﻖ ذ ْﻛُﺮﻩ‬ ْ ‫َو‬ َ ‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋَِﺮ‬ َ ‫ﺻﺔُ أ ﱠن‬ َ َ‫اﳋُﻼ‬ َ ِ ِ ْ‫( ﻟِْﻠﻤ ْﻔﺮِد اﻟْ َﻘ ِﺮﻳ‬This) ‫ﻫ َﺬا‬ .(‫ﺎب‬ .1 َ This is a book .‫ﺐ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺬ ﱠﻛ ِﺮ‬ ٌ َ‫)ﻫ َﺬا ﻛﺘ‬ َُ ِ ِ This is a sister .‫ﱠﺚ‬ ِِ ِ ِِ ِ ‫ﺐ اﻟْﻤﺆﻧ‬ .(‫ﺖ‬ .2 ٌ ‫ُﺧ‬ ْ ‫)ﻫﺬﻩ أ‬ َ ُ ِ ْ‫( ﻟ ْﻠ ُﻤﻔ َﺮد اﻟْ َﻘ ِﺮﻳ‬This) ‫َﻫﺬﻩ‬ َ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ‫ﻚ أ‬ .(‫َﺧ ْﻰ‬ .3 َ ‫ )ذَﻟ‬That is my brother .‫( ﻟ ْﻠ ُﻤ ْﻔَﺮد اﻟﺒَﻌِْﻴﺪ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺬ ﱠﻛ ِﺮ‬That) ‫ﻚ‬ َ ‫ذَﻟ‬ ِ ‫( ﻟِْﻠﻤ ْﻔﺮد اﻟﺒﻌِﻴ ِﺪ اﳌﺆﻧ‬That) ‫ﻚ‬ .(‫َﺧ ِﱴ‬ .4 َ ‫ )ﺗِْﻠ‬That is my sister .‫ﱠﺚ‬ َ ‫ﺗِْﻠ‬ ْ‫ﻚأ‬ َْ َُ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ْ‫ﻠﺠ ْﻤ ِﻊ اﻟْ َﻘ ِﺮﻳ‬ .(‫ب‬ .5 ٌ ‫ ) َﻫ َﺆﻻَء ﻃُﱠﻼ‬These are students .‫ﺐ اﳌﺬ ﱠﻛﺮو اﳌُﺆﻧﱠﺚ‬ َ ‫( ﻟ‬These) ‫َﻫﺆﻻَء‬ ِ ‫( ﻟِْﻠﺠﻤ ِﻊ اﻟْﺒﻌِﻴ ِﺪ اﻟْﻤ َﺬ ﱠﻛ ِﺮ و اﻟْﻤﺆﻧ‬Those) ‫ﻚ‬ .(‫ﺻ ِﺪﻗَﺎﺋِﻰ‬ .6 َ ِ‫( )أُْوﻟَﺌ‬Those are my friends).‫ﱠﺚ‬ َ ِ‫اُْوﻟَﺌ‬ ْ َ‫ﻚ أ‬ ُ َ ُ ْ َ َْ

1. 2. 3.

5.

‫ﺻ ِﻞ‬ َ (The Relative Pronouns) ْ ‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋُِﺮ اﻟ َْﻮ‬

ِ ‫ﺨﺪم ﺿﻤﺎﺋِﺮ اﻟْﻮ‬ ِ ‫ اَﻟﱠﺮﺟﻞ اﻟﱠ ِﺬى ﺿﺮب‬:‫ ِﻣﺜﻞ‬،‫ﺾ‬ ٍ ‫ﻀ َﻬﺎ ﺑِﺒَـ ْﻌ‬ .‫أﺧﻰ‬ ُ ‫ﺻ ِﻞ ﻟَﺮﺑﻂ ا ْﳉُ ُﻤ ِﻞ ﺑـَ ْﻌ‬ ْ َ ُ َ َ ُ َ َ‫ﺗُ ْﺴﺘ‬ َ ََ ُُ

The relative pronouns are used to join sentences together16, e.g., the man who beated my brother. 16

The relative pronouns is a kind of definite ٌ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَﺔ‬noun because a clause (‫ )ﺟﺰء‬coming after it completes its proper

sense. This clause is called the syndetic (sin-det-ik connected by a conjunction) relative clause (‫)اﺿﺎﰱ‬.

57 Conjugation of the Relative Pronouns

‫َﲨْ ٌﻊ‬

ٌ‫ﺼﺒِﻴَﺔٌ َو َﺟ ِﺮﻳَﺔ‬ ْ َ‫َﺣﺎﻟَﺔٌ ﻧ‬

‫ ُﻣﺜَ ﱠﲎ‬/ٌ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬

‫اَﻟﱠ ِﺬﻳْ َﻦ‬

‫اَﻟﻠﱠ َﺬﻳْ َﻦ‬

‫اَﻟﻠﱠ َﺬ ِان‬

PLURAL

DUAL

Accus & Gen

Those

‫ اَﻟْﻼﱠﺋﻰ‬/‫اَﻟْﻼﱠﺗﻰ‬ Those

Who/Whom

ِ َ‫اَﻟﻠﱠﺘ‬ ‫ﲔ‬

Who/Whom

ِ‫و‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ

(Forms)

‫اَﻟﱠ ِﺬ ْى‬

‫ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛ ٌﺮ‬

‫اَﻟﱠِﱴ‬

‫ﺚ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬

SINGULAR

Who/Whom

ِ َ‫اَﻟﻠﱠﺘ‬ ‫ﺎن‬

Who/Whom

Who/Whom Who/Whom

ِ ‫ﺻﻴَ ٌﻎ‬

Note: All the above relative pronouns are indeclinable (‫ ) َﻣﺒﲎ‬except their dual forms.

ٌ

Use of Relative Pronouns in Sentences Daily Usage

ِ i. ‫ى‬ ْ ‫( اَﻟﱠﺬ‬Who, Whom)

ِ‫ﱠ‬ .‫ﺻ ِﺪﻳْ ِﻘﻰ‬ َ ‫ﺐ‬ َ ‫اَﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟ ُﻞ اﻟﺬ ْى ذَ َﻫ‬ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ْ ‫اﻟﺼ‬ .‫ﲔ‬ ّ ‫اَﻟْﻄَﺒِْﻴﺐ اَﻟﱠﺬى َﺧ َﺮ َج ﻣﻦ اﻟْ ُﻤ ْﺴﺘَ ْﺸ ٰﻔﻰ ُﻫ ْﻮ ﻣ َﻦ‬ ِ ‫اَﻟﻼﱠ ِﻋ‬ .‫ب ﺑَﻄْ ٌﻞ‬ ُ ‫ﺐ اﻟﱠﺬى َ\ ُﻛ ُﻞ َو ﻳَ ْﺸ َﺮ‬ ُ ِ ‫اَْﻷُﺳﺘﺎذُ اﻟﱠ ِﺬى ﻳـ ْﻠ ِﻘ ِﻰ اﻟْﻤﺤﺎﺿﺮةَ أُﺳﺘ‬ .‫ﺎذ ْى‬ َ ْ ََ َ ُ َْ ُ ِ ِ‫اﻟﻄﱠﺎﻟ‬ ٍ ‫ﺎن ﺑِ َﺪرﺟ‬ ِ ‫اﻹﻣﺘِﺤ‬ .‫ﺎت َﻋﺎﻟِﻴَ ٍﺔ اِﺑِْﲎ‬ ََ َ ْ ِْ ‫ﺐ اﻟﱠﺬى َﳒَ َﺢ ِﰱ‬ ُ ِ ِ .‫َﺧ ََﱪِﱏ‬ َ ‫ذَﻟ‬ ْ ‫ﻚ اﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟ ُﻞ اﻟﱠﺬى أ‬ ِ .ُ‫ َﻛﻠﱠ ْﻤﺘُﻪ‬Vَ َ‫ﻚ اﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟ ُﻞ اﻟﱠ ِﺬى أ‬ َ ‫ذَﻟ‬

The man who left is my friend. The doctor, who went out from the hospital, is from China. The player, who is eating and drinking, is a hero. The teacher, who is delivering the lecture, is my teacher. The student, who passed the examination with the highest mark, is my son. He is the man who told me. He is the man whom I spoke to.

ِ ‫ اَﻟﱠ َﺬ‬Who (two) ii. ‫ان‬

ِ ‫ﺎن اﻟﻠﱠ َﺬ ِان ذَﻫﺒﺎ ُﳘﺎ ﺻ ِﺪﻳـ َﻘ‬ ِ ‫اَﻟﻄﱠﺎﻟِﺒ‬ .‫ﺎن‬ ْ َ َ ََ َ ِ ِ ِ .‫اَﻟﻄﱠﺒِْﻴـﺒَﺎن اﻟﻠﱠ َﺬ ِان ﻳـَ ْﻌ َﻤﻼَ ِن ُﻫﻨَﺎ َﺟﺎءَا ﻣ ْﻦ اﳒ ْﻠ ََﱰا‬ ِ ‫ﺎن اَﻟﻠﱠ َﺬ ِان ﻳ َﺪ ِرﺳ‬ ِ ‫اَﻟْﻤ َﺪ ِرﺳ‬ ‫ﺎن ِﰱ َﻫ ِﺬ ِﻩ‬ َّ ُ َّ ُ ِ ِ .‫ﺻ ِﺪﻗَﺎﺋِﻰ‬ ْ َ‫اﻟْ َﻤ ْﺪ َر َﺳﺔ ُﳘَﺎ ﻣﻦ ا‬ ِ ‫ﺎن َﻛﺮةَ اﻟْ َﻘ َﺪِم ﻣﺴﻠِﻤ‬ ِ ‫اَﻟْﻮﻟَ َﺪ ِان اﻟﻠﱠ َﺬ ِان ﻳـ ْﻠﻌﺒ‬ .‫ﺎن‬ ََ َ َ ُْ َ ِ ِ َ‫ﺎن اﻟﻠﱠ َﺬ ِان ﻳﺴ ُﻜﻨ‬ ِ ‫ﻬﻨﺪﺳ‬ ‫ﺎن ِﰱ َﻫ ِﺬ ِﻩ‬ َ ّ ُ‫اَﳌ‬ َْ ِ ْ ‫اﻟ ﱡﺸ َﻘ ِﺔ اﻟْﻤ ْﻔﺮْو َﺷ ِﺔ َﻏ ْﲑ ُﻣﺘَـَﺰﱠو َﺟ‬ .‫ﲔ‬ ُ َُ

The two students who left are friends. Both the doctors who are working here came from England. Both the teachers, who teach in this school, are my friends. Both the boys, who play football, are Muslims. Both the engineers, who live in this furnished flat, are single.

58

ِ‫ﱠ‬ iii. ‫ﻦ‬ َ ْ‫( اَﻟﺬﻳ‬Who)

ِ ِ ِِ ‫ُﺻ ْﻮِل‬ ُ ‫َﻫ َﺆﻻَء اَﻟْ ُﻤ َﺪ ِّر ُﺳ ْﻮ َن اﻟﱠﺬﻳْ َﻦ ﻳُ َﺪ ِّر ُﺳ ْﻮ َن ِﰱ ُﻛﻠّﻴَﺔ أ‬ ِّ ِ ِ ِ .‫َزﻫ ِﺮ‬ َ ‫اﻟﺪﻳْ َﻦ ُﻛﻠﱡ ُﻬ ْﻢ ﻣﻦ َﺟﺎﻣ َﻌﺔ ْاﻷ‬ ‫ﱠﺎس اﻟﱠ ِﺬﻳْ َﻦ ﻳَ ْﺬ َﻫﺒُـ ْﻮ َن ِﻣ ْﻦ ُﻫﻨَﺎ َإﱃ اﻟْﻌَِﺮ ِاق‬ ُ ‫اَﻟﻨ‬ .‫ﻟِْﻠ ِﺠ َﻬﺎد ُﻛﻠُ ُﻬ ْﻢ ِﻣ ْﻦ اَﻓْـ َﻌﺎﻧِ ْﺴﺘَﺎ َن‬

.‫ب اﻟﱠ ِﺬﻳْ َﻦ اِﻟْﺘَ َﺤ ُﻘ ْﻮا ]ﳉَ ِﺎﻣ َﻌ ِﺔ ُﻛﻠﱡ ُﻬ ْﻢ ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬ ُﺪ ْو َن ِﺟ ًﺪا‬ ُ َ‫اﻟﻄﱡﻼ‬

ِ ‫اَﻟْﻤ ِﺪﻳـﺮو َن اﻟﱠ ِﺬﻳﻦ ِﰱ اﻟْ ُﻜﻠِّﻴ‬ .‫اﳊُ ُﻜ ْﻮِﻣﻴَ ِﺔ ُﻛﻠﱡ ُﻬ ْﻢ َﺟﻴِّ ُﺪ ْو َن‬ ْ ‫ﺎت‬ َ َ ْ ُْ ْ ُ

.‫ﺗـُ ْﻮ َن ﻳَ ْﺬ َﻫﺒُـ ْﻮ َن َواﻟﱠ ِﺬﻳْ َﻦ ﻳَ ْﺬ َﻫﺒُـ ْﻮ َن ﻻَﻳـَ ُﻌ ْﻮ ُد ْو َن‬Ùَ ‫اَﻟﱠ ِﺬﻳْ َﻦ‬

The teachers, who teach in the Faculty of Usul-ud-din are all from Al-Azhar University. The people, who are going from here to Iraq for jihad (the holy war) are all from Afghanistan. The students, who took admission in the university are all very hardworking. The principles who are in the government college are all good. Those who come, go, and those who go, do not return.

iv. ‫( اَﻟﱠِﱴ‬who)

ِ ٍ ‫ﺎن ﺑِ َﺪرﺟ‬ ِ ِ ِْ ‫ﺖ ِﰱ‬ ‫ﺎت َﻋﺎﻟِﻴﱠ ٍﺔ ِﻫ َﻰ‬ ْ ‫اَﻟﻄﱠﺎﻟﺒَﺔُ اﻟﱠِﱴ َﳒَ َﺤ‬ َ َ ‫اﻹ ْﻣﺘ َﺤ‬ .‫ﺻ ِﺪﻳْﻘﻰ ُﳏَ ﱠﻤ ْﺪ َﻋﻠِﻰ‬ ْ‫أ‬ ُ ‫ُﺧ‬ َ ‫ﺖ‬ ِ .‫ﺼﻨُـ ْﻮ َﻋﺔٌ ِﻣﻦ اﻟﻴَ َﺎ] ِن‬ ْ ‫اَﻟ ﱠﺴﻴَ َﺎرةَ اﻟﱠِﱴ َﻣ ْﻮ ُﺟ ْﻮَدةٌ ُﻫﻨَﺎ ﻫ َﻰ َﻣ‬ .‫َﻫ ِﺬ ِﻩ اﻟْﻐُْﺮﻓَﺔُ اﻟﱠِﱴ َْﳓ ُﻦ ﻓِْﻴـ َﻬﺎ ﻫﻰ ﻏُ ْﺮﻓَﺔُ اﻟْ ُﻤ ِﺪﻳْ ِﺮ‬ ِ ِ‫اَﻟ ﱠﺴﺎﻋﺔُ اﻟﱠِﱴ اُِرﻳ ُﺪﻫﺎ ِﻫﻰ ﻟ‬ .‫ﻠﺠ َﺪا ِر‬ َ َ َ ْ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ‫ﱠ‬ .ٌ‫ﺖ ﻧَﻈْﻴـ َﻔﺔ‬ ْ ‫ﻴﺴ‬ َ َ‫اَﻟْﻤ ْﻠ َﻌ َﻘﺔُ اﻟ ِﱴ ﰱ ﻳَﺪ َك ﻫﻰ ﻟ‬

ِ َ‫( اﻟﻠﱠﺘ‬Who) v. ‫ﺎن‬

ِ َ‫ﺼﻴﻨِﻴـﺘ‬ ِ ِ ِ .‫ﺎن‬ َ ْ ّ ْ‫اَﻟﻄﱠﺒِْﻴـﺒَـﺘَﺎن اﻟﻠﱠﺘَﺎن ِﰱ َﻫ َﺬا اﻟْ ُﻤ ْﺴﺘَ َﺸ َﻔﻰ ُﳘَﺎ اَﻟ‬ ِ َ‫ﺎن ﻋﻠَﻰ اﻟﻄﱠﺎ ِوﻟَِﺔ ُﳘﺎ ﻗَ ِﺪ ْﳝَﺘ‬ ِ ِ ‫اﻟ ﱠﺴ‬ .‫ﺎن ِﺟ ًﺪا‬ َ َ َ‫ﺎﻋﺘَﺎن اﻟﻠﱠﺘ‬ َ ِ َ‫ﺎن اﻟﻠﱠﺘ‬ ِ َ‫اَﻟﻄﱠﺎﻟِﺒـﺘ‬ .‫ ِن ِﺟ ًﺪا‬6َ ‫ﺎن اِﻟﺘﱠ َﺤ َﻘﺘَﺎ ِ]ﳉَ ِﺎﻣ َﻌ ِﺔ ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬ َﺪ‬ َ ِ َ‫ﺎن ﺗَﺴ ُﻜﻨ‬ ِ ِ َ ‫اَﻟْﻤﻤ ِﺮ‬ ‫ﺎن ِﰱ اﻟ ﱠﺸ َﻘ ِﺔ‬ ْ َ‫ﺿﺘَﺎن اﻟﻠﱠﺘ‬ َّ ُ ِ.‫اﻟْﻤ ْﻔﺮو َﺷ ِﺔ ﻛِﻠَﺘَﺎ ُﳘﺎ ِﻣﻦ اﻟْ َﻘ ِﺮﻳﺔ‬ ُْ َ َ َ َ ِ َ‫ ِن اﻟﻠﱠﺘ‬6َ ‫اﻟﻨﱠﺎﻓِ َﺬ‬ .‫ ِن‬6‫ﺪ‬ َ ْ‫ﺎن ِﰱ ِﺟﺪا ِر ﺑِْﻴ ِﱴ َﺟ ِﺪﻳ‬

The student, who succeeded in the examination with the highest mark, is the sister of my friend, Muhammad Ali. The car, which is present here, is made in Japan. This room in which we are is the director’s room. The clock, which I need, is a wall clock. The spoon, which is in your hand, it is not clean.

Both the lady doctors, who are in this hospital, are Chinese. Both the watches, which are on the table, very old. Both the students, who took admission in the university, are very hardworking. Both the nurses, who live in the full furnished apartment, are from the village. Both the windows, which are at the wall of my house, are new.

‫( اَ ﱠ‬Those) vi. ‫ﻟﻼﺗِﻰ‬ ِ ‫اﻟﻼﺗِﻰ ﻳـﻌﻤ ْﻠﻦ ِﰱ اﻟْﻤ‬ ِ .‫ﺎت‬ ٌ َ‫ﺼﻨ ِﻊ ُﻛﻠﱠ َﻬ ّﻦ َﺳﺎ ِرﻗ‬ ْ َ َ َ ْ َ ‫اَﻟﻨّ َﺴﺎءُ ﱠ‬

All the women, who work in the factory, are thieves.

59

ِّ ‫اﻟﻼﺗِﻰ ﻳ ْﺪرﺳﻦ ِﰱ اﻟْﻤ َﺪرﺳ ِﺔ‬ ِ ‫اﻟﺪﻳْﻨِﻴﱠﺔ‬ ُ ‫اَﻟْ ُﻤ َﻌﻠّ َﻤ‬ ََ َ َ ْ ُ َ ‫ﺎت ﱠ‬ ِ .‫ﺎت ِﺟ ًﺪا‬ ٌ َ‫ات َو ﻧَﺸْﻴﻄ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻛﻠﱠ ُﻬ ْﻦ ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬ َﺪ‬ ِ ِ ‫ﺎﺿﺮات ﱠ‬ ِ ‫ات ِﰱ‬ َ ‫اﻟﻼﺗﻰ ﻳـُْﻠﻘ ﱠﻦ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺤ‬ َ ‫ﺎﺿَﺮ‬ ُ َ ‫اَﻟْ ُﻤ َﺤ‬ ِ ‫اﻟﻠﱠﻐَ ِﺔ اﻟْﻌﺮﺑِﻴ ِﺔ ُﻛ‬ .‫ت‬ ٌ \َ‫ﺼ ِﺮ‬ ْ ‫ﻠﻬ ﱠﻦ ﻣ‬ ُ َ ََ ِ ِ ‫ت ﱠ‬ ‫اﻟﻼﺗِﻰ ُﻫﻨﱠﺎ ِﰱ اﻟْ ُﻘﺮى‬ ُ َ‫اَﻟﻨّ َﺴ َﻮةُ ا ْﳉَﺎﻫﻼ‬ ِ .‫اﻹﺳﻼَِﻣﻰ‬ ْ ‫ُﻛﻠﱡ ُﻬ ﱠﻦ َْﳛﺘَ ْﺠ َﻦ اﻟْﻌﻠَ َﻢ‬ ‫ات ﱠ‬ ‫اﻟﻼﺗِﻰ ُﻫﻨَﺎ ﰱ اﻟ ﱡﺴ ْﻮ ِق ُﻛﻠِّ َﻬﺎ‬ ُ ‫اﻟ ﱠﺴﻴَ َﺎر‬ .‫ﺼﻨُـ ْﻮ َﻋﺔٌ ِﻣﻦ اﻟﻴَ َﺎ] ِن‬ ْ ‫َﻣ‬

All the teachers, who teach in the religious school, are very hardworking and active. All the lecturers, who deliver lectures in the Arabic language, are Egyptians. All the ignorant women, who are in the villages, all in need of Islamic knowledge. All the cars, which are here in the market, are made in Japan.

The following three words, which are interrogative pronouns originally, are also used as relative pronouns:

‫( َﻣﻦ‬he, who), ‫( َﻣﺎ‬that, which), ‫ى‬ ‫( أَ ﱡ‬which of) I taught to one who was (once) a student. .‫ﺖ َﻣ ْﻦ َﻛﺎ َن ُﻣﺘَـ َﻌﻠِّ ًﻤﺎ‬ ُ ‫َﻋﻠﱠ ْﻤ‬ Let bygones be bygone. .‫ﻀﻰ‬ ٰ ‫ﻀﻰ َﻣﺎ َﻣ‬ ٰ ‫َﻣ‬ Among you, he, who tries his best, .‫ﻳُﻜَْﺮُم اَﻳﱠ ُﻜ ْﻢ َْﳚﺘَ ِﻬ ُﺪ‬ respected.

ِْ 6. ‫اﻻ ْﺳﺘِ ْﻔ َﻬ ِﺎم‬

is

‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋِﺮ‬ َ (The Interrogative Pronouns)

ِ ِ‫اﻹﺳﺘِ ْﻔﻬ ِﺎم ﺗُﺴﺘَﺨ َﺪم ﻟ‬ .‫اﻷﺳﺌَـﻠَ ِﺔ‬ ْ ‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋُِﺮ‬ َ ْ ‫ﺼﻴﱠﺎ َﻏﺔ‬ َ ُ ْ ْ َ ْ ِْ ُ‫أﲰَﺎء‬/

The interrogative pronouns/questioning nouns are used to make questions or to ask about people and things in order to know their position. They are given as below: 1. 4.

‫( َﻣ ْﻦ‬who) 2. ‫( َﻣﺎ‬what) ‫ى‬ ‫ أَ ﱡ‬،ٌ‫( أَﻳﱠﺔ‬who, which, what, what kind of)

3.

‫ﻒ‬ َ ‫( َﻛْﻴ‬how? how!) ‫( ﻟِ َﻤﺎ‬why)

8.

‫( َﻣﺘ ٰﯽ‬when) 9. 10. 11. ‫( أَ ﱠﱏ‬where from). All the above interrogative pronouns are ‫ﲎ‬ ‫ اَ ﱡ‬and ٌ‫أَﻳﱠﺔ‬ ‫( َﻣْﺒ ِ ﱞ‬indeclinable) except ‫ى‬ which is ‫ب‬ ٌ ‫( ُﻣ ْﻌ َﺮ‬declinable) - having all three cases of vowels. 6.

7.

‫( أَﻳْ َﻦ‬where) ‫( ﻟِ َﻤﺎذَأ‬why)

5.

‫( َﻣﺎذَا‬what) ‫( َﻛ ْﻢ‬how many)

either of

Some Rules to Use Questioning Nouns 1. The questioning nouns or interrogative pronouns come in the beginning of the sentences, e.g.

‫ﺖ؟‬ َ ْ‫َﻣ ْﻦ أَﻧ‬

‫َﻣ ْﻦ أَ ُﺧ ْﻮ َك؟‬ ِ ‫ﻚ؟‬ َ ُ‫َﻣﺎ ا ْﲰ‬

Who are you? Who is your brother? What is your name?

60

But when they are used as genitive (‫ﳎﺮْوٌر‬ َْ ), they come after the construct accordingly, e.g.,

ُ

‫( ُﻛ ْﺮ ِﺳ ﱡﻰ َﻣ ْﻦ‬whose chair), ‫ﺖ َﻣ ْﻦ‬ ُ ‫( ﺑَـْﻴ‬whose home).

2.

The particles are added before the interrogative pronouns, e.g.

‫ﻟِ َﻤﻦ اﻟْ َﻘﻠَ ُﻢ؟‬ ِ ‫ﻚ اﻟْﻴَـ ْﻮَم؟‬ ُ ‫ﻟ َﻤ ِﻦ اﻟْ ُﻤ ْﻠ‬ ‫ِﻣ ْﻦ أﻳْ َﻦ؟‬ 3.

5.

6.

Whose kingdom is today? From where?

The particle ‫ َﻣﺎ‬is pronounced ‫ َم‬also, e.g. (i)

4.

Whose pen is this?

‫ِﱂَ= ﻟِ َﻤﺎ‬

(ii)

‫َﻋ ﱠﻢ= َﻋ ﱠﻤﺎ‬

(iii)

‫ﻓِْﻴ َﻢ= ﻓِْﻴ َﻤﺎ‬

‫ى‬ ‫ اَ ﱡ‬and ٌ‫ اَﻳﱠﺔ‬are construct to the coming words: (i) ‫ أَ ﱡى َر ُﺟ ٍﻞ‬،‫ى اﻟِّﺮ َﺟ ِﺎل‬ ‫( أَ ﱡ‬whichever man/men) ٍ‫ أَﻳﱠﺔُ ﻣﺮءة‬،‫( أَﻳﱠﺔُ اﻟﻨِّﺴ ِﺄء‬whichever woman/women) (ii) َ َْ َ The noun following ‫ﻛ ْﻢ‬ َ is singular, and is accusative case, e.g. How many dollars have you? ‫َﻛ ْﻢ َد ْوﻻًَرا ِﻋْﻨﺪﱠك؟‬ What is your age?/How old are you? ‫َﻛ ْﻢ َﺳﻨَﺔً ُﻋ ْﻤ ُﺮَك؟‬ Sometimes ‫ﻛ ْﻢ‬ َ is used as ُ‫( َﺧ َِﱪﻳﱠﺔ‬informative). Then it has the meaning of: many, how

much. And the noun, that follows is singular or plural in genitive case (ٌ‫ﺟِّﺮﻳَﺔ‬ َ ٌ‫) َﺣﺎﻟَﺔ‬, e.g.

.‫ َﻛ ْﻢ ِر َﺟ ٍﺎل‬،‫َﻛ ْﻢ َر ُﺟ ٍﻞ‬ .‫َﻛ ْﻢ ِﻣ ْﻦ ﻓِﺌَ ٍﺔ ﻗَﻠِْﻴـﻠَ ٍﺔ‬

Many men. Many small groups.

‫ﺗَ ْﻜ ِﻮﻳْ ُﻦ اﻷَﺳﺌَـﻠَ ِﺔ‬

Making Questions

ِ ‫ﺣ َﺪى ْأدو‬Úِ ‫ﺎت ﻣﻌﻴﱠـﻨَ ٍﺔ ﻓَـﻴ ِﺠﺐ أَ ْن ﻳـﺒﺪأ‬ ٍ :‫ات اﻟ ﱡﺴ َﻮ ِال اﻟﺘَﺎﻟِﻴَ ِﺔ‬ ُ ‫إذَا َﻛﺎ َن ا ْﳍََﺪ‬ ْ ‫ف ِﻣ َﻦ اﻟ ﱡﺴ َﺆا ِل‬ ْ ُْ ُ َ َ ُ ‫إﻋﻄَﺎءُ َﻣ ْﻌﻠُ ْﻮَﻣ‬ َ Where? ِ ‫ﻟِﻠ ﱡﺴﺆا ِل ﻋ ِﻦ اﻟْﻤ َﻜ‬ ‫أَﻳْ َﻦ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َ َ َ When? ِ ‫ﻟِﻠ ﱡﺴﺆا ِل ﻋ ِﻦ اﻟﱠﺰﻣ‬ ‫َﻣ َﱴ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َ َ َ Why? ِ َ‫ﻟِﻠ ﱡﺴ َﺆا ِل َﻋ ِﻦ اﻟ ﱠﺴﺒ‬ ‫ﻟِ َﻤﺎذَأ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ٍ ‫ﻟِﻠ ﱡﺴﺆا ِل ﻋ ِﻦ ﺷ‬ What? ‫ﻣﺎذَا‬/‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻰء‬ َ َ َ َ ‫َﻣ‬

‫‪61‬‬

‫ِ‬ ‫ﲔ ﺷﻴﺌ ِ‬ ‫ﻸﺧﺘِﻴَﺎ ِر ﺑَ ْ ِ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ ‫ﻟ ْ‬ ‫ﻟِﻠ ﱡﺴﺆا ِل ﻋ ِﻦ ﻓَ ِ‬ ‫ﺎﻋ ٍﻞ َﻋﺎﻗِ ٍﻞ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﻟِﻠ ﱡﺴ َﺆا ِل َﻋ ْﻦ َﻣ ْﻔ ُﻌ ْﻮٍل َﻋﺎﻗ ٍﻞ‬ ‫ﻟِﻠ ﱡﺴ َﺆا ِل َﻋ ِﻦ اﻟْ ِﻤ ْﻠ ِﻜﻴﱠ ِﺔ‬ ‫اﳊَﺎﻟَِﺔ‬ ‫ﻟِﻠ ﱡﺴ َﺆا ِل َﻋ ِﻦ ْ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫اﻟﻌ َﺪ ِد‬ ‫ﻟﻠ ﱡﺴ َﺆال َﻋ ِﻦ َ‬ ‫ﻟِﻠ ﱡﺴ َﺆا ِل َﻋ ِﻦ اﻟْ َﻜ ِّﻤﻴَ ِﺔ‬ ‫ﻟِﻠ ﱡﺴ َﺆا ِل َﻋ ِﻦ اﻟﻄﱡْﻮِل‬ ‫ﻟِﻠ ﱡﺴ َﺆا ِل َﻋ ِﻦ اﻟْ ُﻌ ْﻤ ِﺮ‬ ‫ﻟِﻠ ﱡﺴ َﺆا ِل َﻋﻦ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺴﺎﻓَ ِﺔ‬ ‫‪.1‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬

‫?‪Which‬‬

‫أ ﱡى‬ ‫َﻣ ْﻦ‬

‫?‪Who‬‬

‫َﻣ ْﻦ‬ ‫ﻟِ َﻤ ْﻦ‬ ‫ﻒ‬ ‫َﻛْﻴ َ‬ ‫َﻛ ْﻢ َﻋ َﺪ ٍد‬ ‫َﻛ ْﻢ َﻛ ِّﻤﻴَ ٍﺔ‬ ‫َﻛ ْﻢ ﻃُْﻮٍل‬ ‫َﻛ ْﻢ ُﻋ ْﻤ ٍﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﻢ ﺑـُ ْﻌ ٍﺪ‬ ‫ْ‬

‫?‪Whom‬‬ ‫?‪Whose‬‬ ‫?‪How‬‬ ‫?‪How many‬‬ ‫?‪How much‬‬ ‫?‪How long‬‬ ‫?‪How old‬‬ ‫?‪How far‬‬

‫ﻀ َﻤﺎﺋُِﺮ‬ ‫)‪ (The Reflexive Pronouns‬اﻟ َ‬

‫اﻻﻧْ ِﻌ َﻜ ِ‬ ‫ِْ‬ ‫ﺎﺳﻴَﺔُ ‪7.‬‬

‫ﺿﻤﺎﺋِﺮ ْاﻹﻧْﻌِ َﻜ ِ‬ ‫ﺎﺳﻴﱠ ِﺔ ﻟِﻠﺘﱠﺄﻛِْﻴ ِﺪ)‪.(Reflexive pronouns are used to emphasis‬‬ ‫ﺗُ ْﺴﺘَ ْﺨ َﺪ ُم َ َ ُ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫غ ﺑِ َﻜﻠِ َﻤ ِﺔ‬ ‫ﺼﺎ ُ‬ ‫ﺗُ ْﺴﺘَ ْﺨ َﺪ ُم َﻫﺬﻩ اﻟﻀﱠﻤﺎﺋﺮ ﻟﻠﺘـ ْ‬ ‫ﱠﻌﺒِ ِْﲑ َﻋ ِﻦ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮل ﺑِﻪ ﻋْﻨ َﺪ َﻣﺎ ﻳَ ُﻜ ْﻮ َن ُﻫ ْﻮ اﻟْ َﻔﺎﻋ ُﻞ ﻧَـ ْﻔ ُﺴﻪُ و ﺗُ َ‬ ‫” ‪]ِ “Self‬ﻟﻠﱡﻐَ ِﺔ ِْ‬ ‫اﻹ ِْﳒﻠِْﻴـَﺰﻳَِﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﺼ ْﻴـﻐَﺔُ‬ ‫اَ ِّ‬

‫ِ‬ ‫ّﻢ‬ ‫اَﻟ ُْﻤﺘَ َﻜﻠ ُ‬

‫‪Speaker‬‬

‫ِ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ‫اَﻟ ُْﻤ َﺨﺎﻃ ُ‬ ‫‪Listener‬‬

‫ِ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ‫اَﻟْﻐَﺎﺋ ُ‬

‫‪Absent‬‬

‫اَﻟ ُْﻤ ْﻔ َﺮ ُد‬ ‫ﻧـَ ْﻔ ِﺴﻰ‬

‫اَ ْﳉَ ْﻤ ُﻊ‬ ‫أَﻧـَ ُﻔ ُﺴﻨَﺎ‬

‫‪Myself‬‬

‫‪Ourselves‬‬

‫ﻚ‬ ‫ﻧـَ ْﻔ ُﺴ َ‬

‫أَﻧْـ ُﻔ ُﺴ ُﻜ ْﻢ‬

‫‪Yourself‬‬

‫‪Yourselves‬‬

‫ﻧـَ ْﻔﺴﻪُ )‪(Himself‬‬

‫أَﻧْـ ُﻔ ُﺴ ُﻬ ْﻢ‬

‫ُ‬ ‫ﻧـَ ْﻔﺴ َﻬﺎ )‪(Herself‬‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ﻧـَ ْﻔﺴ َﻬﺎ )‪(Itself‬‬ ‫ُ‬

‫‪Themselves‬‬

‫‪Examples:‬‬ ‫‪She struck herself in the house.‬‬ ‫‪She hurt herself in the garden.‬‬ ‫‪He talks to himself.‬‬

‫ِ‬ ‫ﺖ ﻧـَ ْﻔﺴﻬﺎ ِﰱ اﻟْﺒـﻴ ِ‬ ‫ﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫ َﻰ َ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫ﺿ َﺮﺑَ ْ َ َ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﺖ ﻧـَ ْﻔ َﺴ َﻬﺎ ِﰱ ا ْﳊَ ِﺪﻳْـ َﻘ ٍﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫ َﻰ َﺟ َﺮ َﺣ ْ‬ ‫ُﻫ َﻮ ﻳُ َﻜﻠِّ ُﻢ ﻧـَ ْﻔ َﺴﻪُ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (Here subject is himself object‬ﻫﻨﺎ اَﻟْﻤ ْﻔﻌﻮ ُل ﺑِ ِﻪ ﻫﻮ ﻧَـ ْﻔﺴﻪ اَﻟْ َﻔ ِ‬ ‫ﺎﻋ ُﻞ‬ ‫َُ ُ ُ‬ ‫َُ َ ُْ‬

62

8. ‫ﺑِ ِﻪ‬

‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋِ ِﺮ اﻟ َْﻤ ْﻔﻌُ ْﻮ ُل‬ َ (The Object Pronouns)

ِ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨ َﺪم ﺿ ِﻤﲑ اﻟْﻤ ْﻔﻌﻮِل ﺑِِﻪ ﺑـﻌ َﺪ ﺣﺮو‬ .‫ف ا ْﳉَِّﺮ‬ ُْ ُ ْ َ ْ ُ َ ُْ َ َ ْ َ ْ ُ

The object pronouns are used after the preposition, e.g. He lives near me. .‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﺴ ُﻜﻦ ﻗ ِﺮﻳﺐ ِﻣﲎ‬

ّ ٌ ْ َ ُ ْ َ َُ ِ ‫ُﳘﺎ ﻳ ْﺬﻫﺒ‬ .‫ﺎن إﻟَْﻴ ِﻬ ْﻢ‬ ََ َ َ .‫ُﻫ ْﻢ ﻳـَْﻨﻈُُﺮْو َن إﻟَْﻴ ِﻬ ﱠﻦ‬ .‫ أَﺗَـ َﻮﱠﻛ ُﻞ َﻋﻠَْﻴ ِﻪ‬Vََ ‫أ‬ ِ ‫َْﳓﻦ ﻧُﺴ‬ .‫ﺎﻋ ُﺪ ُﻛ ْﻢ‬ َ ُ ِ ِ .‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫أت ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘَﺎﺑ‬ ُ ‫ ﻗَﺮ‬Vَ ‫أ‬

Both of them go/are going/will go to them. They are looking at them/They are looking towards them. I trust him. We help you. I read from your book.

Examples from Al-Quran Al-Hakeem: ¸ξsW¨Β Μçλm; ó>ΎôÑ$#uρ

$tΡø—¨“yèsù $yϑèδθç/¤‹s3sù È÷uΖøO$# ãΝÍκöŽs9Î) !$uΖù=y™ö‘r& øŒÎ) tβθè=y™ó÷‘∆ Νä3ø‹s9Î) !$‾ΡÎ) (#þθä9$s)sù ;]Ï9$sVÎ/ Èβρãà)ø9$# š∅ÏiΒ Νßγn=ö6s% $uΖõ3n=÷δr& ö/x. (#÷ρttƒ óΟs9r&

tβθãèÅ_ötƒ Ÿω öΝÍκöŽs9Î) öΝåκ¨Ξr& ;M≈¨Ζy_ $yγŠÏù $oΨù=yèy_uρ

And present to them an example. (36:13) When We sent to them two Messengers, they denied them both, so, We strengthened/reinforced them with a third, and they said, “Indeed, we are messengers to you”. (36:14) Do they not see how many generations We have destroyed before them? Verily, they will not return to them. (36:31) And We have made therein gardens. (36:34)

‫‪63‬‬

‫َ ْ َٔ ْ َ ُ‬ ‫اﻻﺳ ِﺌﻠﺔ‬

‫َٔ ْ َ ْ َٔ َ ْ ٓ‬ ‫‪ e‬اﻻ ْﺳ ِﺌﻠ ِﺔ اﻻ ِﺗ َﻴ ِﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ا ِﺟﺐ ِ‬

‫‪1‬ـ‬ ‫‪2‬ـ‬ ‫‪3‬ـ‬ ‫‪4‬ـ‬ ‫‪5‬ـ‬ ‫‪6‬ـ‬ ‫‪7‬ـ‬ ‫‪8‬ـ‬ ‫‪9‬ـ‬ ‫‪ 10‬ـ‬ ‫‪ 11‬ـ‬ ‫‪ 12‬ـ‬ ‫‪ 13‬ـ‬ ‫‪ 14‬ـ‬ ‫‪ 15‬ـ‬ ‫‪ 16‬ـ‬ ‫‪ 17‬ـ‬ ‫‪ 18‬ـ‬

‫‪QUESTIONS‬‬ ‫‪Answer the following Questions:‬‬

‫ﻣﺎ ِﻫﻲ اﻟﻀﱠﻤﺎﺋِﺮ اﻟْﻤْﻨـ َﻔ ِ‬ ‫ﺼﻠَﺔُ ؟ اُ ْﻛﺘُ َﺒﻬﺎ وﺗَـْﺮِﲨْ َﻬﺎ َإﱃ ا ِﻹ ْﳒﻠِﻴ ِﺰﻳﱠِﺔ ـ‬ ‫َ َ َ ُ ُ‬ ‫ﻋ ِﺮ ِ‬ ‫ف اﻟﻀ ِ‬ ‫اﻋ َﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺐ أَﻧْـ َﻮ َ‬ ‫ﱠﻤﺎﺋَﺮَواُ ْﻛﺘُ ْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َّ‬ ‫ﺐ ْاﻵ\ت اﻟْ ُﻘﺮآﻧِﻴﱠﺔَ اﻟﱠِﱵ ﻓِﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﻀﱠﻤﺎﺋِﺮ اﻟْﻤْﻨـ َﻔ ِ‬ ‫اُ ْﻛﺘُ ِ‬ ‫ﺼﻠَﺔُ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ ُ ُ‬ ‫َ َ ْ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﺎﺿ ِﻰ "ﻓَـﻌﻞ" و ِ‬ ‫اِﺳﺘَﺨ ِﺪِم اﻟﻀ ِ‬ ‫ﻮل‪،‬واﻟْ ِﻔﻌ ِﻞ اﻟْﻤ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫اﻟﻔ ْﻌ ِﻞ‬ ‫ْ ْ‬ ‫ََ َ‬ ‫ﱠﻤﺎﺋَﺮ اﻟْ ُﻤْﻨـ َﻔﺼﻠَﺔَ َﻣ َﻊ ا ْﺳ ِﻢ اﻟْ َﻔﺎﻋ ِﻞ َوا ْﺳ ِﻢ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻔﻌُ َ ْ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ﻀﺎ ِرع "ﻳـَ ْﻔ َﻌ ُﻞ " َوﻓِ ْﻌ ِﻞ ْاﻷ َْﻣ ِﺮ "اِﻓْـ َﻌ ْﻞ" َوﻓِ ْﻌ ِﻞ اﻟﻨﱠـ ْﻬ ِﻰ "ﻻ ﺗَـ ْﻔ َﻌ ْﻞ " ﰒُُﱠ ﺗَـ ْﺮِﲨْ َﻬﺎ َإﱃ ا ِﻹ ْﳒﻠِﻴ ِﺰﻳﱠِﺔ ـ‬ ‫اﻟْ ُﻤ َ‬ ‫ﺐ اﻟﻀﱠﻤﺎﺋِﺮ اﻟْﻤﺘ ِ‬ ‫اُ ْﻛﺘُ ِ‬ ‫ﱠﺼﻠَﺔَ‬ ‫َ َ ُ‬ ‫ﻋ ِﺮ ِ‬ ‫ف اﻟﻀﱠﻤﺎﺋِﺮ اﻟْﻤﺘ ِ‬ ‫ﱠﺼﻠَﺔَ ]ِِْﻹ ِْﳒﻠِْﻴ ِﺰﻳَﺔِ ـ‬ ‫َ َ ُ‬ ‫َّ‬ ‫ﱠﺼﻠَﺔَ ِ]ﺳ ٍﻢ َﻛﻤﻀ ٍ‬ ‫ِ ِِ‬ ‫ﺎف إﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ ـ‬ ‫ﱠﻤﺎﺋَِﺮ اﻟْ ُﻤﺘ ِ ْ ُ َ‬ ‫ا ْﺳﺘَ ْﺨﺪم اﻟﻀ َ‬ ‫ِ ِِ‬ ‫اِﺳﺘَﺨ ِﺪِم اﻟﻀ ِ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫َى ﻓَـ َﻌ َﻞ(‬ ‫ْ ْ‬ ‫ﱠﻤﺎﺋَﺮ اﻟْ ُﻤﺘﱠﺼﻠَﺔَ ﺑﻔ ْﻌ ٍﻞ َﻛ َﻤ ْﻔﻌُﻮل ﻟَﻪ‘ )أ ْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ﻀﻤﺎﺋِﺮ اﻟْﻤﺘ ِ‬ ‫ِ ِِ‬ ‫ﻴﺪةِ ﰒُُﱠ ﺗَـْﺮِﲨْ َﻬﺎ َإﱃ اﻟﻠﱡﻐُ ِﺔ ا ِﻹ ْﳒﻠِﻴ ِﺰﻳﱠِﺔ ـ‬ ‫ﱠﺼﻠَﺔَ ِﰱ ْ‬ ‫اﳉُ َﻤ ِﻞ اﻟْ ُﻤ ِﻔ َ‬ ‫ا ْﺳﺘَ ْﺨﺪم اﻟ ﱠ َ َ ُ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ِﻫﻰ َ ِ ِ ِ ِ‬ ‫ﻴﺪةِ ﰒُُﱠ ﺗَـْﺮِﲨْ َﻬﺎ َإﱃ ا ِﻹ ْﳒﻠِﻴ ِﺰﻳﱠِﺔ‬ ‫ت اﻟْ ِﻤْﻠ ِﻜﻴﱠﺔُ ؟ اِ ْﺳﺘَ ْﺨ ِﺪ ْﻣ َﻬﺎ ِﰱ ْ‬ ‫اﳉُ َﻤ ِﻞ اﻟْ ُﻤ ِﻔ َ‬ ‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋ ُﺮ اﻟْﻤْﻠﻜﻴﱠﺔُ َوﺻ َﻔﺎ ُ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫ِ ِِ‬ ‫ﱠﻤﺎﺋَِﺮ اﻟْ ِﻤْﻠ ِﻜﻴﱠﺔَ ﺑِﻠَ ْﻔ ٍﻆ " ا\"‬ ‫ا ْﺳﺘَ ْﺨﺪم اﻟﻀ َ‬ ‫ﺿﻤﺎﺋِﺮ ِْ‬ ‫ﻴﺪةِ َوﺗَـْﺮِﲨْ َﻬﺎ َإﱃ اﻟﻠﱡﻐُ ِﺔ ا ِﻹ ْﳒﻠِﻴ ِﺰﻳﱠِﺔ ـ‬ ‫اﺳﺘَ ْﺨ ِﺪ ْﻣ َﻬﺎ ِﰱ ْ‬ ‫َﻋِّﺮ ْ‬ ‫اﳉُ َﻤ ِﻞ اﻟْ ُﻤ ِﻔ َ‬ ‫اﻹ َﺷ َﺎرةِ ﰒُﱠ اُ ْﻛﺘُـْﺒـ َﻬﺎ َو ْ‬ ‫ف ََ َ‬ ‫ﻟِﻤﺎ َذا ﺗُﺴﺘَﺨ ِﺪم ِ‬ ‫ﺻ ِﻞ؟‬ ‫َ ْ ْ ُ َ‬ ‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋ ُﺮ اﻟْ َﻮ ْ‬ ‫ﻴﺪةِ‬ ‫اُ ْﻛﺘُﺐ ِﺻﻴ َﻎ ِ‬ ‫اﺳﺘَ ْﺨ ِﺪ ْﻣ َﻬﺎ ِﰱ ْ‬ ‫اﳉُ َﻤ ِﻞ اﻟْ ُﻤ ِﻔ َ‬ ‫ْ َ َ‬ ‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋ ِﺮ اﻟْ َﻮ ْ‬ ‫ﺻ ِﻞ ﰒُﱠ ْ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋُِﺮ ِاﻹ ْﺳﺘِ ْﻔ َﻬ ِﺎم ؟‬ ‫ﻟ َﻤﺎ َذا ﺗُ ْﺴﺘَ ْﺨﺪ ُم َ‬ ‫ﺿ َﻤﺎﺋَِﺮ ‪ /‬أ َْﲰَ ِﺎء ِاﻹ ْﺳﺘِ ْﻔ َﻬ ِﺎم ﰒُُﱠ ﺗَـْﺮِﲨْ َﻬﺎ َإﱃ اﻟﻠﱡﻐَ ِﺔ ا ِﻹ ْﳒﻠِﻴ ِﺰﻳﱠِﺔ ـ‬ ‫ﺐ َ‬ ‫اُ ْﻛﺘُ ْ‬ ‫ﻟِﻤﺎذَا ﺗُﺴﺘَﺨ ِﺪم ﺿﻤﺎﺋِﺮ ا ِﻹﻧْـﻌ َﻜ ِ‬ ‫ﺎﺳﻴﱠ ِﺔ ؟ اُ ْﻛﺘُ ِ‬ ‫ﺐ ْاﻷ َْﻣﺜِﻠَﺔَ‬ ‫َ ْ ْ ُ ََ ُ َ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﺿ ِﻤﲑ اﻟْﻤ ْﻔﻌ ِ‬ ‫ﻮل ﻟَﻪُ ؟ اُ ْﻛﺘُ ِ‬ ‫ﺐ ْاﻷ َْﻣﺜِﻠَﺔَ ﰒُُﱠ ﺗَـْﺮِﲨْ َﻬﺎ َإﱃ اﻟﻠﱡﻐَ ِﺔ ا ِﻹ ْﳒﻠِﻴ ِﺰﻳﱠِﺔ ـ‬ ‫أَﻳْ َﻦ ﺗُ ْﺴﺘَ ْﺨﺪ ُم َ ُ َ ُ‬

64

65

َٔ ْ َ ُ َ َ ّ ُ َ ْ َ ْ َ ْ َ ُ  ‫ اﻻﲰﺎء‬:‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺜﺎ ِﻟﺜﺔ‬ Unit No.03-The Nouns(3) ِ ‫۔ اَﻟْﻤﺮﱠﻛﺐ اﻟْﺘـﱠﻮ‬3.1 ‫ﺻ ْﻴ ِﻔ ﱡﻰ‬ ْ ُ َُ The Adjective Compound

ِْ ‫۔ اَﻟْﻤﺮﱠﻛﺐ‬3.2 ‫ﺿﺎﻓِ ﱡﯽ‬ َ ‫اﻻ‬ ُ َُ

The Relative Compound

‫ اﻷﺳﺘﺎذ اﻟﺪﮐﺘﻮر ﻋﺒﺪ اﻤﯿﺪ ﺧﺎن ﻋﺒﺎ‬:‫ِإ ْﻋ َﺪاد‬ ‫ﻐﺪادی‬/ ‫ﯿﺪ‬01‫ اﻟﺪﮐﺘﻮر ﻋﺒﺪ ا‬:‫اﳌﺮ ِاﺟﻊ‬

Written by: Reviewed by:

Prof. Dr. Abdul Hameed Khan Abbasi Dr. Abdul Majeed Bagdadi

‫‪66‬‬

‫َ ْ ُ َ َّ ُ ْ‬ ‫‪ُs‬‬ ‫ﺐ اﻟ َّﺘ ْﻮ ِﺻ ْﻴ ِ ّ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺮﻛ‬ ‫‪The Adjective Compound‬‬ ‫)‪(1‬‬

‫)‪(2‬‬

‫ف‬ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ ُ‬ ‫اَﻟ ُْﻤ ْﻮ ُ‬

‫ْﺼ َﻔﺔُ‬ ‫اَﻟ ِّ‬

‫ِ‬ ‫ﺎب‬ ‫اَﻟْﻜﺘَ ُ‬

‫اَﻟ ُْﻤ ِﻔ ْﻴ ُﺪ‬

‫اَﻟْﻤﺮﱠﻛﺐ اﻟْﺘﱠـﻮ ِ‬ ‫ﺻ ْﻴ ِﻔ ﱡﻰ‬ ‫َُ ُ ْ‬ ‫ف‬ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ ٌ‬ ‫َﻣ ْﻮ ُ‬

‫ِ‬ ‫ﺻ َﻔﺔٌ‬

‫ﻣﺮﱠﻛﺐ ﺗَـﻮ ِ‬ ‫ﺻ ْﻴ ِﻔ ﱞﻰ‬ ‫َُ ٌ ْ‬

‫‪The Adjective Compound‬‬

67

Introduction to the 1st part of Unit No.03 The first part of this Unit of your course, “Quranic Arabic”, is about the Adjective 1. 2. i.

ii. iii.

ِِ compound (‫ﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﺘـ ْﱠﻮﺻْﻴﻔ ﱡ‬

‫ﺐ‬ ُ ‫)اَﻟْ ُﻤَﺮﱠﻛ‬. In this unit you will study the following points:

Definition of the adjective compound.

ِِ Some additional important rules about ‫ﻰ‬ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻮﺻْﻴﻔ ﱞ‬

‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫( ُﻣَﺮﱠﻛ‬adjective compound):

Agreement of the prescribed (qualified) noun and the adjective noun in number ( ُ‫ُﻣﻄَﺎﺑَـ َﻘﺔ‬

ِ ِ ‫اﻟﺼ َﻔ ِﺔ واﻟْﻤﻮﺻﻮ‬ ِ ‫ف ِﰱ اﻟْ َﻌ َﺪ ِد‬ ْ ُ ْ َ َ ّ ‫)ا ْﺳ ِﻢ‬, and examples from the Quran and sentences of daily usage. Agreement of the prescribed noun and the adjective noun in gender ِ ‫ )ﻣﻄَﺎﺑـ َﻘﺔُ اِﺳ ِﻢ اﻟْﻤﻮ‬and examples from the sentences of daily usage. ِ ِ ‫اﳉِْﻨ‬ (‫ﺲ‬ ْ ‫اﻟﺼ َﻔ ِﺔ ِﰱ‬ ّ ‫ﺻ ْﻮف َو‬ ُ َْ ْ َ ُ

Agreement of the prescribed and the adjective noun in the definite and indefinite noun

ِ ِ ‫ﺼ َﻔ ِﺔ واﻟْﻤﻮﺻﻮ‬ ِ ‫ف ِﰱ اِﺳ ِﻢ اﻟْﻤﻌ ِﺮﻓَِﺔ و اﻟْﻨ‬ ِ (‫ﱠﻜﺮِة‬ ْ ُ ْ َ َ ّ ‫ ) ُﻣﻄَﺎﺑـَ َﻘﺔُ ا ْﺳ ِﻢ اﻟ‬and examples from the sentences of daily َ َْ ْ َ

usage. iv.

Agreement of the prescribed and the adjective noun for the Irab case-ending

ِ ِ ‫ )ﻣﻄَﺎﺑـ َﻘﺔُ اِﺳ ِﻢ اﻟْﻤﻮ‬and its examples and conjugation. ‫اﻟﺼ َﻔ ِﺔ ِﰱ‬ ّ ‫ﺻ ْﻮف َو‬ ُ َْ ْ َ ُ

ِ ‫اﻹ ْﻋﺮ‬ ِْ (‫اب‬ َ

Objectives of 1st part of Uunit No.03 ٰ ‫ﺎﻧﻪ و‬w), when you complete the 1st part of this unit no.03, you With the help of Allah (‫ﺗﻌﺎﱄ‬ will then be able to know about the following:

1. 2.

ِِ Definition of the adjective compound (‫ﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﺘـ ْﱠﻮﺻْﻴﻔ ﱡ‬

ِ ‫ﻒ اﻟْﻤﺮﱠﻛ‬ ِ ‫ﺐ‬ َ ُ ُ ْ‫)ﺗَـ ْﻌﺮﻳ‬.

Some important rules about the agreement between the prescribed (qualified) noun and ِ ‫اﻋ ِﺪ ِﻋ ِﻦ اﻟْﻤﻄَﺎﺑـﻘ ِﺔ ﺑ‬ ِ ‫ﺼ َﻔ ِﺔ و اﻟْﻤﻮﺻﻮ‬ ِ ‫ )ﻣﻌ ِﺮﻓَﺔُ أَﻫ ِﻢ اﻟْ َﻘﻮ‬in the following four ِ the adjective noun (‫ف‬ َ َْ َ َ ُ ْ ُ ْ َ َ ّ ‫ﲔ ا ْﺳ ِﻢ اﻟ‬ َ َّ َْ

aspects: i. ii. iii. iv.

In number (‫اﻟْ َﻌ َﺪ ِد‬

‫) ِﰱ‬. ِ ‫) ِﰱ ا ْﳉِْﻨ‬. In gender (‫ﺲ‬

ِِ ِ ِ ِ َ ‫)ﰱ ا ْﺳﻢ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻌﺮﻓَﺔ َو‬. ِ ‫اﻹ ْﻋﺮ‬ ِْ ‫) ِﰱ‬. In the Irab, case-ending (‫اب‬ ِ ‫اﻟﻨ‬ In the proper and common noun (‫ﱠﻜﺮة‬

The main purpose of this unit is to describe every aspect of the above mentioned examples.

68

ِ ‫اَﻟْﻤﺮﱠﻛﺐ اﻟْﺘـﱠﻮ‬ ‫ﺻ ْﻴ ِﻔ ﱡﻰ‬ ْ ُ َُ

(The Adjective Compound)

:‫ﺗَـ ْﻌ ِﺮﻳْـ َﻔﻪ‬

ِ ِ ِ ْ َ‫اﻹﲰ‬ ‫ ﻗَـﻠَ ٌﻢ‬:‫ ِﻣﺜْ ٌﻞ‬،ُ‫اﻟﺼ َﻔﺔ‬ ْ ُ‫ﻔﻰ َْﳎ ُﻤ ْﻮ َﻋﺔ‬ ُ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ‬ ‫ﺐ اﻟْﺘﱠـ ْﻮﺻْﻴ ﱡ‬ ّ ‫ف َواﻹ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟﺜَ ِﺎﱏُ ﻳُ َﺴ ﱠﻤﻰ‬ ْ ،‫ﲔ‬ ُ ‫اﻹﺳ ُﻢ اﻷَﱠو ُل ﻳُ َﺴ ﱠﻤﻰ اَﻟْ ُﻤ ْﻮ‬ ُ ‫اَﻟْ ُﻤ َﺮﱠﻛ‬ ِ ِ‫ وﻣﺎ ا‬،ٌ‫ ﻏُﺮﻓَﺔٌ و ِاﺳﻌﺔ‬،‫ﻓِﻊ‬Vَ ‫ ﻛِﺘﺎب‬،‫ﺟ ِﺪﻳ ٌﺪ‬ .‫ﻚ‬ َ ‫ﱃ ذَﻟ‬ َ ََ َ َ ْ ٌ ٌ َ ْ َ

The adjective compound/phrase is a combination of the two nouns. The first noun is

ِ called ‫ف‬ ُ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ‬ ّ َ‫ا‬ ُ ‫( اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﻮ‬the Prescribed/the possessor of the quality) and the other is called ُ‫ﻟﺼ َﻔﺔ‬ (the adjective), e.g., new pen, a beneficial book, a spacious (vast) room, etc.

In the above mentioned three examples, the first noun is prescribed noun (‫ف‬ ٌ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ‬ ُ ‫ ) َﻣ ْﻮ‬and

ِ ). the second is adjective (ٌ‫ﺻ َﻔﺔ‬

In short, a phrase, in which the second word qualifies the first, is called an adjective phrase.

ِ ‫ﺗَـﻮ‬ Some Important Rules About ‫ﻔﻰ‬ ‫ﺻ ْﻴ ﱞ‬ ْ

‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬Adjective Compound

ٌ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ‬ ٌ‫( ِﺻ َﻔﺔ‬an adjective) must agree with its ‫ف‬ ُ ‫( َﻣ ْﻮ‬prescribed noun) in these four aspects: ِ ِ ِ ‫ﺲ‬ ُ ‫( اَ ِﻹ ْﻋﺮ‬the case-ending). ُ ‫( اَ ْﳉْﻨ‬the gender), ُ‫( اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﻌﺮﻓَﺔُ َواﻟﻨﱠﻜَﺮة‬the definite and indefinite) and ‫اب‬ Now we describe them one by one with examples:

1.

ِ ِ ‫اﻟﺼ َﻔ ِﺔ واﻟْﻤﻮ‬ ِ ‫ﰱ اﻟ َْﻌ َﺪ ِد‬ ُ ْ َ َ ّ ‫( ُﻣﻄَﺎﺑَـ َﻘﺔُ ا ْﺳ ِﻢ‬Agreement of the Prescribed/Qualified Noun and ْ ِ ‫ﺻ ْﻮف‬ the Adjective Noun in Number):

ِ The number (‫ )اَﻟْ َﻌ َﺪ ُد‬of the adjective noun (‫اﻟﺼ َﻔ ِﺔ‬ ّ

ِ ‫اﻟْﻤﻮﺻﻮ‬ prescribed/qualified noun (‫ف‬ ُْ ْ َ i.

ِ ِ ‫)و‬, ‫اﻟﺼ َﻔ ِﺔ‬ ِ ‫( اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬the qualified noun) is singular (‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ ّ ‫ا ْﺳ ُﻢ‬ ِ ‫)و‬. Examples are presented from Al-Quran singular (‫اﺣ ْﺪ‬ َ

ِ ‫اﻟْﻤﻮﺻﻮ‬ If ‫ف‬ ُْ ْ َ

to be

‫)اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬, i.e.

‫)اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬

sentences of daily usage:

must agree with its

(the adjective noun) is Al-Kareem, and from

69 Examples of the Adjective Phrases from Al-Quran Al-Hakeem:

ِ ‫ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬ ‫ﺺ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬fَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ َُ

‫مﱞ‬wَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬

(Incomplete Phrase)

(Complete Phrase)

(Un-beneficial Sentence)

(Beneficial Sentence) َ

Clear signs

Nay, but it is clear Ayat (signs) in the hearts of those who have been given knowledge (29:49).

ٌ‫ُﲨْﻠَﺔٌ ﻏَ ْﲑُ ُﻣ ِﻔ ْﻴ َﺪة‬ ٌ ‫آ َاي ٌت َﺑ ّﻴ َﻨ‬ ‫ﺎت‬ ِ

ْ ٓ ُ َْ ‫اﻟﻘ ْﺮا ُن اﳊَﻜ ِْﻴ ُﻢ‬ The Quran full of wisdom

ُ ٍ ‫ا َﻣ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ ِٕ ٍ ‫ﺎم ﻣ ِﺒ‬

A clear book

ُ ََْ ُ ‫غ ْاﻟ ُﻤ ِﺒ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻼ‬

To clearly convey (the Message)

ٌ ‫أَ ْﺟ ٌﺮ َﻛﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻢ‬ ِ

A generous reward

ٌ ٌ ‫َﺻ ْﻴ َﺤﺔ َواﺣ َِﺪة‬ One shout

ٌ ‫َﺿ َﻼ ٌل ّ ُﻣ ِﺒ‬ ‫ﲔ‬

A plain (clear) error

ٌ ‫َﻋ ُﺪ ٌّو ُﻣ ِﺒ‬ ‫ﲔ‬

A plain (clear) enemy

ٌ ‫ﴏ ٌاط ُﻣ ْﺴ َﺘ ِﻘ‬ َِ ‫ﻴﻢ‬ A straight path

َ ْ َٔ ْ َ َ ّ ‫ﴬ‬ ِ ‫اﻟﺸﺠ ِﺮ اﻻﺧ‬

The green tree

َ َ ‫ﻮم‬ ٍ ‫ِﻴﻖ ْﳐ ُﺘ‬ ٍ ‫رﺣ‬

ٌ‫ُﲨْﻠَﺔٌ ُﻣ ِﻔ ْﻴ َﺪة‬

ْ ْ ُ ُٔ َ ّ ُ ُ ٌ َ ّ َ ٌ َ ٓ َ ُ ْ َ ‫ او~ا اﻟ ِﻌﻠ َﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻞ ﻫﻮ اايت ﺑ ِﻴﻨﺎت ِﰲ ﺻﺪو ِر اﻟ ِﺬ‬ ْ ٓ ُ َْ ‫اﻟﻘ ْﺮا ُن اﳊَﻜ ِْﻴ ُﻢ‬

By the Quran, full of wisdom (i.e. full of laws, evinces and proofs).

َٔ ْ َ َ ّ ُ َ ُ َ ُ ٍ ‫ﺎﻩ ِ ْﰲ ا َﻣ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ ‫وﰻ‬ ِٕ ‫ﳽ ٍء ا ْﺣ َﺼ ْﻴﻨ‬ ٍ ‫ﺎم ﻣ ِﺒ‬

And all the things we have recorded with numbers (as a record) in a clear book (36:12). ُ

ُ ‫َو َﻣﺎ َﻋﻠَ ْﻴ َﻨﺎ ِٕا َّﻻ ْاﻟ َﺒ َﻼغ ْاﻟ ُﻤ ِﺒ‬ ‫ﲔ‬

And our duty is only to clearly convey (the message) (36:17).

َ َٔ ْ ُ ََّْ ‫ﻳﻢ‬ ِ ‫ﻓﺒ‬ ٍ ‫ﴩﻩ ِﲟَﻐ ِﻔ َﺮ ٍة َوا ْﺟ ٍﺮ ﻛ ِﺮ‬

Give him good news of forgiveness as a generous reward (i.e., paradise) (36:11). But it was only one shout (36:29).

َّ َ َ ً ً ‫ِٕا ْن ﰷﻧ ْﺖ ِٕاﻻ َﺻ ْﻴ َﺤﺔ َواﺣ َِﺪة‬ ُّ َ َ َ ً ّ ‫ﲔ‬ ٍ ‫ ﺿﻼ ٍل ﻣ ِﺒ‬sِ ‫ِٕا ِﱏ ِٕاذا ﻟ‬

Then verily, I should be in plain error (36:24).

َُُْ َ َ َ ْ َّ ْ ُ ‫ﺎن ۖ ٕا ّﻧَ ُﻪ َﻟ‬ ٌ ‫ﲂ َﻋ ُﺪ ٌّو ُﻣ ِﺒ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ ِ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺒﺪوا اﻟﺸﻴﻄ‬

You should not worship Shaitan (Satan). Verily, he is a plain enemy to you (36:60).

ُ ْ َٔ ٌ ‫ﴏ ٌاط ُﻣ ْﺴ َﺘ ِﻘ‬ َ ِ ‫وﱏ ۚ ٰ َﻫ َﺬا‬ ‫ﻴﻢ‬ ِ ‫َوا ِن اﻋ ُﺒﺪ‬

And that you should worship Me. That is the straight path (36:61). َ

َ ْ َٔ ْ َ َ ّ َ ِ ‫ﲂ‬ ْ ُ ‫ّاﻟ ِﺬي َﺟ َﻌ َﻞ َﻟ‬ ‫ﴬ َان ًرا‬ ِ ‫« اﻟﺸﺠ ِﺮ اﻻﺧ‬

He who produces for you fire out of the green tree (36:80).

َ َ ْ َ َْ ُْ ‫ﻮم‬ ٍ ‫ِﻴﻖ ْﳐ ُﺘ‬ ٍ ‫ﻳﺴﻘﻮن ِ« رﺣ‬

Pure sealed wine

They will be given to drink of pure sealed wine (83:25).

The great success

That is the great success (85:11).

ُ ‫ْاﻟ َﻔ ْﻮ ُز ْاﻟ َﻜﺒ‬ ‫ﲑ‬ ِ ٌ ‫ُﻗ ْﺮآ ٌن َﳎ‬ ‫ﻴﺪ‬ ِ

Glorious Quran

ُ ‫ٰ َذﻟ َِﻚ ْاﻟ َﻔ ْﻮ ُز ْاﻟ َﻜﺒ‬ ‫ﲑ‬ ِ

ُ َ َ ٌ َ ٓ ُ ْ ‫ﻮظ‬ ٍ ‫ ِﰲ ﻟ ْﻮ ٍح ﳏْﻔ‬O ‫َﺑﻞ ُﻫ َﻮ ﻗ ْﺮا ٌن ِﳎﻴﺪ‬

Nay! This is the glorious Quran. In Preserved Tablet (85:21, 22).

70

Use of the Adjective Phrases in Sentences of Daily Usage:

ِ ‫ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬ ‫ﺺ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬fَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ َُ

(Incomplete Phrase)

(Complete Phrase)

(Un-beneficial Sentence)

(Beneficial Sentence)

A hard working student

This is a hard working student.

A beneficial book

That is a beneficial book.

A new pen

This is a new pen.

A vast ground

That is a vast ground.

An expert doctor

Is this an expert doctor.

‫ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻏَ ْﲑُ ُﻣ ِﻔ ْﻴ َﺪ ٍة‬ ِ ‫ﺐ ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬ ٌﺪ‬ ٌ ‫ﻃَﺎﻟ‬ ِ ‫ﻓِ ٌﻊ‬Vَ ‫ﺎب‬ ٌ َ‫ﻛﺘ‬ ‫ﻗَـﻠَ ٌﻢ َﺟ ِﺪﻳْ ٌﺪ‬

‫َﻣْﻴ َﺪا ٌن َو ِاﺳ ٌﻊ‬

ِ ِ ‫ﺎﻫﺮ )ﺣ‬ (‫ﺎذ ُق‬ َ ٌ ‫ﺐ َﻣ‬ ٌ ‫ﻃَﺒِْﻴ‬ ii.

‫مﱞ‬wَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬

ٌ‫ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ُﻣ ِﻔ ْﻴ َﺪة‬

ِ ‫ﺐ ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬ ٌﺪ‬ ٌ ‫َﻫ َﺬا ﻃَﺎﻟ‬ ِ َ ِ‫ٰذﻟ‬ ‫ﻓِ ٌﻊ‬Vَ ‫ﺎب‬ ٌ َ‫ﻚ ﻛﺘ‬ ‫َﻫﺬا ﻗَـﻠَ ٌﻢ َﺟ ِﺪﻳْ ٌﺪ‬

ِ ‫ﻚ َﻣْﻴ َﺪا ٌن َو ِاﺳ ٌﻊ‬ َ ‫ذَﻟ‬

ِ ‫ﻫﻞ ﻫ َﺬا ﻃَﺒِﻴﺐ ﻣ‬ ‫ﺎﻫٌﺮ‬ َ ٌْ َ َْ

ِ ِ ‫ اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬is dual (ٌ‫)ﺗَـﺜْﻴِﻨَﺔ‬, ‫اﻟﺼ َﻔ ِﺔ‬ ّ ‫ ا ْﺳ ُﻢ‬is to be dual, e.g. ِ ‫ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬ ‫ﺺ‬ ‫ ٌم‬wَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬fَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ َُ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬

If ‫ﺻ ْﻮف‬ ُ ‫اﻟْ َﻤ ْﻮ‬

(Incomplete Phrase)

(Complete Phrase)

Two beautiful houses

Both these houses are beautiful.

Two lazy boys

Two lazy boys left.

Two new teachers

Two new teachers came

َِ ‫ﺎن‬ ِ َ‫ﺑـﻴـﺘ‬ ‫ﲨْﻴﻼَ ِن‬ َْ

‫َوﻟَ َﺪ ِان َﻛ ْﺴﻼَ ِن‬

ِ ‫ﻣ َﺪ ِرﺳ‬ ‫ﺎن َﺟ ِﺪﻳْ َﺪ ِان‬ َّ ُ ِ ‫ﺎن َﺷ ِﻔﻴـ َﻘ‬ ِ ‫َزوﺟ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ ْ َْ

َِ ‫ﺎن‬ ِ َ‫ﻫ َﺬان ﺑـﻴـﺘ‬ ‫ﲨْﻴﻼَ ِن‬ َْ َ

‫ﺐ َوﻟَ َﺪ ِان َﻛ ْﺴﻼَ ِن‬ َ ‫ذَ َﻫ‬

ِ ‫ﺟﺎء ﻣ َﺪ ِرﺳ‬ ‫ﺎن َﺟ ِﺪﻳْ َﺪ ِان‬ َّ ُ َ َ

ِ ‫ﺎن َﺷ ِﻔﻴـ َﻘ‬ ِ ‫ﻧَﻄَﺮ َزوﺟ‬ ‫ﺎن َإﱃ اﻟ ﱠﺴ َﻤ ِﺎء‬ ْ َْ َ

Two kind husbands

Two kind husbands looked towards the sky.

Two big mosques

Here are two big mosques.

‫َﻣ ْﺴ ِﺠ َﺪ ِان َﻛﺒِ ْ َﲑ ِان‬

‫ُﻫﻨَﺎ َﻣ ْﺴ ِﺠ َﺪ ِان َﻛﺒِ ْ َﲑ ِان‬

71 iii.

ِ ِ ‫ اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬is in plural (‫)ﲨَْ ٌﻊ‬, ‫اﻟﺼ َﻔ ِﺔ‬ ّ ‫ ا ْﺳ ُﻢ‬has to be plural (‫)ﲨَْ ٌﻊ‬, e.g. ِ ‫ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬ ‫ﺺ‬ ‫ ٌم‬wَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬fَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ َُ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬

ِ ‫اَﻟْﻤﻮﺻﻮ‬ If ‫ف‬ ُْ ْ َ

(Incomplete Phrase)

(Complete Phrase)

ِ ‫ﻣﺴﻠِﻤﻮ َن ﺻ‬ ‫ﺎﳊُْﻮ َن‬ َ ُْ ْ ُ

ِ ‫دﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﻠِﻤﻮ َن‬ ِ ‫ﺎﳊﻮ َن ِﰱ اﻟْﺒـﻴ‬ ‫ﺖ‬ َْ َ ُْ ْ ُ َ َ ُْ ‫ﺻ‬

Pious Muslims

Pious Muslims entered the house.

Expert doctors

Expert doctors read Al-Quran.

Expert teachers

Expert teachers taught.

Farmer men

These men are farmer.

ِ ‫ﻃَﺒِﻴـﺒـﻮ َن ﻣ‬ ‫ﺎﻫُﺮْو َن‬ َ ْ ُْ

ِ ‫ﻗَـﺮأ ﻃَﺒِﻴـﺒـﻮ َن ﻣ‬ ‫ﺎﻫُﺮْو َن اَﻟْ ُﻘ ْﺮآن‬ َ ْ ُْ َ

ِ ‫ﻣﻌﻠِّﻤﻮ َن ﺣ‬ ‫ﺎذﻗُـ ْﻮ َن‬ َ ُْ َُ

‫س ُﻣ َﻌﻠِّ ُﻤ ْﻮ َن َﺣ ِﺎذﻗُـ ْﻮ َن‬ َ ‫َد ﱠر‬

‫ﺎل ﻓَﻼﱠ ُﺣ ْﻮ َن‬ ٌ ‫ِر َﺟ‬

‫ﺎل ﻓَﻼﱠ ُﺣ ْﻮ َن‬ ٌ ‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَء ِر َﺟ‬ ‫ﻚ أ َْوﻻَ ٌد َﺷ ِﺮﻳْـُﺮْو َن‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوﻟَﺌ‬

‫أ َْوﻻَ ٌد َﺷ ِﺮﻳْـ ُﺮْو َن‬

Naughty boys

2.

They are naughty boys.

‫ب ُﺟ َﺪ ٌد‬ ٌ ‫ﻃُﻼﱠ‬

ِ ‫ب ُﺟ َﺪ ٌد ِ]ﳉَ ِﺎﻣ َﻌ ِﺔ ِﰱ َﻫ ِﺬﻩ اﻟ ﱠﺴﻨَ ِﺔ‬ ٌ ‫اﻟْﺘَ َﺤ َﻖ ﻃُﻼﱠ‬

New students

This year, new students took admission in the university

ِ ‫( ﻣﻄَﺎﺑـ َﻘﺔُ اِﺳ ِﻢ اﻟْﻤﻮ‬The Agreement of the Prescribed Noun and the ِ ‫اﻟﺼ َﻔ ِﺔ ِﰱ ا ْﳉِْﻨ‬ ‫ﺲ‬ ِّ ‫ﺻ ْﻮف َو‬ ُ َْ ْ َ ُ Adjective Noun in Gender)

ِ The gender of the object noun (‫ﻟﺼ َﻔ ِﺔ‬ ّ َ‫ا‬ ِ ‫اﻟْﻤﻮﺻﻮ‬ noun (‫ف‬ ُْ ْ َ

‫)اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬:

‫ )اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬must agree with the gender of the prescribed

72 i.

ِ ِ ‫ ﺍِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬is ‫ﱠﺚ‬ ٌ ‫( ُﻣ َﺆﻧ‬f.g.), ‫اﻟﺼ َﻔ ِﺔ‬ ٌ ‫ ُﻣ َﺆﻧ‬, e.g. ّ ‫ ا ْﺳ ُﻢ‬is to be ‫ﱠﺚ‬ ِ ‫ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬ ‫ﺺ‬ ‫مﱞ‬wَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬fَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ َُ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬

ِ ‫اﻟْﻤﻮﺻﻮ‬ if ‫ف‬ ُْ ْ َ

(Incomplete Phrase)

(Complete Phrase)

(Un-beneficial Sentence)

(Beneficial Sentence)

A hardworking student

Zainab is a hardworking student.

A new car

It is a new car.

‫ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ﻏَ ْﲑُ ُﻣ ِﻔ ْﻴ َﺪ ٍة‬ ٌ‫ﻃَﺎﻟِﺒَﺔٌ ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬ َﺪة‬

ٌ‫َﺳﻴﱠ َﺎرةٌ َﺟ ِﺪﻳْ َﺪة‬

ٌ‫َﺟ ِﺎﻣ َﻌﺔٌ َﻣ ْﻌُﺮْوﻓَﺔ‬

ٌ‫ﺐ ﻃَﺎﻟِﺒَﺔٌ ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬ َﺪة‬ ُ َ‫َزﻳْـﻨ‬ ٌ‫َﻫ ِﺬ ِﻩ َﺳﻴﱠ َﺎرةٌ َﺟ ِﺪﻳْ َﺪة‬

ٌ‫ﻚ َﺟ ِﺎﻣ َﻌﺔٌ َﻣ ْﻌُﺮْوﻓَﺔ‬ َ ‫ﺗِْﻠ‬

A famous university

That is a famous university.

An intelligent teacher

Rashida is an intelligent teacher.

A trustworthy wife

Is she a trustworthy wife?

ٌ‫ُﻣ َﺪ ِّر َﺳﺔٌ ﻓَ ِﻄْﻴـﻨَﺔ‬ ٌ‫َزْو َﺟﺔٌ اَِﻣْﻴـﻨَﺔ‬

ii.

ٌ‫ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ُﻣ ِﻔ ْﻴ َﺪة‬

ِ ‫اﻟْﻤﻮﺻﻮ‬ If ‫ف‬ ُْ ْ َ

ٌ‫َر ِﺷْﻴ َﺪةُ ُﻣ َﺪ ِّر َﺳﺔٌ ﻓَ ِﻄْﻴـﻨَﺔ‬

‫َﻫ ْﻞ ِﻫﻰ َزْو َﺟﺔٌ اَِﻣْﻴـﻨَﺔٌ؟‬

ِ ِ ٍ ‫( ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴﺔُ ﻣﺆﻧ‬dual f.g.), the ‫اﻟﺼ َﻔ ِﺔ‬ ِ ٍ ‫ ﺍِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬is ‫ﱠﺚ‬ َُ َ ّ ‫ ا ْﺳ ُﻢ‬has to be ‫( ﺗَـﺜْﻨﻴَﺔُ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠﺚ‬dual f.g.) also,

for example:

ِ ‫ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬ ‫ﺺ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬fَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ َُ

(Incomplete Phrase)

ِ َ‫ﲨﻴﻠﺘ‬ ِ ِ ‫ﺎن‬ ْ َ ‫ﺑِْﻨـﺘَﺎن‬

‫ ٌم‬wَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬

(Complete Phrase)

ِ َ‫ﲨﻴﻠﺘ‬ ِ ِ ِ ‫ﺎن؟‬ ْ َ ‫ن ﺑِْﻨـﺘَﺎن‬6َ ‫َﻫ ْﻞ َﻫﺎ‬

Two beautiful daughters

Are these two daughters beautiful?

Two real sisters

Frida and Jamila are two real sisters.

Two pious wives

Are they both pious wives?

Two active nurses

Both of them are active nurses.

Two fat cows

These two cows are fat.

ِ ‫ﺎن َﺷ ِﻘﻴـ َﻘ‬ ِ َ‫ُﺧﺘ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ ْ‫أ‬ ْ

ِ ‫ﺎن‬ ِ َ‫ﺎﳊﺘ‬ ِ ‫ﺎن‬ َ َ‫َزْو َﺟﺘ‬ َ ‫ﺻ‬

ِ َ‫ﺎن ﻧَ ِﺸﻴﻄَﺘ‬ ِ َ‫ﺿﺘ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َ ‫ﳑَُِّﺮ‬ ْ ِ َ‫ ِن َِﲰﻴـﻨَـﺘ‬6َ‫ﺑـ َﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ ْ ََ

ِ ِ َ‫ﺎن َﺷ ِﻘﻴـ َﻘﺘ‬ ِ َ‫ُﺧﺘ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ ْ ‫ﻓَ ِﺮﻳْ َﺪةٌ َو َﲨْﻴـﻠَﺔٌ أ‬ ْ ِ ‫ﺎن‬ ِ َ‫ﺎﳊﺘ‬ ِ ‫ﺎن؟‬ َ َ‫َﻫ ْﻞ ُﳘَﺎ َزْو َﺟﺘ‬ َ ‫ﺻ‬ ِ َ‫ﺎن ﻧَ ِﺸﻴﻄَﺘ‬ ِ َ‫ﺿﺘ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َ ‫ ِن ﳑَُِّﺮ‬6َ ‫َﻫﺎ‬ ْ ِ َ‫ ِن َِﲰﻴـﻨَـﺘ‬6َ‫ ِن ﺑـ َﻘﺮ‬6َ َ‫ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ ْ ََ َ

73 iii.

ِ ِ ‫ اِﺳﻢ‬has to be ‫ﱠﺚ‬ ٍ ٍ ‫( ﲨَْﻊ ﻣﺆﻧ‬plural f.g.) also, for example: َُ ُ ّ ُْ َ ‫ ﺍِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬is ‫( ﲨَْ ُﻊ ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠﺚ‬plural f.g.), the ‫اﻟﺼ َﻔﺔ‬

ِ ‫اﻟْﻤﻮﺻﻮ‬ If ‫ف‬ ُْ ْ

ِ ‫ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬ ‫ﺺ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬fَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ َُ

‫مﱞ‬wَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬

(Incomplete Phrase)

(Complete Phrase)

Pious daughters

They are pious daughters.

Hardworking women

Are they hardworking women?

Active teachers

All of these are active teachers.

Intelligent students

All of these are very intelligent female students.

Obedient wives

Are they obedient wives?

ِ ‫ﺑـﻨﺎت‬ ‫ﺎت‬ ٌ َ‫ﺻﺎﳊ‬ َ ٌ ََ

ِ ‫ﻫ ﱠﻦ ﺑـﻨﺎت‬ ‫ﺎت‬ ٌ َ‫ﺻﺎﳊ‬ َ ٌ ََ ُ

ِ ‫ات‬ ٌ ‫ﻧ َﺴﺎءٌ ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬ َﺪ‬

ِ ‫ات؟‬ ٌ ‫َﻫ ْﻞ ُﻫ ﱠﻦ ﻧ َﺴﺎءٌ ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬ َﺪ‬

ِ ِ ‫ﺎت‬ ٌ َ‫ﺎت ﻧَﺸْﻴﻄ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻫ َﺆﻻء ُﻛﻠﱡ ُﻬ ﱠﻦ ُﻣ َﺪ ِّر َﺳ‬

ِ ‫ﺎت‬ ٌ َ‫ﺎت ﻧَﺸْﻴﻄ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺪ ِّر َﺳ‬ ِ ‫ﺎت‬ ٌ َ‫ﺎت ﻓَ ِﻄْﻴـﻨ‬ ٌ َ‫ﻃَﺎﻟﺒ‬

ِ ‫ﺎت‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوﻟَﺌ‬ ٌ َ‫ﺎت ﻓَ ِﻄْﻴـﻨ‬ ٌ َ‫ﻚ ُﻛﻠﱡ ُﻬ ﱠﻦ ﻃَﺎﻟﺒ‬

‫ﺎت‬ ٌ ‫ﺎت ُﻣ ِﻄْﻴـ َﻌ‬ ٌ ‫َزْو َﺟ‬

iv.

ِ ‫اﻟْﻤﻮﺻﻮ‬ If the prescribed noun (‫ف‬ ُْ ْ َ

‫( ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠ‬m.g.) also for example: be ‫ﻛٌﺮ‬

‫ﺎت؟‬ ٌ ‫ﺎت ُﻣ ِﻄْﻴـ َﻌ‬ ٌ ‫َﻫ ْﻞ ُﻫ ﱠﻦ َزْو َﺟ‬

ِ ِ ‫ )ﺍِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬is ‫( ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ‬m.g.), the adjective noun (‫اﻟﺼ َﻔ ِﺔ‬ ّ ‫ )ا ْﺳ ُﻢ‬has to

ِ ‫ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬ ‫ﺺ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬fَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ َُ

‫ ٌم‬wَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬

(Incomplete Phrase)

(Complete Phrase)

Obedient son

Is Ahmad an obedient son?

‫اِﺑْ ٌﻦ ُﻣ ِﻄْﻴ ٌﻊ‬

‫ﺎع‬ ‫ُﺟْﻨ ِﺪ ﱞ‬ ٌ ‫ى ُﺷ َﺠ‬

‫َﲪَ ُﺪ اِﺑْ ٌﻦ ُﻣ ِﻄْﻴ ٌﻊ؟‬ ْ ‫َﻫ ْﻞ أ‬

ِ َ‫ﻫﻞ ُﳏ ﱠﻤ ُﺪ ﺑﻦ ﻗ‬ ‫ﺎﺳ ٍﻢ ُﺟْﻨ ِﺪ ًی ُﺷ َﺠﺎعٌ؟‬ ُْ َ ْ َ

A brave soldier

Is Muhammad ibn Qasim a brave soldier?

An expert driver

My friend Nadeem is an expert driver.

Vast road

It is a vast road.

ِ ‫ﺳﺎﺋﻖ ﻣ‬ ‫ﺎﻫٌﺮ‬ ٌَ َ

‫َﺷﺎ ِرعٌ و ِاﺳ ٌﻊ‬

ِ ‫ﺻ ِﺪﻳ ِﻘﻰ ﻧَ ِﺪ ْﱘ ﺳﺎﺋﻖ ﻣ‬ ‫ﺎﻫٌﺮ‬ ٌَ َ ُ ْ ْ َ ‫ع و ِاﺳ ٌﻊ‬ ٌ ‫َﻫ َﺬا َﺷﺎ ِر‬

‫ُﻣ َﻌﻠِّ ٌﻢ َﺷ ِﻔْﻴ ٌﻖ‬

‫َﻫ ْﻞ ُﻫ َﻮ ُﻣ َﻌﻠِّ ٌﻢ َﺷ ِﻔْﻴ ٌﻖ‬

A kind teacher

Is he a kind teacher

ِ ‫( ﻣﻄَﺎﺑـ َﻘﺔُ اِﺳ ِﻢ اﻟْﻤﻮ‬Agreement of the Prescribed and the ِ ‫اﻟﺼ َﻔ ِﺔ ِﰱ اِﺳ ِﻢ اﻟْﻤ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَ ِﺔ واﻟﻨ‬ 3. ‫ﱠﻜ َﺮِة‬ ِّ ‫ﺻ ْﻮف َو‬ ُ َْ ْ َ ُ َ َ ْ Adjective in the Definite and Indefinite Noun)

ِ In an compound/adjective (‫ﻰ‬ ‫ﺗَـ ْﻮ ِﺻْﻴﻔ ﱞ‬

‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫) ُﻣَﺮﱠﻛ‬, the agreement ought to be between both parts

ِِ ‫ف َو‬ ٌ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ‬ ُ ‫ ) َﻣ ْﻮ‬of it (‫ﺐ ﺗَـ ْﻮﺻْﻴﻔ ﱞﻰ‬ ٌ ‫ ) ُﻣَﺮﱠﻛ‬in proper and common noun (definite and indefinite ِ ِ ٍِ noun) (ٍ‫ﻜﺮة‬ َ َ‫)ا ْﺳ ُﻢ َﻣ ْﻌﺮﻓَﺔ َو ﻧ‬, e.g. ِ (ٌ‫ﺻ َﻔﺔ‬

74

‫اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟ َْﻤ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَ ِﺔ‬

ِ‫اِﺳﻢ اﻟﻨﱠ ِﻜﺮة‬ َ ُْ

The Proper/Definite Noun

The Common/Indefinite Noun

The pious son

A pious son

ِ ‫ﺻﺎﻟِ ٌﺢ‬ َ ‫اﺑْ ٌﻦ‬

‫ﺼﺎﻟِ ُﺢ‬ ‫اَْﻹﺑْ ُﻦ اﻟ ﱠ‬

ِ ‫ﺻﺎﻟِ ٌﺢ؟‬ َ ‫َﻫ ْﻞ ُﻫ َﻮ اﺑْ ٌﻦ‬

‫ﺼﺎﻟِ ُﺢ ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬ ٌﺪ‬ ‫اَﻹﺑْ ُﻦ اﻟ ﱠ‬

The pious son is hardworking

Is he a pious son?

ِ ‫ﺎن‬ ِ ‫ﺎﳊ‬ ِ ِ ‫ﺎن‬ َ َ‫اﺑْـﻨ‬ َ ‫ﺻ‬

ِ ‫ﺎن اﻟ ﱠ‬ ِ ِ ‫ﺎﳊ‬ ِ َ‫اﻻﺑـﻨ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ ْ َ ‫ﺼ‬

The two pious sons

Two pious sons

ِ ‫ﺎن‬ ِ ‫ﺎﳊ‬ ِ ِ ‫ﺎن؟‬ َ َ‫َﻫ ْﻞ أﻧْـﺘُ َﻤﺎ اﺑْـﻨ‬ َ ‫ﺻ‬

ِ ِ ‫ﺎﳊ‬ ِ ‫ﺎن ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬ َﺪ ِان‬ َ ‫اﻹﺑْـﻨَﺎن‬ َ ‫اﻟﺼ‬

Both the pious sons are hardworking.

Are you two pious sons?

All pious sons

Pious sons

ِ‫ﺼ‬ ‫ﺎﳊُْﻮ َن‬ ‫اَﻟْﺒَـﻨُـ ْﻮ ُن اﻟ ﱠ‬

ِ ‫ﺑـﻨـﻮ ٌن ﺻ‬ ‫ﺎﳊُْﻮ َن‬ َ ْ َُ

ِ‫ﺼ‬ ‫ﺎﳊُْﻮ َن ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬ ُﺪ ْو َن‬ ‫اﻟﺒَـﻨُـ ْﻮ ُن اﻟ ﱠ‬

ِ ‫ﻫﺆﻻء ﺑـﻨـﻮ ٌن ﺻ‬ ‫ﺎﳊُْﻮ َن‬ َ ْ َُ َ

The pious sons are hardworking.

These are pious sons.

The obedient daughter

An obedient daughter

The obedient daughter is active and truthful.

Is she an obedient daughter?

The two obedient daughters

Two obedient daughters

The two obedient daughters are active and truthful.

These two are obedient daughters.

The obedient daughters

Obedient daughters

The obedient daughters are active and truthful.

These are obedient daughters.

ُ‫ﺖ اَﻟْ ُﻤ ِﻄ َﻴﻌﺔ‬ ُ ‫اَﻟْﺒِْﻨ‬

ٌ‫ﺖ ُﻣ ِﻄْﻴـ َﻌﺔ‬ ٌ ‫ﺑِْﻨ‬

ِ ‫ﺖ ُﻣ ِﻄْﻴـ َﻌﺔٌ؟‬ ٌ ‫َﻫ ْﻞ ﻫ َﻰ ﺑِْﻨ‬

ِ ‫اَﻟْﺒِْﻨﺖ اَﻟْﻤ ِﻄﻴـﻌﺔُ ﻧَ ِﺸﻴﻄَﺔٌ و ﺻ‬ ٌ‫ﺎدﻗَﺔ‬ ْ َْ ُ ُ َ ِ َ‫ﺎن اﻟْﻤ ِﻄﻴـﻌﺘ‬ ِ ‫ﺎن‬ َ ْ ُ َ‫اَﻟْﺒِْﻨـﺘ‬

ِ َ‫ﺎن ﻣ ِﻄﻴـﻌﺘ‬ ِ ‫ﺎن‬ َ ْ ُ َ‫ﺑِْﻨـﺘ‬

ِ ‫ﺎن و ﺻ‬ ِ َ‫ﺎدﻗَـﺘ‬ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ‫ﺎن‬ َ َ َ‫اَﻟْﺒِْﻨـﺘَﺎن اﻟْ ُﻤﻄْﻴـ َﻌﺘَﺎن ﻧَﺸْﻴﻄَﺘ‬ ِ ‫ﺎت‬ ُ ‫ﺎت اﻟْ ُﻤﻄْﻴـ َﻌ‬ ُ َ‫اَﻟْﺒَـﻨ‬

ِ ‫ ِﺷﻄَﺎت و‬Vَ ‫اَﻟْﺒـﻨَﺎت اﻟْﻤ ِﻄﻴـﻌﺎت‬ ‫ﺎت‬ ٌ َ‫ﺻﺎدﻗ‬ ُ َْ ُ ُ َ َ َ ٌ

4.

ِ َ‫ﺎن ﻣ ِﻄﻴـﻌﺘ‬ ِ ِ ‫ﺎن‬ َ ْ ُ َ‫ن ﺑِْﻨـﺘ‬6َ ‫َﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺎت‬ ٌ ‫ﺎت ُﻣ ِﻄْﻴـ َﻌ‬ ٌ َ‫ﺑـَﻨ‬

ِ ‫ﺎت‬ ٌ ‫ﺎت ُﻣ ِﻄْﻴـ َﻌ‬ ٌ َ‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَء ﺑـَﻨ‬

ِ ‫( ﻣﻄَﺎﺑـ َﻘﺔُ اﻟْﻤﻮ‬Agreement of the Prescribed Noun and the Adjective ِْ ‫اﻟﺼ َﻔ ِﺔ ِﰱ‬ ِ ‫اﻻ ْﻋ ِﺮ‬ ‫اب‬ ِّ ‫ﺻ ْﻮف َو‬ ُ َْ َ ُ Noun in the Irab/Case-Ending)

In an adjective compound, the noun?), i.e. i.

‫اب‬ ْ ٌ ‫إﻋَﺮ‬

of

ِ ُ‫اﻟﺼ َﻔﺔ‬ ّ

must agree with its

‫ف‬ ٌ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ‬ ُ ‫ُﻣ ْﻮ‬

(prescribed

ِ ‫( اِﺳﻢ اﻟْﻤﻮﺻﻮ‬the qualified noun) is in nominative case (ٌ‫)ﺣﺎﻟَﺔٌ رﻓْﻌِﻴﱠﺔ‬, ُ‫اﻟﺼ َﻔﺔ‬ ِ ‫ف‬ ُْ ْ َ ُ ْ َ َ ّ has to be in nominative case (ٌ‫ﺣﺎﻟَﺔٌ رﻓْﻌِﻴﱠﺔ‬ َ َ ) also. For example:

If

75

ِ ‫ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬ ‫ﺺ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬fَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ َُ ِ ‫ﻃَﺎﻟِﺐ ﺻ‬ ‫ﺎد ٌق‬ َ ٌ

‫ ٌم‬wَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬ ِ ‫ﺻ ِﺎد ٌق‬ َ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻫ َﻮ ﻃَﺎﻟ‬

A truthful student

He is a truthful student.

Two truthful students

Both of them are truthful students.

Truthful students

They are truthful students.

ِ ‫ﺎن ﺻ‬ ِ َ‫ﺎدﻗ‬ ِ ِ ‫ﺎن‬ َ َ‫ﻃَﺎﻟﺒ‬

ِ َ‫ﺎن ﺻ ِﺎدﻗ‬ ِ ِ ‫ﺎن‬ َ َ‫ُﳘَﺎ ﻃَﺎﻟﺒ‬

ِ ‫ﺻ ِﺎدﻗُـ ْﻮ َن‬ ٌ ‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَء ﻃُﻼﱠ‬ َ ‫ب‬

ِ ‫ﻃُﻼﱠب ﺻ‬ ‫ﺎدﻗُـ ْﻮ َن‬ َ ٌ

ii.

If

‫ف‬ ُ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ‬ ُ ‫اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﻮ‬

is in the accusative case (ُ‫ﱠﺼﺒِﻴﱠﺔ‬ َ ‫اﻟْﻨ‬

case. For example:

ِ Incomplete Compound (‫ﺺ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬fَ

‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫) ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬ Nominative Case (ٌ‫ﺣﺎﻟَﺔٌ َرﻓْ ِﻌﻴﱠﺔ‬ َ) ِ ‫ﻃَﺎﻟِﺐ ﺻ‬ ‫ﺎد ٌق‬ َ ٌ

must also be in the accusative

Complete Compound (‫ ٌم‬wَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫) ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬ Accusative Case (ٌ‫ﺼﺒِﻴﱠﺔ‬ َ َ‫) َﺣﺎﻟَﺔٌ ﻧ‬

ِ ‫ﺻ ِﺎدﻗًﺎ‬ ُ ْ‫َرأﻳ‬ َ ‫ﺖ ﻃَﺎﻟﺒًﺎ‬

A truthful student

I saw a truthful student.

Two truthful students

I saw two truthful students.

All the truthful students (more than two)

I saw truthful students (more than two).

ِ ‫ﺎن ﺻ‬ ِ َ‫ﺎدﻗ‬ ِ ِ ‫ﺎن‬ َ َ‫ﻃَﺎﻟﺒ‬

ِ ‫ﻃُﻼﱠب ﺻ‬ ‫ﺎدﻗُـ ْﻮ َن‬ َ ٌ

iii.

ِ ُ‫ﻟﺼ َﻔﺔُ )اَﳊَﺎﻟَﺔ‬ ّ َ‫ا‬

ِ ‫اَﻟْﻤﻮﺻﻮ‬ If ‫ف‬ ُْ ْ َ

ِ ْ َ‫ﺻ ِﺎدﻗ‬ ِ ْ َ‫ﺖ ﻃَﺎﻟِﺒ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ ُ ْ‫َرأﻳ‬ َ ‫ﲔ‬ ِ ِ ]‫رأﻳﺖ ﻃُﻼﱠ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ َ ْ ‫ﺻﺎدﻗ‬ َ ً ُ َْ

ِ ِ ‫ اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬is in the genitive case (ُ‫)اَﳊَﺎﻟَﺔُ ا ْﳉَِّﺮﻳﱠﺔ‬, ‫اﻟﺼ َﻔ ِﺔ‬ ّ ‫ ا ْﺳ ُﻢ‬must also be in genitive case

(ُ‫)اَﳊَﺎﻟَﺔُ ا ْﳉَِّﺮﻳﱠﺔ‬. For example.

ِ Incomplete Compound (‫ﺺ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬fَ

‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫) ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬ Nominative Case (ٌ‫ﺣﺎﻟَﺔٌ َرﻓْ ِﻌﻴﱠﺔ‬ َ) ِ ‫ﻃَﺎﻟِﺐ ﺻ‬ ‫ﺎد ٌق‬ َ ٌ

Complete Compound (‫ ٌم‬wَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫) ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬ Genitive Case (ٌ‫ﺟ ِّﺮﻳَﺔ‬ َ ٌ‫) َﺣﺎﻟَﺔ‬

ِ ِ‫ﺐﺻ‬ ‫ﺎد ٍق‬ ُ ‫ﻧَﻄَْﺮ‬ َ ٍ ‫ت إِﱃ ﻃَﺎﻟ‬

A truthful student

I saw a truthful student.

Two truthful students

I saw two truthful students.

Truthful student

I saw truthful students.

ِ ‫ﺎن ﺻ‬ ِ َ‫ﺎدﻗ‬ ِ ِ ‫ﺎن‬ َ َ‫ﻃَﺎﻟﺒ‬

ِ ‫ﻃُﻼﱠب ﺻ‬ ‫ﺎدﻗُـ ْﻮ َن‬ َ ٌ

ِ ْ َ‫ت إﱃ ﻃَﺎﻟِﺒ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ ُ ‫ﻧَﻈَْﺮ‬

ِ ِ ‫ﻧَﻈَﺮت إﱃ ﻃُﻼﱠ ٍب‬ ‫ﲔ‬ َ ْ ‫ﺻﺎدﻗ‬ ُْ َ

Conjugation of Three Cases

‫َﲨْ ٌﻊ‬

Plural

ِ ‫ﺎل ﺻ‬ ‫ﺎﳊُْﻮ َن‬ َ ٌ ‫ِر َﺟ‬ Pious men

ٌ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬

Dual

ِ ‫رﺟﻼَ ِن‬ ِ ‫ﺎﳊ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َ َ ‫ﺻ‬ َُ

Two pious men

ِ‫و‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ

ٌ ‫ اَ ْﺷ َﻜ‬/‫ال‬ ٌ ‫اَ ْﺣ َﻮ‬ ‫ﺎل‬

Singular

Cases/ Types

A pious men

The Nominative Case

‫ﺻﺎﻟِ ٌﺢ‬ َ ‫َر ُﺟﻞ‬

ُ‫اَ ْﳊَﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟ ﱠﺮﻓْ ِﻌﻴﱠﺔ‬

76

ِ ْ ِِ‫ﺻﺎﳊ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ َ ً‫ِر َﺟﺎﻻ‬ Pious men

ِِ ‫ِرﺟ ٍﺎل‬ ‫ﲔ‬ َْ ‫ﺻﺎﳊ‬ َ َ Pious men

ِ ‫ﲔﺻ‬ ِ ْ َ‫ﺎﳊ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ َ ِ ْ َ‫َر ُﺟﻠ‬

ِ ‫رﺟﻼً ﺻ‬ ‫ﺎﳊًﺎ‬ َ َُ

Two pious men

A pious man

ِ ‫ﲔ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ َ ْ َ‫ﺻﺎﳊ‬ َ ِ ْ َ‫َر ُﺟﻠ‬

‫ﺻﺎﻟِ ٍﺢ‬ َ ‫َر ُﺟ ٍﻞ‬

Two pious men

A pious man

ُ‫ﱠﺼﺒِﻴﱠﺔ‬ َ ‫اَ ْﳊَﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟﻨ‬

The Accusative Case

ُ‫اَ ْﳊَﺎﻟَﺔُ اﳉَِّﺮﻳﱠﺔ‬

The Genitive Case

In short, in an adjective phrase, if the first word is attached with ‫ اَ ْل‬then the second will also have ‫ اَ ْل‬attached to it, e.g., ‫اَﻟْ ُﻤ ِﻔ ْﻴ ُﺪ‬

ِ ‫ﺎب‬ ُ َ‫اَﻟْﻜﺘ‬, and, as in the case of ٌ‫( ُﻣْﺒـﺘَ َﺪأٌ َو َﺧ َﱪ‬subject and

predicate), if the first word is ‫ﱠﺚ‬ ٌ ‫( ُﻣﺆﻧ‬feminine), the second should also be feminine. If the first word is dual or plural, the second should also be dual or plural in number, i.e., the two words should agree in gender and number with respect to each other.

ِ A New Rule: But when a prescribed (‫ف‬ ٌ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ‬ ُ ‫ ) ُﻣ ْﻮ‬is a broken plural (‫ﺗَﻜْﺴ ٍْﲑ‬

‫ )ﲨَْ ُﻊ‬and a non-human ِ‫و‬ ِ ) will be a feminine singular ( ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ feminine plural, the relevant adjective (ٌ‫ﺻ َﻔﺔ‬ َ ‫ﺚ‬ ٌ َ‫) ُﻣﺆﻧ‬. For example: ِ ٌ‫ت َﻛﺒِ ْﲑَة‬ ٌ‫ت َﻛﺒِ ْﲑَة‬ ٌ ‫ﺑـُﻴُـ ْﻮ‬ ٌ ‫َﻫ َﺬﻩ ﺑـُﻴُـ ْﻮ‬

Big houses

These are big houses.

Clean towns

Are these clean towns?

‫ﻚ ُﻣ َﺪ ٌن ﻧَ ِﻈْﻴـ َﻔﺔٌ؟‬ َ ‫َﻫ ْﻞ ﺗِْﻠ‬

ٌ‫ُﻣ ُﺪ ٌن ﻧَ ِﻈْﻴـ َﻔﺔ‬

ْ ‫ف‬ ٌ‫اﳉَ ِﻤْﻴـﻠَﺔُ َو ِاﺳ َﻌﺔٌ َو ﻧَ ِﻈْﻴـ َﻔﺔ‬ ُ ‫اَﻟْﻐَُﺮ‬

ُ ‫اَﻟْﻐَُﺮ‬ ُ‫ف ا ْﳉَ ِﻤْﻴـﻠَﺔ‬

The beautiful rooms

The beautiful rooms are spacious and clean.

The beautiful birds

The beautiful birds are on the trees.

The tall trees

The tall trees are in the jungle.

ِ ُ‫ات ا ْﳉَ ِﻤْﻴـﻠَﺔ‬ ُ ‫اَﻟﻄﱠﺎﺋﺮ‬

ِ ِ ‫ﻠﻰ اﻷ ْﺷ َﺠﺎ ِر‬ ُ ‫اَﻟﻄﱠﺎﺋﺮ‬ َ ‫ات ا ْﳉَﻤْﻴـﻠَﺔُ َﻋ‬ ‫اَْﻷ ْﺷ َﺠ ُﺎر اﻟْﻄَ ِﻮﻳْـﻠَﺔُ ِﰱ اﻟﻐَﺎﺑَﺔ‬

ُ‫اَْﻷ ْﺷ َﺠ ُﺎر اﻟْﻄﱠ ِﻮﻳْـﻠَﺔ‬

Examples from Al-Quran Al-Hakeem ×πtãθèùö¨Β Ö‘çŽß€ $pκŽÏù

There (in it) will be thrones raised high (88:13).

×πtãθàÊöθ¨Β Ò>#uθø.r&uρ

And cups/goblets set at hand (88:14).

×πsùθàóÁtΒ ä−Í‘$oÿsςuρ îπrOθèVö7tΒ ÷’Î1#u‘y—uρ

And cushions set in rows (88:15). And rich carpet (all spread out) (88:16).

7πtΒ§s3•Β 7#çtྠ’Îû

(It is) in books held (greatly) in honour (80:13).

¥οt£γsÜ•Β 7πtãθèùó÷£∆

Exalted (in dignity), kept pure and holy (80:14).

77

ِ In the first Quranic example, the word “ٌ‫ ” َﻣْﺮﻓُـ ْﻮ َﻋﺔ‬is “‫اﻟﺼَﻔ ِﺔ‬ ّ

‫ ”اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬and the word “‫ ” ُﺳُﺮٌر‬is “ ‫اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬

ٍ ‫ ”ﻣﻮﺻﻮ‬which is a broken plural (‫ْﺴ ٍﲑ‬ ِ َْ ) of ‫( ﺳ ِﺮﻳـﺮ‬couch). It is a non living being object ‫ف‬ ْ ‫ﲨ ُﻊ ﺗَﻜ‬ ُْ ُْ ٌْ َ ِ ‫) َﻏﲑ ﻋ‬. (‫ﺎﻗ ٍﻞ‬ َ ُْ ِ And in the second example, the word ٌ‫ﺿ ْﻮ َﻋﺔ‬ ُ ‫( َﻣ ْﻮ‬set at hand or placed ready) is ُ‫اﻟﺼ َﻔﺔ‬ ّ (the adjective), and the word

ِ ‫ﺗَﻜ‬ ٍْ ‫ْﺴ‬ broken plural (‫ﲑ‬

‫اب‬ ٌ ‫أ ْﻛ َﻮ‬

(cups/goblets) is

‫ف‬ ُ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ‬ ُ ‫اَﻟْ ُﻤ ْﻮ‬

(the prescribed) both form a

ِ ‫ )ﲨَْ ُﻊ‬of ‫ب‬ ٌ ‫( ُﻛ ْﻮ‬cup/goblet). It is a non living being object (‫) َﻏ ْﲑُ َﻋﺎﻗ ٍﻞ‬.

The Difference in Arabic Construction for a Simple Sentence ٌ‫ﺧ َﱪ‬ َ and its Noun (‫ف‬ ٌ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ‬ ُ ‫َﻣ ْﻮ‬

ِ ): ‫ﺻ َﻔﺔٌ َو‬

ْ ‫اَﻟ ُْﻤْﺒـﺘَ َﺪأَ َو‬ ُ‫اﳋََﱪ‬

‫ ُﻣ ْﺒـﺘَﺪأٌ َو‬and for Adjective

ُ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ‬ ُ‫اﻟﺼ َﻔﺔ‬ ِّ ‫ف َو‬ ُ ‫اَﻟ َْﻤ ْﻮ‬

(The Subject and the Predicate)

(The Prescribed and the Adjective)

The house is big.

The big house

The slave is pious.

The pious slave

The Muslim is truthful.

The truthful Muslim

The path is straight

The straight path

‫ﺻﺎﻟِ ٌﺢ‬ َ ‫اَﻟْ َﻌ ﱡﻢ‬

‫ﺼﺎﻟِ ُﺢ‬ ‫اَﻟْ َﻌ ﱡﻢ اﻟْ ﱠ‬

‫ﺖ َﻛﺒِ ٌْﲑ‬ ُ ‫اَﻟْﺒَـْﻴ‬

‫ﺻﺎﻟِ ُﺢ‬ َ ‫اَﻟْ َﻌْﺒ ُﺪ‬

ِ ‫ﺻ ِﺎد ٌق‬ َ ‫اَﻟْ ُﻤ ْﺴﻠ ُﻢ‬

ِ ‫ط ُﻣ ْﺴﺘَ ِﻘْﻴ ٌﻢ‬ ُ ‫ﻟﺼ َﺮا‬ ّ َ‫ا‬

ِ ُ ‫اَﻟْﺒَـْﻴ‬ ُ‫ﺖ اﻟْ َﻜﺒ ْﲑ‬

‫ﺼﺎﻟِ ُﺢ‬ ‫اَﻟْ َﻌْﺒ ُﺪ اﻟْ ﱠ‬

ِ‫ﺼ‬ ‫ﺎد ُق‬ ‫اَﻟْ ُﻤ ْﺴﻠِ ُﻢ اﻟْ ﱠ‬

ِ ‫ﻟﺼَﺮا ُط اﻟْ ُﻤ ْﺴﺘَ ِﻘْﻴ ُﻢ‬ ّ َ‫ا‬

The uncle is pious

The pious uncle

The aunt is pious

The pious aunt

ِ ‫اَ ْﳋﺎﻟَﺔُ ﺻ‬ ٌ‫ﺎﳊَﺔ‬ َ َ

ِ‫ﺼ‬ ‫اَ ْﳋَﺎﻟَﺔُ اَﻟْ ﱠ‬ ُ‫ﺎﳊَﺔ‬

78

ُّ َ ْ ُ َّ َ ُ ْ َ ‫ﺎﰲ‬ ِ ‫اﻻﺿ‬ ِ ‫۔ اﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‬3.2 The Relative Compound ‫ﺎف إِﻟ َْﻴ ِﻪ‬ ُ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫اَﻟ ُْﻤ‬

‫ﺎف‬ ُ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫اَﻟ ُْﻤ‬

The Determining and the Annexed Noun

The Determined Noun

ِ ‫ﷲ‬

‫َﻋ ْﺒ ُﺪ‬

‫ﺎف إِﻟ َْﻴ ِﻪ‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ُﻣ‬

‫ﺎف‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ُﻣ‬

(Possessor)

(Possessed)

The Relative Compound

‫ﺎﰱ‬ ‫ﺿ ِﱡ‬ َ ‫ﺐ ا ِﻹ‬ ُ ‫اَﻟ ُْﻤ َﺮﱠﻛ‬

79

Introduction to 2nd part of Unit No.03 In this 2nd part of unit, you will study about ‫ﺎﰱ‬ ‫ﺿ ِﱡ‬ َ ‫ا ِﻹ‬

‫ﺐ‬ ُ ‫( اَﻟْ ُﻤَﺮﱠﻛ‬the relative compound). It is

a compound of two nouns in which the first noun is attributed to the second one, e.g.,

ِ‫( ﻛِﺘﺎب ﷲ‬The book of Allah). ُ َ

After a brief introduction to this relative compound, there are some examples of both:

ِ ‫ )ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬from Al-Quran and from sentences incomplete and complete compound (‫ ٌم‬6َ ‫ﺺ َو‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬Vَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ُ َ

of daily usage. Subsequently, you will study the ten rules that apply to the relative

ِ compound/phrase or annexation or possessive expression (ٌ‫ﺿﺎﻓَﺔ‬ َ ‫)ا‬.

Objectives of 2nd part of Unit No.03 When you complete the study of this 2nd part of Unit No.03 completely and thoroughly, you will be able to gain the following objectives: 1.

to define the relative compound (‫ﺎﰱ‬ ‫ﺿ ِﱡ‬ َ ‫ْاﻹ‬

expression (ُ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓَﺔ‬ َ َ‫)ا‬.

2.

4. 5.

and the annexation/the possessive

ِ ‫ ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬in the incomplete compound (‫ﻗِﺺ‬V ‫)ﻣﺮﱠﻛﺐ‬, ِ‫ﺿ‬ to know how the relative compound ‫ﺎﰱﱞ‬ َ ‫ﺐا‬ ٌ َ ٌ ُ ٌ ُ َ

َ

‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫) ُﻣَﺮﱠﻛ‬. ِ ‫ ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬from Al-Quran Al-Hakeem. ِ‫ﺿ‬ to know the examples of ‫ﺎﰱﱞ‬ َ ‫ﺐا‬ ٌ َُ ِ ِ to know the examples of ‫ﺿﺎﰱﱞ‬ َ ‫ﺐا‬ ٌ ‫( ُﻣَﺮﱠﻛ‬relative compound) from sentences of daily usage. is used in complete compound (‫ ﱞم‬6َ

3.

‫ﺐ‬ ُ ‫)اَﻟْ ُﻤَﺮﱠﻛ‬

to know about the basic and fundamental rules which apply to the annexation (ُ‫ﺿﺎﻓَﺔ‬ َ ‫ ) َاﻹ‬or the relative compound (‫ﺎﰱ‬ ‫ﺿ ِﱞ‬ َ ‫ا ِﻹ‬

‫ﺐ‬ ُ ‫)اَﻟْ ُﻤَﺮﱠﻛ‬.

80

‫ﺿ ِﺎﻓ ﱡﯽ‬ َ َ‫ﺐ ْاﻻ‬ ُ ‫۔اَﻟ ُْﻤ َﺮﱠﻛ‬3.2

The Relative Compound/Phrase

‫ﺗَـ ْﻌ ِﺮﻳْـ َﻔﻪ‬

ِ ْ َ‫ﺿﺎﻓ ﱡﯽ ُﻫﻮ َْﳎﻤ ْﻮ َﻋﺔُ ْاﻹ ْﲰ‬ ‫ﺎف إﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬ ‫ﻹﺳ ُﻢ ﱠ‬ ُ ‫ﻀ‬ ُ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ﺎف َو ْاﻹ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟﺜَ ِﺎﱏُ ﻳُ َﺴ ﱠﻤﻰ اﳌ‬ َ ‫اﻷو ُل ﻳُ َﺴ ﱠﻤﻰ اَﻟْ ُﻤ‬ َ ‫ﺐ ا ِﻹ‬ ْ َ‫ ا‬،‫ﲔ‬ ُ َ ُ ‫اَﻟْ ُﻤ َﺮﱠﻛ‬ ُ ِ ِ ِ ِ‫ﺎب اﻟﻄﱠﺎﻟ‬ .‫ ﻗَـﻠَ ُﻢ َر ِﺷْﻴ ٍﺪ‬،‫ﺐ‬ ُ َ‫ ﻛﺘ‬:‫ﻣﺜْﻞ‬ The relative compound is a combination of two nouns. The first noun is called ‫ﺎف‬ ُ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫اَﻟْ ُﻤ‬ (the determined noun) and the second is called ‫ﺎف إﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬ ُ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫( اَﻟْ ُﻤ‬the annexed and the determining noun): e.g., book of the student, pen of Rasheed etc. In this compound/phrase, the first noun is attributed to the second one, as in these two examples, the book is attributed to the student and the pen is attributed to Rasheed. 17 This relation (attribution) between the two nouns is called ُ‫اﻹﺿﺎﻓَﺔ‬ َ (the annexation) .

ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ٍ ِ‫ﺎب ﻟِﻄَﺎﻟ‬ ٍ ِ‫ﺎب ﻃَﺎﻟ‬ ِ ْ َ‫ﲔ ْاﻹ ْﲰ‬ ‫ﺐ(۔‬ َ ‫َو‬ َ َْ‫اﻹﺿﺎﻓَﺔُ ﻫ َﻰ ﻧ ْﺴﺒَﺔٌ ﺑ‬ ٌ َ‫ﺐ )أى ﻛﺘ‬ ُ َ‫ ﻛﺘ‬:‫ﲔ َﻋﻠﻰَ ﺗَـ ْﻘﺪﻳْ ِﺮ َﺣ ْﺮف ا ْﳉَِّﺮ ﻣﺜْﻞ‬

The annexation (al-idhaafah) in a relationship between two nouns with a hidden particle of Jarr, e.g., “book of a student” means book for a student. Examples of the Relative Compound/ Phrase from Al-Quran Al-Hakeem:

ِ ‫ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬ ‫ﺺ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬fَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ َُ

Incomplete Compound

Complete Compound

Unbeneficial Sentence

Beneficial Sentence

The dwellers of the Town

And put forward to them a similitude: the (story of the) dwellers of the town (36:13).

‫ﲨُْﻠَﺔُ ﻏَ ْﲑُ ُﻣ ِﻔ ْﻴ َﺪ ٍة‬ َ ْ ُ َ ْ َٔ ‫ﺎب اﻟﻘ ْﺮﻳَ ِﺔ‬ ‫اﲱ‬ َ ‫أَ ْﻗ َﴡ ْاﻟ َﻤﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﻨ ِﺔ‬ ِ

The farthest part of the town

ٓ ‫ا َاي ِت َر ِّ ِﲠ ْﻢ‬ The signs of Lord

17

18

‫ ﱞم‬wَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬

ٌ‫ﲨُْﻠَﺔٌ ُﻣ ِﻔ ْﻴ َﺪة‬

َ ْ َ َ ْ َٔ ً َ َ ْ ُ َ ْ ْ َ ‫ﺎب اﻟﻘ ْﺮﻳَ ِﺔ‬ ‫اﴐب ﻟﻬﻢ ﻣﺜﻼ اﲱ‬ ِ ‫و‬ َ ‫« أَ ْﻗ َﴡ ْاﻟ َﻤﺪ‬ ْ ِ ‫ﺎء‬ َ ‫َو َﺟ‬ ‫ﻳﻨ ِﺔ‬ ِ

And there came a man running from the farthest part of the town (36:20).

ٓ ْ ِ َ ٓ ْ ِ ْ ْٔ َ َ َ ‫« ا َاي ِت َر ِّ ِﲠ ْﻢ‬ ‫ﳱﻢ « اﻳ ٍﺔ‬ ِ ‫وﻣﺎ ﺗﺎ ِﺗ‬

And never came an Ayat (sign) from among the Aya’t18 of their Lord (36:46).

Or called the genitive construction, because the first part of relative compound is ‫ﺎف‬ ُ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ اَﻟ ُْﻤ‬constructive, and the

second one ‫إﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬

‫ﺎف‬ ُ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ اَﻟ ُْﻤ‬is genitive.

“Aya’t” means proofs, evidences, verses, lessons, revelations, etc.

81

َ ْ ُ َ ْ َٔ ‫ﺎب اﳉَ ّﻨ ِﺔ‬ ‫اﲱ‬

َ ‫ﺎب ْاﳉَ َّﻨ ِﺔ ْاﻟ َﻴ ْﻮ َم ِﰲ ُﺷ ُﻐﻞ َﻓﺎﻛ ُِﻬ‬ َ َ‫ٕا َّن أَ ْﲱ‬ ‫ﻮن‬ ِ ٍ

The Dwellers of the paradise

Verily, the dwellers of the paradise, that day, will be busy with joyful things (36:55).

Lord of the heaven

Lord of the heavens and the earth, and all that is between them (37:5).

َّ ُ ّ َ َ ‫اﻟﺴ َﻤ‬ ‫ات‬ ‫رب‬ ِ ‫ﺎو‬ َ ْ َ ِ ِ‫« ﻓ ْﻀ ِﻞ ّﷲ‬

َٔ ْ َ َ َ َ ّ ُ ّ َ ُ َ ‫اﻻ ْر ِض َو َﻣﺎ َﺑ ْﻴ‬ ‫ﳯ َﻤﺎ‬ ‫ات و‬ ِ ‫رب اﻟﺴﻤﺎو‬ َ ْ َُْ َ َ ِ ‫واﺑﺘﻐﻮا‬ ِ‫« ﻓ ْﻀ ِﻞ ّﷲ‬

The Bounty of Allah

And seek the bounty of Allah (by working) (62:10).

The Day of Decision

Verily, the Day of Decision is a fixed time (78:17).

َْ ‫ َم اﻟﻔ ْﺼ ِﻞ‬Ãْ َ

َّ َ َ ْ َ ‫ﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻧ‬ ِ ‫ﴬة اﻟﻨ ِﻌ‬

The brightness of delight

َْ ‫اﰟ َر ِّﺑ َﻚ‬

The Name of Lord ÈÅ3ó¡Ïϑø9$# ÏΘ$yèsÛ

Feeding of the poor

َ َ َ ْ َ ْ َ ْ َ َّ ً ‫ِﻴﻘ‬ ‫ﺎات‬ ‫م اﻟﻔﺼ ِﻞ ﰷن ﻣ‬Ã ‫ِٕان‬

َّ َ َ ْ َ ْ ُ ُ ُ ْ َ ‫ﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻌ ِﺮف ِﰲ وﺟﻮ ِﻫ ِﻬﻢ ﻧ‬ ِ ‫ﴬة اﻟﻨ ِﻌ‬

You will recognize in their faces the brightness of delight (83:24).

َ َٔ ْ َ ْ ‫َﺳ ّﺒﺢ‬ Gْ ‫اﰟ َر ّ ِﺑ َﻚ اﻻ‬ ِِ

Glorify the name of your Lord, the most high (87:1).

ْ َ َ ٰ َ َ َ ُّ َ َ َ َ ‫ِﲔ‬ ِ ‫ ﻃﻌ‬G ‫وﻻ ﲢﺎﺿﻮن‬ ِ ‫ﺎم اﻟ ِﻤ ْﺴﻜ‬

And urge not one another on the feeding of the poor (89:18).

َ ُ ِ‫َر ُﺳﻮل ّﷲ‬

The Messenger of Allah

َ َٔ َ ‫ﲂ ْاﳊَﺎﻛِ ِﻤ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ ِ ‫ا ْﺣ‬

The best of the judges

َْ َ َ ‫ﻟ ْﻴﻠ ِﺔ اﻟﻘ ْﺪ ِر‬

The Night of Decree

َ َُْ ِ‫ﴫ ّﷲ‬ ‫ﻧ‬

َ َ ََ َ ُ ِ ّ ‫ﻓﻘﺎل ﻟ ُﻬ ْﻢ َر ُﺳﻮل‬ ‫ﷲ‬ But the Messenger of Allah said to them: (91:13).

َ َٔ ُ َ ّ َ ْ َ َٔ َ ‫ﲂ ْاﳊَﺎﻛِ ِﻤ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ ‫اﻟﻴﺲ‬ ِ ‫ﷲ ِﺑﺎ ْﺣ‬

Is not Allah the best of judges? (95:08).

َُ َ َ ْ ُ َ َ َ َ ْ َٔ َ َ ْ َ ْ َ ْ َ ُ َ ْ َ ْ َٔ َ ّ َ ّ ‫ﲪﻦ‬ َ ٰ ْ َّ َّ ْ ‫ﻟ ْﻴﻠﺔ‬O‫اك َﻣﺎ ﻟ ْﻴﻠﺔ اﻟﻘ ْﺪ ِر‬ ‫وﻣﺎ ادر‬O‫ﻟﻨﺎﻩ ِﰲ ﻟﻴﻠ ِﺔ اﻟﻘﺪ ِر‬Ê‫ِﻴﻢ ِٕاان ا‬ ِ ‫اﻟﺮﺣ‬ ِ ‫ِﺑﺴ ِﻢ ﷲِ اﻟﺮ‬ َ ْ َٔ ْ ِ ٌ ْ َ ْ َ ْ ‫« اﻟ ِﻒ ﺷ ْﻬ ٍﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺪ ِر ﺧﲑ‬

Verily, we have sent it (Al-Quran) down in the Night of Decree. And what will make you know what the Night of Decree is? The Night of Decree is better than a thousand months (97:1-3).

َْ َ ََُْ َ َ ‫ﴫ ّﷲِ َواﻟﻔ ْﺘ ُﺢ‬ ‫ِٕاذا ﺟﺎء ﻧ‬

The Help of Allah

When there comes the help of Allah (110:1).

The Deen of Allah

And you see the people enter Allah’s Deen (Islam) in crowds (110:2).

َ ِ‫ ّﷲ‬ ِ ‫ِد‬

َ َ ّ َ ْ َٔ َ َ َ ُ‫ﺎس ﻳَ ْﺪ ُﺧﻠ‬ ً ‫ﻮن ِﰲ ِد َّﷲِ أَ ْﻓ َﻮ‬ ‫اﺟﺎ‬ ‫وراﻳﺖ اﻟﻨ‬ ِ

82

Use of Relative Phrase in Sentences of Daily Usage:

ِ ‫ﻗَـﻠَﻢ ْاﻷﺳﺘ‬ ‫ﺎذ‬ َْ ُ

ِ ‫ﻠﻰ اﻟﻄﱠﺎ ِوﻟَِﺔ‬ َ ‫ﻗَـﻠَ ُﻢ ْاﻷ ْﺳﺘَﺎذ َﻋ‬

Teacher’s pen

The teacher’s pen is on the table.

The director’s office

The director’s office is near to my office.

The mosque of university

The mosque of the university is big and vast.

‫َس اﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟ ِﻞ‬ ُ ‫َرأ‬

‫َس اﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟ ِﻞ‬ ُ ‫َﻫ َﺬا َرأ‬

‫ﺐ اﻟْ ُﻤ ِﺪﻳْ ِﺮ‬ ُ َ‫َﻣﻜْﺘ‬

‫َﻣ ْﺴ ِﺠ ُﺪ ا ْﳉَ ِﺎﻣ َﻌ ِﺔ‬

The man’s head

ِ ‫ﺣﻜْﻢ اﻟْ ُﻘﺮ‬ ‫أن‬ ُ ُ

ِ ‫ﺐ ِﻣﻦ َﻣﻜْﺘَِﱮ‬ ٌ ْ‫ﺐ اﻟْ ُﻤﺪﻳْ ِﺮ ﻗَ ِﺮﻳ‬ ُ َ‫َﻣﻜْﺘ‬ ‫َﻣ ْﺴ ِﺠ ُﺪ ا ْﳉَ ِﺎﻣ َﻌ ِﺔ َﻛﺒِ ٌْﲑ َو َو ِاﺳ ٌﻊ‬ This is the man’s head.

ِ ‫اﳊ ُﻘﻮ ِق واﻟْﻮ ِاﺟﺒ‬ ِ ‫ﺎت‬ َ َ َ ْ َْ ‫ْﻢ اﻟْ ُﻘﺮأن ِﰱ‬ ُ ‫َﻫ َﺬا ُﻫ َﻮ ُﺣﻜ‬

The command of Al-Quran

This is the command of Al-Quran about rights and obligations.

The parent’s rights

The parent’s rights are very much.

The teacher’s respect

The teacher’s respect is really necessary.

The Prophet’s call

It is the Prophet’s call.

The teacher’s book

This is the teacher’s book.

The door of room

The door of the director’s room is opened.

‫ُﺣ ُﻘ ْﻮ ُق اﻟْ َﻮاﻟِ َﺪﻳْ ِﻦ‬ ِ ‫اِﺣِﱰام اﻷﺳﺘ‬ ‫ﺎذ‬ َْ ُ َ ْ ‫َد ْﻋ َﻮةُ اﻟﱠﺮ ُﺳ ْﻮِل‬

ِ ‫ﺎب اﻟْ ُﻤ ِﺪ ِّر ِس‬ ُ َ‫ﻛﺘ‬ ‫ب ﻏُ ْﺮﻓٍَﺔ‬ ُ ]َ

‫ُﺣ ُﻘ ْﻮ ُق اﻟْ َﻮاﻟِ َﺪﻳْ ِﻦ َﻛﺜِ ْﲑَةٌ َﺟ ًﺪا‬ ِ ِ ‫ُﺳﺘَ ِﺎذ ُﻣ ِﻬ ﱞﻢ ِﺟ ًﺪا‬ ْ ‫ا ْﺣ َﱰ ُام ْاﻷ‬ ‫َﻫ ِﺬﻩِ َد ْﻋ َﻮةُ اﻟﱠﺮ ُﺳ ْﻮِل‬

ِ ‫ﺎب اﻟْ ُﻤ ِﺪ ِّر ِس‬ ُ َ‫َﻫ َﺬا ﻛﺘ‬

‫ب ﻏُ ْﺮﻓَِﺔ اﻟْ ُﻤ ِﺪﻳْ ِﺮ َﻣ ْﻔﺘُـ ْﻮ ٌح‬ ُ ]َ

ِ ‫( ﻗَـﻮ‬The Rules of the Relative Compound/Phrase) ِ ‫اﻋ ُﺪ اﳌُﺮﱠﻛ‬  ‫ﰲ‬ ‫ﺐاﻹﺿﺎ‬ َ َ  

ِْ ): The following rules apply to the relative phrase or the annexation (ُ‫ﺿﺎﻓَﺔ‬ َ ‫اﻹ‬

1.

To convey the meaning of “of” ٌ‫ﺿ ﱠﻤﺔ‬ َ (dhammah), pesh (‫ )ﹹ‬is placed on the first word, and

‫ ِن‬6َ‫( َﻛ ْﺴَﺮ‬double kasra) (--◌ٍ --) on the second word, e.g. i. ‫( ﻗَـ ْﻮُم ُﻫ ْﻮٍد‬Hud’s people) ii. ‫ﺖ ُﳏَ ﱠﻤ ٍﺪ‬ ُ ‫( ﺑـَْﻴ‬Muhammad’s house). ِ ٍ ِ‫ﺎب ﻃَﺎﻟ‬ iii. ‫ﺐ‬ ُ َ‫( ﻛﺘ‬A student’s book). ِ iv. ‫ﺎس َر ُﺟ ٍﻞ‬ ُ َ‫( ﻟﺒ‬A man’s dress). ٍ‫( ﺻﻮت إﻣﺮأة‬A women’s voice). v. ْ ُ َْ

83 2.

As usual, if the second word has “‫أل‬ ْ ” attached to it, instead of ‫ ِن‬6َ‫( َﻛ ْﺴﺮ‬double kasra) (-

َ◌--), the single kasra(‫ )ﹻ‬is placed on the second word, e.g.

َ

ِ‫( ﺑـﻴﺖ ﷲ‬Allah’ house). ُ ُْ ِ‫( ﺧ ْﻠﻖ ﷲ‬Allah’ creation). ُ َ ِ ‫( ﺣﻜْﻢ اﻟْ ُﻘﺮ‬The command of Al-Quran). ‫آن‬ ْ ُ ُ ‫ﺼ ِﺪﻳْ ِﻖ‬ ‫( ِر َﺳﺎﻟَﺔُ اﻟ ﱠ‬The friend’ letter).

i. ii. iii. iv.

ِ‫ﱭ اﻟْﺒَـ َﻘﺮة‬ َ ََُ‫( ﻟ‬The milk of cow).

v.

In these incomplete sentences, every first word is ‫ﺎف‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ ُﻣ‬and every second word is

‫ إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬which is in genitive case (ٌ‫) َﺣﺎﻟَﺔٌ َﺟِّﺮﻳﱠﺔ‬. 3.

“‫ ”اَ ْل‬is never placed on ‫ﺎف‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫( ُﻣ‬determined noun). In the above mentioned examples, it

will be incorrect to say: ِ‫ﷲ‬ 4.

5.

‫ﺎف‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ُﻣ‬

Like “‫”اَ ْل‬,

‫ﺗَـْﻨ ِﻮﻳْ ٌﻦ‬

ِ ِ َُ ‫اَﻟﻠﱠ‬. ‫ﺖ‬ ُ ‫ اَﻟْﺒَـْﻴ‬،‫ْﻢ اﻟْ ُﻘ ْﺮآن‬ ُ ‫ اَ ْﳊُﻜ‬،‫ﱭ اﻟْﺒَـ َﻘَﺮة‬

‫ﺎف‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ ُﻣ‬. In the above mentioned ِ ‫ ِرﺳﺎﻟَﺔٌ اﻟ ﱠ‬،‫ﻟَﱭ اﻟْﺒـ َﻘﺮِة‬. examples, it will be incorrect to say, ‫ﺖ ﷲ‬ ٌ ‫ ﺑـَْﻴ‬،‫ﺼﺪﻳْ ِﻖ‬ َ َ َ ٌَ ِ ِ ِ If ‫ﺎف‬ ُ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ اَﻟْ ُﻤ‬is a ٌ‫( ﺗَـﺜْﻨﻴﱠﺔ‬dual) or ‫( ﲨَْ ٌﻊ َﺳ ٍﺎﱂ ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛ ٍﺮ‬sound plural masculine), ‫اﰉ‬ ٌ ‫ ﻧـُ ْﻮ ٌن إ ْﻋ َﺮ‬is dropped, (tanwin) they are also never placed on

e.g.

ِ Sentence with ‫اﰉ‬ ٌ ِ ‫ا ْﻋ َﺮ‬ ‫ﻛِﺘَ َﺎ] ِن اﻟﻄﱠﺎﻟِﺐ‬

‫ﻧُـ ْﻮ ٌن‬

ِ ِ‫َﻛﺘَ َﺎ] اﻟﻄﱠﺎﻟ‬ ‫ﺐ‬

‫ﻧُـ ْﻮ ٌن‬

Two books of the student.

Two books of the student.

The Muslims of India.

The Muslims of India.

Abi Lahab, two hands (111:1).

The two hands of Abi Lahab (111:1).

Two doors of the mosque.

Two doors of the mosque.

Two (female) students of the university.

Two (female) students of the university.

ِ ِ‫ﻣﺴﻠِﻤﻮ َن ا ْﳍ‬ ‫ﻨﺪ‬ ُْ ْ ُ ٍ َ‫ﻳَ َﺪ ِان ِأﰉ َﳍ‬ ‫ﺐ‬

‫َ] َ] ِن اﻟْ َﻤ ْﺴ ِﺠ ِﺪ‬

ِ َ‫ﻃَﺎﻟِﺒـﺘ‬ ‫ﺎن ا ْﳉَ ِﺎﻣ َﻌ ِﺔ‬ َ

6.

ِ Sentence without ‫اﰉ‬ ٌ ِ ‫ا ْﻋ َﺮ‬ ‫ُﻣ ْﺴﻠِ ُﻤ ْﻮا ا ْﳍِْﻨ ِﺪ‬ ٍ َ‫ﻳَ َﺪا أَِﰉ َﳍ‬ ‫ﺐ‬

‫َ] َ] اﻟْ َﻤ ْﺴ ِﺠ ِﺪ‬

‫ﻃَﺎﻟِﺒَـﺘَﺎ ا ْﳉَ ِﺎﻣ َﻌ ِﺔ‬

ِ ِ ٌ ‫ﻣﻀ‬, e.g., ‫( ﺳﻴﱠﺎرةُ اﻟْﻤ ِﺪﻳ ِﺮ‬the director, car). Here ُ‫ ﺳﻴﱠﺎرة‬is ‫ﺎف‬ ُ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ اَﻟْ ُﻤ‬always comes before ‫ﺎف اﻟَْﻴﻪ‬ َُ ْ ُ َ َ َ َ ِ ِ ُ ‫اَﻟْﻤﻀ‬. ‫ﺎف‬ ُ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ اَﻟْ ُﻤ‬and ‫ ﺍَ ْﻟ ُﻤ ِﺪﻳ ِْﺮ‬is ‫ﺎف اﻟَْﻴﻪ‬ َ ُ

84

7.

‫ﺎف‬ ُ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫اَﻟْ ُﻤ‬

may be

ٌ‫َﻣ ْﺮﻓُـ ْﻮع‬

(nominative), may be

‫ب‬ ٌ ‫ﺼ ْﻮ‬ ُ ‫ﻣْﻨ‬

(accusative) and may be

‫َْﳎُﺮْوٌر‬

(genitive), e.g.

‫ع‬ ُ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫اَﻟ ُْﻤ‬ ُ ‫ﺎف اﻟ َْﻤ ْﺮﻓُـ ْﻮ‬ ِ ِ ِ‫ﺎب اﻟﻄﱠﺎﻟ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ُ َ‫ﻛﺘ‬

‫ب‬ ُ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫اَﻟ ُْﻤ‬ ُ ‫ﺎف اﻟ َْﻤ ْﻨ‬ ُ ‫ﺼ ْﻮ‬ ِ ‫ﻗَﺮ‬ ِ ِ‫ﺎب اﻟﻄﱠﺎﻟ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ُ َ َ‫أت ﻛﺘ‬

‫ﺎف اَﻟ َْﻤ ْﺠ ُﺮْو ُر‬ ْ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫اَﻟ ُْﻤ‬ ِ َ‫ﻗَﺮأت ِﰱ ﻛِﺘ‬ ِ ِ‫ﺎب اﻟﻄﱠﺎﻟ‬ ‫ﺐ‬

The student’ book

I read the student’ book.

I read the student’ book

The door of the room.

Verily, the door of the room is opened.

I saw to the door of the room.

Verily, Allah’s book is beneficial.

I read in Allah’s book.

‫ب ا ْﳊُ ْﺠَﺮِة‬ ُ ]َ ِ ◌ِ ‫ﺎب ﷲ‬ ُ َ‫ﻛﺘ‬

Allah’s book.

8.

ِ ‫اﳊُ ْﺠَﺮِة َﻣ ْﻔﺘُـ ْﻮ ٌح‬ ْ ‫ب‬ َ ]َ ‫ا ﱠن‬ ِ ِ ‫ﻓِ ٌﻊ‬Vَ ِ‫ﺎب ﷲ‬ َ َ‫ا ﱠن ﻛﺘ‬

If the ‫اَﻟْﻴَ ِﻪ‬

ِ ] ‫ت َإﱃ‬ ‫اﳊُ ْﺠ َﺮِة‬ ْ ‫ب‬ َ ُ ‫ﻧَﻈَْﺮ‬ ِ ‫ﺎب‬ ِ َ‫أت ِﰱ ﻛِﺘ‬ ‫ﷲ‬ ُ ‫ﻗَﺮ‬

ِ ‫ﻀﺎف‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ ُﻣ‬is ٌ‫( َﻣ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَﺔ‬definite), the ‫ﺎف‬ َ ‫ ُﻣ‬will become ٌ‫( َﻣ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَﺔ‬definite), e.g., ‫ﺎب‬ ُ َ‫َﻫ َﺬا ﻛﺘ‬ ِ ‫( اﻟْ ُﻤ ِﺪ ِّرس‬This is the teacher’s book). Here ‫ﺎب‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ ُﻣ‬and it is ٌ‫( َﻣ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَﺔ‬definite) and ُ َ‫ َﻫ َﺬا ﻛﺘ‬is ‫ﺎف‬ ِ ٌ ‫ ﻣﻀ‬and it is also ٌ‫ ﻣﻌ ِﺮﻓَﺔ‬. ِِ ‫س‬ َُ َْ ُ ‫ اَﻟْ ُﻤﺪ ّر‬is ‫ﺎف إﻟَْﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺎف إﻟﻴﻪ‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ُﻣ‬ ِِ ‫س‬ ُ ‫اَﻟْ ُﻤﺪ ّر‬ ٌ‫َﻣ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَﺔ‬

9.

‫ﺎف‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ُﻣ‬ ِ ‫ﺎب‬ ُ َ‫َﻫ َﺬا ﻛﺘ‬ ٌ‫َﻣ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَﺔ‬ ِ There may be more than one ‫ﺎف اِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ ُﻣ‬in one ٌ‫ﺿﺎﻓَﺔ‬ َ ‫( ا‬Idhaafah), e.g. ِ ‫ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬ ‫ﺺ‬ ‫مﱞ‬wَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬fَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ َُ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬

Incomplete Compound

ِّ ‫ﻚ ﻳـﻮِم‬ ِِ ‫اﻟﺪﻳْ ِﻦ‬ ْ َ ‫َﻣﺎﻟ‬

Sovereign of the Day of Recompense.

‫ﻏُ ْﺮﻓَﺔُ َﻋ ِﻤْﻴ ِﺪ اﻟْ ُﻜﻠِّﻴَ ِﺔ‬

Room of the Dean of the faculty

‫ﷺ‬

‫ﺖ َر ُﺳ ْﻮِل ﷲ‬ ُ ‫ﺑِْﻨ‬

The daughter of Allah’s Prophet(‫)ﷺ‬

ِ ‫ﺖﺻ‬ ِ ‫ﺎﳊٍَﺔ‬ َ ‫ب ﺑـَْﻴ‬ ُ ]َ

The gate of Saleha’s home

Complete Compound

  ‫۔‬   ‫          ۔‬                

 All (Praise) is (due) to Allah, Rabb of the world. The Most Gracious, the Most Merciful. Sovereign of the Day of Recompense.

َِ ‫ﻏُﺮﻓَﺔُ ﻋ ِﻤﻴ ِﺪ اﻟْ ُﻜﻠِّﻴ ِﺔ و ِاﺳﻌﺔٌ و‬ ٌ‫ﲨ ْﻴـﻠَﺔ‬ ْ َ ْ َ َ َ َ

Room of the Dean of the faculty is spacious and beautiful.

‫ﷺ؟‬

ِ ‫ﺖ )رﺿﻰ ﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ( َر ُﺳ ْﻮِل ﷲ‬ ُ ‫َﻫ ْﻞ ﻓَﺎﻃ َﻤﺔُ ﺑِْﻨ‬

Is Fatima ‫ رﺿﻰ ﷲ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‬the daughter of Allah’s Prophet (‫?)ﷺ‬

ِ ‫ﺖﺻ‬ ِ ‫ﺎﳊٍَﺔ‬ َ ‫ب ﺑـَْﻴ‬ ُ ]َ ‫َﻫ َﺬا‬

This is the gate of Saleha’s home.

85

ِ ‫اﻟﻨِّﺪ‬ If ‫اء‬ َ

19 ‫ف‬ ُ ‫( َﺣ ْﺮ‬Interjection) comes before ‫ﺎف‬ ُ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫اَﻟْ ُﻤ‬, it is read as ‫ب‬ ٌ ‫ﺼ ْﻮ‬ ُ ‫ َﻣْﻨ‬, e.g. ٍ ‫ف ﻧِ َﺪ‬ ِ ‫ﺮف اﻟﻨِّ َﺪ‬ Relative Compound without ‫اء‬ Relative Compound with ‫اء‬ ُ ‫َﺣ ْﺮ‬ ُ ‫َﺣ‬ ِ‫ﻋﺒ ُﺪ ﷲ‬ ِ‫\ﻋﺒ َﺪ ﷲ‬ َْ َْ َ Allah’s slave O! Allah’s slave. ِ ِ ‫ﺐ اﳉَ ِﺎﻣ َﻌ ِﺔ‬ ‫ﺐ اﳉَ ِﺎﻣ َﻌ ِﺔ‬ ُ ‫ﻃَﺎﻟ‬ َ ‫َ\ ﻃَﺎﻟ‬ The students of the university O! Students of university. ِ‫رﺋِﻴﺲ اﻟْﻤ ْﺪرﺳﺔ‬ ِ ‫ﻴﺲ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﺪ َر َﺳ ِﺔ‬ ََ َ ُ َ َ ‫َ\ َرﺋ‬ The principle of the school O! principle of the school ‫أﺑـُ ْﻮ ﺑَ ْﻜ ٍﺮ‬ ‫َ\ اََ] ﺑَ ْﻜ ٍﺮ‬

10.

Abu Bakr (the father of Bakr)

O! Abu Bakr.

ِ ‫ﺻ ِﺪﻳﻖ‬ ‫أﺧﻰ‬ ُْ َ

11.

ِ ‫\ ﺻ ِﺪﻳﻖ‬ ‫أﺧﻰ‬ َْ َ َ

My brother, friend O! my brother’ friend. The adjective of a construct comes after the genitive; as: ِ i. ‫اﻟﺼﺎﻟِ َﺢ‬ ّ ‫( اﺑْ ُﻦ اﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟ ِﻞ‬The man’s good son).

ِ‫ﺼ‬ ‫ﺖ اﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟ ِﻞ اﻟ ﱠ‬ َ‫ﺎﳊَﺔ‬ ُ ‫( ﺑِْﻨ‬The man’s good daughter). ِ ‫اﻟﺴﻴ‬ ِ ِ ‫ﺎﺳﻴَ ِﺔ‬ iii. َ ّ ‫( ُﺣ ُﻘ ْﻮ ُق اﻟْ َﻤ ْﺮأة‬The women’s political rights). ِ ِ ٌ ‫ﻣﻀ‬, e.g., ‫ﺑـﻴـﺘُﻪ‬ ‫ﻀﺎف‬ َ ‫ اَﻟْ ُﻤ‬is often attached with a personal as ‫ﺎف اﻟَْﻴﻪ‬ َُ ُ َْ ِ garden), ‫ﻦ‬ ‫( ﻋ ْﻠ ُﻤ ُﻬ ﱠ‬their knowledge). ii.

12.

(his house), ُ‫ﺴﺘَﺎﻧُﻪ‬ ْ ُ‫( ﺑ‬his

When a noun is annexed to an attached personal pronoun, it will be in the following pattern:

SINGULAR

(Forms)

‫ﻗَـﻠَ ُﻤ ُﻬ َﻤﺎ‬

ُ‫ﻗَـﻠَ ُﻤﻪ‬

ِ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ َﻏﺎﺋ‬

‫ ُﻣﺜَ ﱠﲎ‬/ٌ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬

‫ﻗَـﻠَ ُﻤ ُﻬ ْﻢ‬

PLURAL

Their pen

Their pen

His pen

‫ﻗَـﻠَ ُﻤ ُﻬ ﱠﻦ‬

‫ﻗَـﻠَ ُﻤ ُﻬ َﻤﺎ‬

‫ﻗَـﻠَ ُﻤ َﻬﺎ‬

Their pen

Their pen

Her pen

‫ﻗَـﻠَ ُﻤ ُﻜ ْﻢ‬

‫ﻗَـﻠَ ُﻤ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ‬

‫ﻚ‬ َ ‫ﻗَـﻠَ ُﻤ‬

Your pen

Your pen

‫ﻗَـﻠَ ُﻤ ُﻜ ﱠﻦ‬

‫ﻗَـﻠَ ُﻤ ُﻜ َﻤﺎ‬

Your pen

Your pen

‫ﻗَـﻠَ ُﻤﻨَﺎ‬

‫ﻗَـﻠَ ُﻤﻨَﺎ‬

Our pen

19

DUAL

ِ‫و‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ

‫ﲨَْ ٌﻊ‬

Our pen

ِ ‫ﺻﻴَ ٌﻎ‬

3rd person m.

ِ ٌ ‫ﻣﺆﻧﱡ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ َُ ٌ ‫ﺚ َﻏﺎﺋ‬

3rd person f.

ِ ‫ﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛﺮ ﺣ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ َ ٌ ُ

Your pen

2nd person m.

Your pen

2nd person f.

My pen

1st person m. & f.

ِ ‫ﻗَـﻠَﻤ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ ُ ‫ﻗَـﻠَ ِﻤﻰ‬

ِ ‫ﺚﺣ‬ ‫ﺎﺿٌﺮ‬ َ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱡ‬

‫ُﻣﺘَ َﻜﻠِّ ٌﻢ‬

ِ If the noun is not ‫ﺎف‬ ُ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫اَﻟ ُْﻤ‬, it is called ‫ﻣﻨَ َﺎدى ُﻣ ْﻔَﺮٌد‬, ُ and is ٌ‫ َﻣ ْﺮﻓُـ ْﻮع‬, but has no ‫( ﺗَـْﻨ ِﻮﻳْﻦ‬tanwin), e.g., ‫ﺐ‬ ُ ‫( َ\ﻃَﺎﻟ‬O student), ‫( َ\ َُﳏ َﻤ ٌﺪ‬O

Muhammad). If ‫ﺎدى‬ ٌ ‫( ُﻣ َﻮﻧ‬feminine) is placed after \َ , e.g., ‫َ\اَﻳـﱡ َﻬﺎ‬ َ َ‫ اَﻟ ُْﻤﻨ‬is with “‫”اَ ْل‬, ‫ اَﻳـﱡ َﻬﺎ‬for ‫( ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ‬masculine) and ‫ أَﻳـﱠﺘُـ َﻬﺎ‬for ‫ﱠﺚ‬ ‫ﱠﺎس‬ ُ ‫( اﻟﻨ‬O mankind), ‫ﺲ‬ ُ ‫( َ\ اَﻳـﱡﺘُـ َﻬﺎ اﻟﻨﱠـ ْﻔ‬O self! O soul!).

86 If any preposition (‫ﺟ ٍﺮ‬ َ

13.

ُ ‫ ) ُﺣُﺮْو‬is prefixed to any attached noun with personal pronoun, ّ ‫ف‬ ٌ‫ﺿ ﱠﻤﺔ‬ َ (dammah) is changed into ٌ‫( َﻛ ْﺴَﺮة‬kasra), e.g., ُ‫( ﺑـَْﻴـﺘُﻪ‬his house), ‫( ِﰱ ﺑَـْﻴﺘِ ِﻪ‬in his house), ‫( ﺑـَْﻴـﺘُـ ُﻬ َﻤﺎ‬their house), ‫( ِﰱ ﺑـَْﻴﺘِ ِﻬ َﻤﺎ‬in their house), ‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫( ﺑـَْﻴﺘ‬your house), ‫ِﰱ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫( ﺑـَْﻴﺘ‬in your house), ‫ُ ﱠﻦ‬Ñُ‫( ﺑـُﻴُـ ْﻮ‬their house), ‫ِِ ﱠﻦ‬Ñ‫( ِﰱ ﺑـُﻴُـ ْﻮ‬in their house), etc. All the above attached personal pronouns are indeclinable (‫ﲎ‬ ‫) َﻣْﺒ ِ ﱞ‬, and remain in their original form even as ‫ﺎف اِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬ ُ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫اَﻟْ ُﻤ‬, however, they are considered in genitive place ‫ِﰱ َﳏَ ِّﻞ‬ ‫ َﺟٍّﺮ‬or ‫ َْﳎُﺮْوٌر‬ß‫ َﳏَﻼ‬. ِ The ٌ‫ﺿﺎﻓَﺔ‬ ْ ‫ف‬ ْ ‫ف‬ ُ ‫ َﺣْﺮ‬which is omitted/hidden. This ‫اﳉَِّﺮ‬ ُ ‫ َﺣْﺮ‬gives َ ‫( ا‬Idhafah) construction has a ‫اﳉَِّﺮ‬ ِ ِ meaning to the ٌ‫ﺿﺎﻓَﺔ‬ ْ ‫ف‬ ُ ‫ ُﺣُﺮْو‬that ُ‫ﺿﺎﻓَﺔ‬ َ ‫( ا‬Idhafah). There are three different ‫اﳉَِّﺮ‬ َ ‫ ا‬can have: 1. ‫( ِﰱ‬in) 2. ‫( ِﻣ ْﻦ‬from/part of) 3. (‫( ِل )اﻟﻼم‬for/belonging to). At the moment we have only taken one meaning of ُ‫ﺿﺎﻓَﺔ‬ ُ ‫َﺣ ْﺮ‬ َ ‫( اَِْﻹ‬the Idhafah) the ‫ف ) ِل( اَ ﱠﻟﻼ ُم‬ ِ ‫ ا ْﳉَِّﺮ‬which has the meaning of for/belonging to/possession. So we have say ‫ﺎب َرِﺷْﻴ ٍﺪ‬ ُ َ‫ﻛﺘ‬, it ِ literally means “the book belongs to Rasheed or Rasheed’s book) ‫ﺎب ﻟِﺮ ِﺷْﻴ ٍﺪ‬ َ ٌ َ‫ﻛﺘ‬. ِ ‫َرِﺷْﻴ ٍﺪ‬ ‫ﺎب‬ ُ َ‫ﻛﺘ‬ ‫ﺎف اِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬ ‫ﺎف‬ ُ ‫ﻀ‬ ُ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫اَﻟْ ُﻤ‬ َ ‫اَﻟْ ُﻤ‬ ‫َداﺋِ ًﻤﺎ َْﳎُﺮْوٌر‬ ‫ﻻَ ﻳـُﻨَـ ﱠﻮ ُن‬ Always Majroor

Does not accept tanween

‫ﻻَ ﻳـَ ْﻘﺒَ ُﻞ اَ ْل‬

Does not accept alif laam.

14.

ِِ In Arabic, the construction of ‫ﺎف‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ ُﻣ‬and ‫اﻟَْﻴﻪ‬

‫ﺎف‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ ُﻣ‬automatically takes care of the “ ’s”

or “of” as shown in the above mentioned examples.

15.

ِِ The construction of ‫ﺎف‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ ُﻣ‬and ‫اﻟَْﻴﻪ‬

‫ﺎف‬ ٌ ‫ﻀ‬ َ ‫ ُﻣ‬automatically implies specific person or thing.

Therefore, “he” is always added in English translation of this phrase, e.g. Relative Phrase

1 2 3 4 5 6

ِ‫ﺼﻼة‬ ‫إﻗَ َﺎﻣﺔُ اﻟ ﱠ‬ ِ ‫ﺎﻋﺔُ اﻟْ َﻮاﻟِ َﺪﻳْ ِﻦ‬ َ َ‫اﻃ‬ ِ‫اَرض ﷲ‬ ُ ْ ِ‫ﻃُ ْﻐﻴَﺎ ُن اﻟﻨﱠﺎس‬ ِ ‫دار‬ ‫اﻵﺧَﺮِة‬ َُ ِ ‫ﻃَ َﻌ ُﺎم اﻷَﺛْﻴ ِﻢ‬

English Translation The establishment of prayer. The obedience to parents. The Allah’s earth. The people’s rebellion. The house of the Hereafter. The sinner’s food.

87 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Note: 1. 2.

ِ ‫َﻛﻼَم‬ ‫ﷲ‬ ُ ِ ‫ﺳ ْﻮل ﷺ‬ ُ ‫ُﺳﻨﱠﺔُ اﻟﱠﺮ‬ ِ ‫اﻹﻧْﺴ‬ ِ ْ‫َرﻳ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ ُ َ ْ ‫ﺐ‬ ‫ﲪ ِﻦ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫اﻟ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ٰ ْ ‫ِذ ْﻛ ُ ﱠ‬ ِ ‫ﻀﻞ‬ ‫ﷲ‬ ُ ْ َ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﻳـَ ْﻮُم اﻟْ ِّﺪﻳْ ِﻦ‬ ِ ِ ِ‫ﺎب اﻟﻄﱠﺎﻟ‬ ‫ﺐ‬ ُ َ‫ﻛﺘ‬ ِ َ‫َﻋﻠَﻰ َﻣﻜْﺘ‬ ‫ﺐ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺪ ِّر ِس‬ ِ ‫]ب اﻟْﺒـﻴ‬ ‫ﺖ‬ َْ ُ َ ٍ‫اِﻣﺎم ﻣﺴ ِﺠﺪ‬ ََُْ

The Allah’s words.

The Messenger’s (‫ )ﷺ‬way. The man’s doubts. The remembrance of the Most Beneficent. The Allah’s Grace. The Day of Judgment. The student’s book. On the teacher’s desk. The door of the house. The Imam of the mosque.

The possessed noun (Mudhaf) takes different cases while the mudhaf ilaihi (the possessor) takes the genitive case only (see example no. 14, 15). The Mudhaf is definite by position, while the mudhaf ilaili can either be definite (ٌ‫) َﻣ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَﺔ‬

ِ َ‫)ﻧ‬. (See example no. 16, 17). or indefinite (ٌ‫ﻜﺮة‬ َ

‫ ِﺳ ٍﺮ‬sَ ‫اَﻟ ُْﻤ َﻜﺎﻟ ََﻤﺔُ ﺑَ ْﲔ َﺳ ِﻌ ْﻴ ٍﺪ َو‬

The Conversation Between Saeed and Yasir Translation Saeed: Is this Muhammad’s book? Yasir: No, this is Hamid’s book. Saeed: Where is Muhammad’s book? Yasir: It is there on the desk. Saeed: Where is Ammar’s note book? Yasir: It in on the teacher’s desk. Saeed: Whose pen is this? Yasir: This is the teacher’s pen. Saeed: Where is the teacher’s bag? Yasir: It is under the desk.

Arabic

ِ ِ ‫ﺎب َﳏَ ﱠﻤ ٍﺪ َﻫ َﺬا؟‬ ُ َ‫ أﻛﺘ‬:‫َﺳﻌْﻴ ٌﺪ‬ ِ ِ .‫ﺎب َﺣ ِﺎﻣ ٍﺪ‬ ُ َ‫ َﻫ َﺬا ﻛﺘ‬،َ‫ ﻻ‬:‫َ\ﺳٌﺮ‬ ِ ‫ﺎب ُﳏَ ﱠﻤ ٍﺪ؟‬ ُ َ‫ أَﻳْ َﻦ ﻛﺘ‬:‫َﺳ َﻌْﻴ ٌﺪ‬ ِ َ‫ ُﻫﻮ َﻋﻠَﻰ اﻟْﻤﻜْﺘ‬:‫َ\ ِﺳﺮ‬ .‫ﺎك‬ َ َ‫ﺐ ُﻫﻨ‬ َ َ ٌ ‫ أَﻳْ َﻦ َدﻓَْﱰُ َﻋ ﱠﻤﺎ ٍر؟‬:‫َﺳﻌِْﻴ ٌﺪ‬ ِ َ‫ ُﻫﻮ َﻋﻠَﻰ َﻣﻜْﺘ‬:‫َ\ ِﺳﺮ‬ .‫ﺐ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺪ ِّر ِس‬ َ ٌ ‫ ﻗَـﻠَ ُﻢ َﻣ ْﻦ َﻫ َﺬا؟‬:‫َﺳﻌِْﻴ ٌﺪ‬ .‫ َﻫ َﺬا ﻗَـﻠَ ُﻢ اﻟْ ُﻤ ِﺪ ِّر ِس‬:‫َ\ ِﺳٌﺮ‬ ‫ أﻳْ َﻦ َﺣ ِﻘْﻴـﺒَﺔُ اﻟْ ُﻤ ِﺪ ِّر ِس؟‬:‫َﺳﻌِْﻴ ٌﺪ‬ ِ ِ ِ َ‫ﺖ اﻟْﻤﻜْﺘ‬ .‫ﺐ‬ َ َ ‫ ﻫ َﻰ َْﲢ‬:‫َ\ﺳٌﺮ‬

‫‪88‬‬

‫َ ْ َٔ ْ َ ُ‬ ‫اﻻﺳ ِﺌﻠﺔ‬

‫َٔ ْ َ ْ َٔ َ ْ ٓ‬ ‫‪ e‬اﻻ ْﺳ ِﺌﻠ ِﺔ اﻻ ِﺗ َﻴ ِﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ا ِﺟﺐ ِ‬ ‫‪1‬ـ‬ ‫‪2‬ـ‬ ‫‪3‬ـ‬ ‫‪4‬ـ‬ ‫‪5‬ـ‬ ‫‪6‬ـ‬ ‫‪7‬ـ‬ ‫‪8‬ـ‬

‫‪QUESTIONS‬‬ ‫‪Answer the following Questions:‬‬

‫ِ‬ ‫ﺐ اﻟﺘـ ْﱠﻮ ِﺻْﻴ ِﻔ ﱠﯽ ـ‬ ‫َﻋِّﺮف اﻟْ ُﻤَﺮَﻛ َ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫اﻋ َﺪ اﻟْﻤﺘَـ َﻌﻠِّ َﻘﺔَ ِ]ﻟْﻤﺮﱠﻛ ِ‬ ‫ﺐ اﻟﺘـ ْﱠﻮ ِﺻْﻴ ِﻔ ِّﯽ ـ‬ ‫ﺑَِّ ْ‬ ‫ﲔ أ ََﻫ ﱠﻢ اﻟْ َﻘ َﻮ ُ‬ ‫َُ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫اُ ْﻛﺘُ ِ‬ ‫ف َوﺗَـْﺮِﲨْ َﻬﺎ َإﱃ اﻟﻠﱡﻐَ ِﺔ ا ِﻹ ْﳒﻠِﻴ ِﺰﻳﱠِﺔ ـ‬ ‫ﺐ ْ‬ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ ُ‬ ‫اﳉُ َﻤ َﻞ اﻟْ ُﻤﻔْﻴ َﺪةَ اﻟﱠِ ْﱵ ﻓْﻴـ َﻬ ّ‬ ‫ﺎاﻟﺼ َﻔﺔُ َواﻟْ َﻤ ْﻮ ُ‬ ‫اﳉﻤﻞ اﻟﱠِﱵ ﻓِﻴـﻬﺎ ﻣﻄَﺎﺑـ َﻘﺔُ اِﺳ ِﻢ اﻟْﻤﻮ ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫اﳉِْﻨ ِ‬ ‫ﺲ ﰒُﱠ ﺗَـْﺮِﲨْ َﻬﺎ َإﱃ اﻟﻠﱡﻐَ ِﺔ ا ِﻹ ْﳒﻠِﻴ ِﺰﻳﱠِﺔ ـ‬ ‫اﻟﺼ َﻔ ِﺔ ِﰲ ْ‬ ‫ﺻﻮف َو ّ‬ ‫َْ ُ َ ْ َْ ُ‬ ‫اُ ْﻛﺘُﺐ ُْ َ َ‬ ‫اﻟﺼ َﻔ ِﺔ ِﰲ اِﺳ ِﻢ اﻟْﻤﻌ ِﺮﻓَِﺔ واﻟﻨ ِ‬ ‫اﳉﻤﻞ اﻟﱠِﱵ ﻓِﻴـﻬﺎ اِﺳﻢ اﻟْﻤﻮ ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﱠﻜَﺮةِ ﰒُﱠ ﺗَـ ْﺮِﲨْ َﻬﺎ َإﱃ اﻟﻠﱡﻐَ ِﺔ ا ِﻹ ْﳒﻠِﻴ ِﺰﻳﱠِﺔ‬ ‫َْ ْ ُ َْ ُ‬ ‫ﺻﻮف َو ّ ْ ْ َ ْ َ‬ ‫اُ ْﻛﺘُﺐ ُْ َ َ‬ ‫اﳉﻤﻞ اﻟﱠِﱵ ﻓِﻴـﻬﺎ ﻣﻄَﺎﺑـ َﻘﺔُ اﻟْﻤﻮ ِ‬ ‫اﻹ ْﻋﺮ ِ‬ ‫ف و ِّ ِ ِ ِ‬ ‫اُ ْﻛﺘُ ِ‬ ‫اب َو ﺗَـْﺮِﲨْ َﻬﺎ َإﱃ اﻟﻠﱡﻐَ ِﺔ ا ِﻹ ْﳒﻠِﻴ ِﺰﻳﱠِﺔ ـ‬ ‫ﺐ ُْ َ َ ْ ْ َ ُ َ َ ْ ُ‬ ‫ﺻ ْﻮ َ‬ ‫اﻟﺼ َﻔﺔ ﰲ ْ َ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫اُ ْﻛﺘُ ِ‬ ‫ﻮف ُﰒّ ﺗَـْﺮِﲨْ َﻬﺎ َإﱃ اﻟﻠﱡﻐَ ِﺔ ا ِﻹ ْﳒﻠِﻴ ِﺰﻳﱠِﺔ ـ‬ ‫ﺻ ُ‬ ‫ﺐ ْاﻵ َ\ت اﻟْ ُﻘ ْﺮآﻧﻴﱠﺔَ اﻟﱠِﱵ ﻓْﻴـ َﻬﺎ ّ‬ ‫اﻟﺼ َﻔﺔُ َواﻟْ َﻤ ْﻮ ُ‬

‫ﺐ ْاﻵ\ ِ‬ ‫ت اﻟْ ُﻘ ْﺮآﻧِﻴﱠﺔَ اﻟﱠِﱵ ﻓِْﻴـ َﻬﺎ اﻟْ ُﺮﻤ ﱠﻛﺐ ا ِْﻹ َ ِ‬ ‫ﺎف اِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ( ﰒُﱠ ﺗَـ ْﺮِﲨْ َﻬﺎ َإﱃ اﻟﻠﱡﻐَ ِﺔ ا ِﻹ ْﳒﻠِﻴ ِﺰﻳﱠِﺔ‬ ‫ﻀ ٌ‬ ‫ﻀ ٌ‬ ‫ﺎف َو ُﻣ َ‬ ‫)ﻣ َ‬ ‫ﺎﰲ َ‬ ‫اُ ْﻛﺘُ ِ َ‬ ‫َ ُ‬ ‫ﺿ َ‬ ‫ْ‬

‫ِ‬ ‫ﻀ ٌ ِ‬ ‫‪ 9‬ـ اُ ْﻛﺘُ ِ‬ ‫ﺎﰲ( ﰒُﱠ ﺗَـ ْﺮِﲨْ َﻬﺎ َإﱃ اﻟﻠﱡﻐَ ِﺔ ا ِﻹ ْﳒﻠِﻴ ِﺰﻳﱠِﺔ ـ‬ ‫ﺐ ْ‬ ‫ﺿ ِﱡ‬ ‫ﻀ ُ‬ ‫ﺎف َوُﻣ َ‬ ‫اﳉُ َﻤ َﻞ اﻟﱠِ ْﱵ ﻓْﻴـ َﻬﺎ اﻟْ ُﻤ َ‬ ‫ﺐ ا ِﻹ َ‬ ‫ﺎف إﻟَْﻴﻪ )اَ َﳌﺮﱠﻛ ُ‬ ‫‪ 10‬ـ ﺑِ ِ‬ ‫ﺐ ِْ‬ ‫اﻋ َﺪ اﻟْﻤﺮﱠﻛ ِ‬ ‫ﺿ ِِ‬ ‫ﺎﰲ َﻣ َﻊ ِذ ْﻛ ِﺮ ْاﻷ َْﻣﺜِﻠَ ِﺔ َو ﺗَـْﺮِﲨْ َﻬﺎ َإﱃ اﻟﻠﱡﻐَ ِﺔ ا ِﻹ ْﳒﻠِﻴ ِﺰﻳﱠِﺔ ـ‬ ‫َّ ْ‬ ‫اﻹ َ‬ ‫ﲔ ﻗَـ َﻮ ُ َ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﺐ ﻧَﻈَﺮا َإﱃ اﻟْﻤ َﻜﺎﻟَﻤ ِﺔ ﺑﲔ ﺳﻌِ ٍ‬ ‫ُﺳﺘَ ِﺎذ واﻟﻄﱠﺎﻟِ ِ‬ ‫ﻴﺪ َوَ\ ِﺳ ٍﺮ‬ ‫‪ 11‬ـ ا ْﺟ َﻌ ِﻞ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﻜﺎﻟَ َﻤﺔَ ﺑَْ َ‬ ‫ُ َ َْ َ َ‬ ‫ﲔ ْاﻷ ْ َ‬ ‫ً‬

89

َٔ ْ َ ُ َ ْ َ َْ ْ َ ُ   ‫ اﻻﲰﺎء‬:‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮاﺑﻌﺔ‬ Unit No.04-The Nouns-4 ِْ ‫ﺐ‬ ‫ى‬ ‫اﻹ َﺷﺎ ِر ﱡ‬ ُ ‫۔ اَﻟ ُْﻤ َﺮﱠﻛ‬4.1 The Demonstrative Composite/Pharase

‫ى‬ ‫ﺐ ا ْﳉَﺎ ِر ﱡ‬ ُ ‫۔ اَﻟ ُْﻤ َﺮﱠﻛ‬4.2

The Genitive/Prepositional Composite ( 1) ‫ى‬ ‫اﻟ َْﻌ َﺪ ِد ﱡ‬

‫ﺐ‬ ُ ‫۔ اَﻟ ُْﻤ َﺮﱠﻛ‬4.3

The Addadi/Numeral Composite (1) ( 2) ‫ى‬ ‫اﻟ َْﻌ َﺪ ِد ﱡ‬

‫ﺐ‬ ُ ‫۔ اَﻟ ُْﻤ َﺮﱠﻛ‬4.4

The Addadi/Numeral Composite (2)

َ ‫إ‬ ‫ اﻷﺳﺘﺎذ اﻟﺪﮐﺘﻮر ﻋﺒﺪ اﻤﯿﺪ ﺧﺎن ﻋﺒﺎ‬:‫ﻋﺪاد‬ ِ ‫ﺎﺿﺮ ﺷﮑﯿﻞ اﺣﻤﺪ‬1‫ اﻷﺳﺘﺎذ ا‬:‫اﳌﺮ ِاﺟﻊ‬ Written by : Prof. Dr. Abdul Hameed Khan Abbasi Reviewed by : Mr. Shakeel Ahmad

90

ُ ّ َ ْ ُ َّ َ ُ ْ َ ‫اﻻﺷﺎ ِرى‬ ِٕ ‫۔ اﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‬4.1 The Demonstrative Composite/Phrase ِ‫اِﺳﻢ اﻹ َﺷﺎرة‬ َ ُْ

(The Demonstrative Pronouns)

‫ﻟِﻠْﺒَ ِﻌ ْﻴ ِﺪ‬

‫ﺎر اِﻟ َْﻴ ِﻪ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺸ‬

(The Demonstrated Noun)

ِ ْ‫ﻟِْﻠ َﻘ ِﺮﻳ‬ ‫ﺐ‬

(For distance)

(For near)

ِ ‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫ أ ُْوﻟَﺌ‬-‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫ ذاﻧ‬-‫ﻚ‬ َ ‫ٰذﻟ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫ أ ُْوﻟَﺌ‬-‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫ﻧ‬6َ -‫ﻚ‬ َ ‫ﺗِْﻠ‬

‫ ٰﻫ ُﺆﻻَِء‬-‫ ٰﻫ َﺬ ِان‬-‫ٰﻫ َﺬا‬ ‫ ٰﻫ ُﺆﻻَ ِء‬-‫ ِن‬6َ ‫ َﻫﺎ‬-‫ٰﻫ ِﺬ ِﻩ‬

ِ‫اِﺳﻢ اﻹ َﺷﺎرة‬ َ ُْ

(The Demonstrative Pronouns)

The Demonstrative Composite

‫ى‬ ‫ﺐ اﻹ َﺷﺎ ِر ﱡ‬ ُ ‫اَﻟ ُْﻤ َﺮﱠﻛ‬

91

Introduction to 1st part of Unit No.04 The 1st part of this Unit is about

‫ى‬ ‫اﻹﺷﺎ ِر ﱡ‬ َ ‫ﺐ‬ ُ ‫اَﻟْ ُﻤَﺮﱠﻛ‬

(the demonstrative composite/phrase)

ِ ‫)ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬. This composite consists of merely which is the type of incomplete composite (‫ﺺ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬Vَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ُ َ

two parts:

ِ ِ ِ ِ‫اﻹ َﺷﺎرة‬ َ ِْ ‫( ا ْﺳ ُﻢ‬the demonstrative pronoun/noun) and ‫( ُﻣ َﺸ ٌﺎر إﻟَْﻴﻪ‬The demonstrated noun). In these two parts of ‫ى‬ ‫ﺐ اِ َﺷﺎ ِر ﱞ‬ ٌ ‫ ُﻣَﺮﱠﻛ‬, there is always a coordination/ agreement (ٌ‫ ) ُﻣﻄَﺎﺑـَ َﻘﺔ‬in ‫اَﻟْ َﻌ َﺪ ٌد‬ ِ ِ (number), ‫ﳉِْﻨﺲ‬ ُ ‫( اَْﻹ ْﻋَﺮ‬case-ending). Or ُ ْ َ‫( ا‬gender), ٌ‫( اَﻟْ ُﻮ ْﺳ َﻌﺔ‬the capacity, ٌ‫ ) َﻣ ْﻌﺮﻓَﺔٌ َوﻧَﻜَﺮة‬and in ‫اب‬ (Declension) Insha Allah, you will find that all the sentences in this unit confirm to the above mentioned four rules.

Objectives of 1st part of Unit No.04 After completing this first part of Unit No.04, you would be able: 1. 2.

to define ‫ى‬ ‫اﻹﺷﺎ ِر ﱡ‬ َ

‫ﺐ‬ ُ ‫( اَﻟْ ُﻤَﺮﱠﻛ‬the demonstrative composite). ِِ ٍ ِ ِ to identify the two parts of ‫ى‬ ‫ﺐ اِ َﺷﺎ ِر ﱞ‬ ُ ‫ ُﻣَﺮﱠﻛ‬: ‫ ا ْﺳ ُﻢ ا َﺷ َﺎرة‬and ‫ ُﻣ َﺸ ٌﺎر إﻟَْﻴﻪ‬.

3.

to present the examples of demonstrative composite from Al-Quran Al-Hakeem.

4.

to present the examples of demonstrative phrase from daily usage sentences.

5.

to

know

(‫اﻟْﺒَﻌِْﻴ ِﺪ‬

about

the

ِ ْ‫اﻹ َﺷﺎرة ﻟِْﻠ َﻘ ِﺮﻳ‬ ‫ﺐ َو‬ ْ ). َ ِْ ُ‫أﲰَﺎء‬

demonstrative

pronouns

for

both

near

and

far.

92

ِْ ‫ﺐ‬ ‫ى‬ ‫اﻹ َﺷﺎ ِر ﱡ‬ ُ ‫۔ اَﻟ ُْﻤ َﺮﱠﻛ‬4.1

The Demonstrative Composite

.‫ى ُﻫ َﻮ َْﳎ ُﻤ ْﻮ َﻋﺔُ اِ ْﺳ ِﻢ ا ِﻹ َﺷ َﺎرةِ َو ُﻣ َﺸﺎ ٍر إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬ ‫ﺐ ا ِﻹ َﺷﺎ ِر ﱡ‬ ُ ‫اَﻟْ ُﻤ َﺮﱠﻛ‬ ِْ ‫( اِ ْﺳﻢ‬the demonstrating The demonstrative composite/phrase is the combination of ِ‫ﺎرة‬ َ ‫اﻹ َﺷ‬ ُ ِ ِ ِ ِ pronoun) and ‫ﺎر إﻟَْﻴﻪ‬ َ ‫( ذَﻟ‬that ُ َ‫( َﻫ َﺬا اﻟْﻜﺘ‬this book), ‫ﻚ اﻟْ َﻘﻠَ ُﻢ‬ ٌ ‫( ُﻣ َﺸ‬the demonstrated noun), e.g., ‫ﺎب‬ ِ pen), ‫ب‬ ُ ‫ﻚ اﻟِّﺮ َﺟ‬ َ ِ‫( اُْوﻟَﺌ‬those men), etc. ُ َ‫( ُﻫ ُﺆﻻَء اﻟﻄﱡﻼ‬these students), ‫ﺎل‬ ِ In these examples, the first word is called ِ‫ﺎرة‬ َ ‫ ا ْﺳ ُﻢ‬and second word is ‫ ُﻣ َﺸ ٌﺎر إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬. When َ ‫اﻹﺷ‬ these two words are joined together, they constitute a composite or a phrase or a sentence

ِ ‫ﺺ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬Vَ ‫ﺐ‬ ُ ‫( ُﻣَﺮﱠﻛ‬incomplete composite/phrase/ sentence). This kind of sentence is known as ٍ‫ﲨْﻠَﺔٌ َﻏ ْﲑُ ُﻣ ِﻔ ْﻴ َﺪة‬ ُ (unbeneficial sentence). So, the demonstrative ِ composite is a kind of incomplete composite (ُ‫ﺼﺔ‬ ُ َ‫)اَﻟْ ُﻤَﺮﱠﻛﺒ‬. َ ‫ﺎت اﻟﻨﱠﺎﻗ‬

which is called

Uses of Demonstrative Phrase in Sentences of Daily Usage

1. ‫( َﻫ َﺬا‬This)

ِ ‫ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬ ‫ﺺ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬fَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ َُ ‫َﻫ َﺬا اﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟ ُﻞ‬ ِ ‫ﺎب‬ ُ َ‫َﻫ َﺬا اﻟْﻜﺘ‬

In complete Composite This man This book

‫ﺎب‬ ُ َ‫َﻫ َﺬا اﻟْﺒ‬ ‫َﻫ َﺬا اﻟْ َﻌ ِﻤْﻴ ُﺪ‬

This door

‫ﺐ‬ ُ َ‫َﻫ َﺬا اﻟْ َﻤﻜْﺘ‬

This office

This Dean

ِ ‫( َﻫ َﺬ‬These two m.) 2. ‫ان‬ ِ ‫ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬ ‫ﺺ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬fَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ َُ ِ ِ‫ﻫ َﺬ ِان اﻟﻄﱠﺎﻟ‬ ‫ﺒﺎن‬ َ

‫َﻫ َﺬ ِان اﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟﻼَ ِن‬ ِ ‫ﻫ َﺬ ِان اﻟْﻤ َﺪ ِرﺳ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َ َّ ُ ِ ‫ﻫ َﺬ ِان اﻟْﻌﺎﻟِﻤ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َ َ َ

In complete Composite These two students These two men These two teachers These two scholars

‫ ٌم‬wَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬ ‫َﻫ َﺬا اﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟ ُﻞ ِﻣ ْﻦ اُ ْﺳَﺮﺗِﻰ‬

ِ ‫ب اﻟْﻤ‬ ِ ِ َ‫َﻫ َﺬا اﻟْ ِﻜﺘ‬ ‫ﺎﺟ ْﺴﺘِ ِﲑ‬ ُ َ َ‫ﺎب ﻟﻄﱡﻼ‬

ِ ‫َﻫ َﺬا اﻟْﺒﺎب ِﻣﻦ اَﺑْـﻮ‬ ‫اب اﻟْ َﻤ ْﺴ ِﺠ ِﺪ‬ َ ْ ُ َ ‫َﻫ َﺬا اﻟْ َﻌ ِﻤْﻴ ُﺪ ِﻣ ْﻦ ْاﻷَ َﺳﺎﺗِ َﺬ ِة‬ ‫ﺐ ﻟِ ُﻤ ِﺪﻳْ ِﺮ‬ ُ َ‫َﻫ َﺬا اﻟْ َﻤﻜْﺘ‬ ‫اﻹﺳﻼَِﻣ ِﻰ‬ ْ ‫اﻟْ َﻤ ْﺮَﻛ ِﺰ‬ ‫ ٌم‬wَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬

Complete Composite This man is from my family. This book is for the M.A. students. This door is one among the doors of the mosque. This Dean is from teachers. This office is for the Director of Islamic Center.

Complete Composite

ِ ِ ِ ِ ‫ﺎن ِﻣﻦ ﻃُﻼ‬ ‫ﱠب اﻟ َﺪ ْﻛﺘُـ ْﻮَراﻩ‬ َ َ‫ َﻫ َﺬان اﻟﻄﱠﺎﻟﺒ‬These two students are

ً‫َﻫ َﺬ ِان اﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟﻼَ ِن ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬ َﺪ ِان ِﺟﺪا‬ ِ ‫ﻫ َﺬ ِان اﻟْﻤ َﺪ ِرﺳ‬ ‫ﺎن ِﻣ ْﻦ َ]ﻛِ ْﺴﺘَﺎ َن‬ َ َّ ُ

ِ ِِ ِ ِ ‫اﻹﺳﻼَِم‬ ْ ‫َﻫ َﺬان اﻟْ َﻌﺎﻟ َﻤﺎن ﻣﻦ ﻋُﻠَ َﻤﺎء‬

from the students of Ph.D.

These two men are very hard working. These two teachers are from Pakistan. These two scholars are from the scholars of Islam.

93

‫َﻫ َﺬ ِان اﻟﺘِّْﻠ ِﻤْﻴ َﺬ ِان‬

These two pupils

ِ ‫ﻫ َﺬ ِان اﻟﺘِّْﻠ ِﻤﻴ‬ ‫ﺬان َﺷ ِﺮﻳْـَﺮ ِان‬ َ ْ

These two pupils are naughty.

‫ ٌم‬wَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬

Complete Composite

3. ‫( َﻫ ُﺆﻻَ ِء‬These all)

ِ ‫ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬ ‫ﺺ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬fَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ َُ ‫ﺎل‬ ُ ‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَ ِء اﻟِّﺮ َﺟ‬ ِ ُ‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَء اﻟْﻌُﻠَ َﻤﺎء‬

Incomplete Composite These men

‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَِء‬ ‫اﻟ ﱡ‬ ُ‫ﺼﻠَ َﺤﺎء‬ ِ ِ ُ‫ُﻫ ُﺆﻻَء ْاﻷَﻃّﺒَﺎء‬ ِ ‫ب‬ ُ َ‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَء اﻟﻄﱡﻼ‬

These pious (people)

These scholars

These doctors These students

4. ‫( َﻫ ِﺬ ِﻩ‬This)

ِ ‫ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬ ‫ﺺ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬fَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ َُ ُ‫َﻫ ِﺬ ِﻩ اﻟﻄﱠﺎﻟِﺒَﺔ‬ ُ‫ّﻫ ِﺬ ِﻩ اﻟ ﱠﺴﻴَ َﺎرة‬ ُ‫َﻫ ِﺬ ِﻩ ا ْﳉَ ِﺎﻣ َﻌﺔ‬

In complete Composite This student

ِ ِِ ‫ﺎت‬ ُ ‫َﻫﺬﻩ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﻌﻠّ َﻤ‬

These teachers

ِِ ‫ﺎت‬ ٌ ‫ﺿ‬ َ ‫َﻫﺬﻩ اﻟ ُْﻤ َﻤِّﺮ‬

This car This university

These nurses

5. ‫ ِن‬w‫ﺎ‬ َ ‫( َﻫ‬These)

ِ ‫ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬ ‫ﺺ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬fَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ َُ ِ َ‫ ِن اﻟﻄﱠﺎﻟِﺒـﺘ‬6‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َ ‫َﻫ‬ َ ِ َ‫ ِن اﻟﻄﱠﺎ ِوﻟَﺘ‬6‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َ ‫َﻫ‬ ‫ ِن‬6َ ‫ ِن اﻟﺘِّْﻠ ِﻤْﻴ َﺬ‬6َ ‫َﻫﺎ‬ ِ ‫ ِن اﻟﻨﱠﺎﻓِ َﺬ‬6‫ﺎ‬ ‫ن‬6 َ ‫َﻫ‬

Incomplete Composite These two students These two tables These two pupils These two windows

‫ﺎل ُﻛﻠﱡ ُﻬ ْﻢ ِﻣ َﻦ َ]ﻛِ ْﺴﺘَﺎ َن‬ ُ ‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَِء اﻟِّﺮ َﺟ‬

All these men are from Pakistan. These scholars are from the scholars of Tafseer and Hadith.

ِِ ِ ‫ﲔ‬ ‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَ ِء اﻟ ﱡ‬ َ ْ ‫ﺼﻠَ َﺤﺎءُ ُﻛﻠﱡ ُﻬ ْﻢ ﻣ َﻦ اﻟ ُْﻤ ْﺴﻠﻤ‬

All these pious people are Muslims.

ِ ‫ﻫﺆﻻَِء ْاﻷ‬ ‫َﻃّﺒَﺎءُ ِﻣ ْﻦ اِﻳْـ َﺮا َن‬ ََ ِ ‫ب ِﻣ ْﻦ‬ ُ َ‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَء اﻟﻄﱡﻼ‬ ‫ﻃُﻼﱠ ِب اﻟْﺒَ َﻜﺎﻟُ ْﻮِرﻳـُ ْﻮ ِس‬

These doctors are from Iran. These students are from the B.A. students.

‫ ٌم‬wَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬ ً‫َﻫ ِﺬ ِﻩ اﻟﻄﱠﺎﻟِﺒَﺔُ ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬ ﱠﺪةٌ ِﺟﺪا‬ ِ ‫ﻫ ِﺬ ِﻩ اﻟ ﱠﺴﻴﺎرةُ ﻣﺼﻨُـﻮﻋﺔٌ ِﻣﻦ اﻟﻴ‬ ‫ﺎ]ن‬ َ َ َ َْ ْ َ ََ ِ ‫اﳉ ِﺎﻣﻌ‬ ِ ِ ِِ ‫ﺎت‬ َ َْ ‫َﻫﺬﻩ ا ْﳉَﺎﻣ َﻌﺔ ﻣ َﻦ‬ ‫ا ِﻹ ْﺳﻼَِﻣﻴﱠ ِﺔ‬ ِ ِ ِِ ً‫ﱠات ِﺟﺪا‬ ٌ ‫َﻫﺬﻩ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﻌﻠّ َﻤﺎت ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬﺪ‬ ِِ ‫ﺎت ِﻣ ْﻦ اِ ْﳒَ ْﻠ ََﱰ‬ َ ‫َﻫﺬﻩ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﻤِّﺮ‬ ُ ‫ﺿ‬

Complete Composite

‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَِء اﻟﻌُﻠَ َﻤﺎءُ ِﻣ ْﻦ ﻋُﻠَ َﻤ ِﺎء‬ ِ ‫اﻟﺘﱠـ ْﻔ ِﺴﲑ و ا ْﳊ ِﺪﻳ‬ ‫ﺚ‬ َْ َ

‫ ٌم‬wَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬ ِ َ‫ ِن اﻟﻄﱠﺎﻟِﺒـﺘ‬6‫ﺎ‬ ‫ ِن‬6‫ﱠ‬ َ ‫ﺎن ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬﺪ‬ َ ‫َﻫ‬ َ ِ َ‫ ِن اﻟﻄﱠﺎ ِوﻟَﺘ‬6‫ﺎ‬ ‫ ِن‬6َ ‫ﺎن َﺟ ِﺪﻳْ َﺪ‬ َ ‫َﻫ‬ ‫ن‬6‫ ِن ﺷ ِﺮﻳْـَﺮ‬6َ ‫ ِن اﻟﺘﱠـ ْﻠ ِﻤْﻴ َﺬ‬6َ ‫َﻫﺎ‬ ِ َ‫ ِن ﻣ ْﻔﺘُـﻮﺣﺘ‬6َ ‫ ِن اﻟﻨﱠﺎﻓِ َﺬ‬6‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َ ‫َﻫ‬ َْ َ

This student is very hard working. This car is made in Japan. This university is from Islamic Universities. These teachers are very hard working. These nurses are from England.

Complete Composite These students are hard working. These two tables are new. These two pupils are naughty. These two windows are open.

94

‫ ِن‬6َ ‫َﻫﺎ‬ ِ َ‫اﻟ ﱠﺴﺎﻋﺘ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َ

These two watches

ِ َ‫ ِن اﻟ ﱠﺴﺎﻋﺘ‬6َ ‫ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ ِن‬6َ ‫ﺎن َﺟ ِﺪﻳْ َﺪ‬ َ َ

These two watches are new.

6. ‫( َﻫ ُﺆﻻَ ِء‬These female)

ِ ‫ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬ ‫ﺺ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬fَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ َُ ِ ‫ﺎت‬ ُ َ‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَء اَﻟْﺒَـﻨ‬ ِ ِ ‫ﺎت‬ ُ ‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَء اﳌَُﻌﻠّ َﻤ‬ ِ ‫ﺎت‬ ُ َ‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَء اﻟﻄﱠﺒِْﻴـﺒ‬ ‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَِء‬ ‫ﺎت‬ ُ ‫اﻟﱠﺰُو َﺟ‬

Incomplete Composite These daughters

‫ ٌم‬wَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬

Complete Composite

ِ ِ ‫ﺎت‬ ٌ َ‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَء اﻟﺒَـﻨَﺎت ﻃَﺎﻟﺒ‬ ِ ِ ‫ﱠات‬ ٌ ‫ﺎت ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬﺪ‬ ُ ‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَء اﳌَُﻌﻠّ َﻤ‬ ِ ِ ‫ات‬ ٌ ‫ﺎت َﻣﺎﻫ َﺮ‬ ُ َ‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَء اﻟﻄﱠﺒِْﻴـﺒ‬

These wives

ِ ‫ﺎت ِﻷ َْزَو ِاﺟ ِﻬ ﱠﻦ‬ ٌ ‫ﺎت ُﻣ ِﻄ َﻴﻌ‬ ُ ‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَء اﻟ ﱠﺰْو َﺟ‬

These daughters are students. These teachers are hard working. These doctors are experts.

ِ ‫ﺎت‬ َ ‫ َﻫ ُﺆﻻَء اﻟ ُْﻤ َﻤِّﺮ‬These nurses ُ ‫ﺿ‬

ِ ِ ‫ﺎت ِﺟ ًﺪا‬ ٌ َ‫ﺎت ﻧَﺸْﻴﻄ‬ َ ‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَء اﻟْ ُﻤ َﻤ ِّﺮ‬ ُ ‫ﺿ‬

These nurses are very active.

These teachers These doctors

ِ ْ‫( َﻫ َﺬﻳ‬These two) Accusative Case (ٌ‫ﺼﺒِﻴﱠﺔ‬ 7. ‫ﻦ‬ َ َ‫) َﺣﺎﻟَﺔٌ ﻧ‬ ِ ‫ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬ ‫ﺺ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬fَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ َُ ‫َﻫ َﺬ ِان اﻟْ َﻮﻟَ َﺪ ِان‬ ‫َﻫ َﺬ ِان‬ ‫ُﺳﺘَﺎذَ ِان‬ ْ ‫اﻷ‬ ‫َﻫ َﺬ ِان اﻟْ ِﻜﺘَ َﺎ] ِن‬ ِ َ‫ﻫ َﺬ ِان اﻟْﺒـﻴـﺘ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َ َْ ‫َﻫ َﺬ ِان‬ ‫اﻟْ َﻤ ْﺴ ِﺠ َﺪ ِان‬

In-complete Composite These two boys

These two teachers

These two books These two houses These two mosques

‫ ٌم‬wَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬

‫أﻳﺖ َﻫ َﺬﻳْ ِﻦ اﻟْ َﻮﻟَ َﺪﻳْ ِﻦ ﰱ اﳉَ ِﺎﻣ َﻌ ِﺔ‬ ُ ‫ر‬

ِ ‫اﻷﺳﺘَﺎذَﻳْ ِﻦ ِﰱ‬ ُ ‫ﻟَﻘْﻴ‬ ُ ‫ﺖ َﻫ َﺬﻳْ ِﻦ‬ ِ‫ﺼﻼَة‬ ‫اﻟْ َﻤ ْﺴ ِﺠ ِﺪ ﺑـَ ْﻌ َﺪ اﻟ ﱠ‬ ِ َ‫أت َﻫ َﺬﻳْ ِﻦ اﻟْ ِﻜﺘَﺎﺑ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ ُ ‫ﻗَـَﺮ‬ ِ ِ َ‫ﺖ َﻫ َﺬﻳْ ِﻦ اﻟْﺒَـْﻴـﺘ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ ُ ْ‫ا ْﺷ َﱰَﻳ‬ ‫َﻫ ْﻞ َرأﻳْـﺘُ ْﻢ َﻫ َﺬﻳْ ِﻦ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﺴ ِﺠ َﺪﻳْ ِﻦ‬ ِ ْ‫ﻗَـﺒﻞ ﻫﺬا اﻟْﻮﻗ‬ ‫ﺖ؟‬ َ َ ْ

ِ ‫( َﻫ َﺬ‬These two) Genitive Case (ٌ‫)ﺣﺎﻟَﺔٌ ﺟ ِﺮﻳﺔ‬ 8. ‫ان‬ َّ َ َ ِ ‫ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬ ‫ﺺ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬fَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ َُ ِ َ‫ﻫ َﺬ ِان اﻟﻮﻟ‬ ‫ﺪان‬ َ َ ِ ‫َﻫ َﺬ ِان اﻟﻜﺘَ َﺎ] ِن‬ ‫َﻫ َﺬ ِان اﻟْ َﻤْﻨـَﺰﻻَ ِن‬

Incomplete Composite These two boys These two books These two houses

‫ ٌم‬wَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬

‫إﱃ َﻫ َﺬﻳْ ِﻦ اﻟْ َﻮﻟَ َﺪﻳْ ِﻦ‬ ُ ‫ﻧَﻈَْﺮ‬ َ ‫ت‬ ِ ْ َ‫أت ِﰱ َﻫ َﺬﻳْ ِﻦ اﻟْ ِﻜﺘَﺎﺑ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ ُ ‫ﻗَﺮ‬ ِ ْ َ‫اُﻧْﻈُﺮ َإﱃ َﻫ َﺬﻳْ ِﻦ اﻟْﻤْﻨـَﺰﻟ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ ْ َ

These wives are obedient to their husband.

Complete Composite I saw these two boys in the university. I met these two teachers in the mosque after the prayer. I read these two books. I bought these two houses. Have you seen these two mosques before this time?

Complete Composite I saw these two boys. I read these two books. Look at these two houses.

95

‫َﻫ َﺬ ِان اﻟْ َﻤ ْﺴ ِﺠ َﺪ ِان‬ ِّ ‫ﻫ َﺬ ِان ا ْﳉ‬ ‫ﻨﺪ َ\ ِن‬ َ ُ

I prayed in these two ‫ﺖ ِﰱ َﻫ َﺬﻳْ ِﻦ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﺴ ِﺠ َﺪﻳْ ِﻦ‬ ُ ‫ﺻﻠﱠْﻴ‬ َ mosques. ِ I heard about these two ِ ‫اﳉُْﻨ ِﺪﻳﱠﻨ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ ْ ‫ﺖ َﻋ ْﻦ َﻫ َﺬﻳْ ِﻦ‬ ُ ‫ َﲰ ْﻌ‬Vَ ‫ أ‬soldiers that both of ِ ِِ ‫ﲔ‬ them are Muslims. َ ْ ‫أ ﱠ»ُ َﻤﺎ ﻣ َﻦ اﻟْ ُﻤ ْﺴﻠﻤ‬

These two mosques These two soldiers

9. ‫ ِن‬w‫ﺎ‬ َ ‫( َﻫ‬These two f.) Accusative Case (ٌ‫ﺼﺒِﻴَﺔ‬ َ َ‫) َﺣﺎﻟَﺔٌ ﻧ‬

ِ ‫ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬ ‫ﺺ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬fَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ َُ ِ َ‫ ِن اﻟﻄﺎﻟِﺒـﺘ‬6َ ‫ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َ َ ‫ ِن‬6َ‫ ِن اﻟ ﱠﺴﻴَ َﺎر‬6َ ‫َﻫﺎ‬ ِ َ‫ ِن اﻟﻐُﺮﻓَـﺘ‬6‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ ْ َ ‫َﻫ‬ ‫ ِن‬6َ ‫ﻨﻀ َﺪ‬ َ ‫َﻫ‬ َ ‫ ِن اﻟْ ِﻤ‬6‫ﺎ‬ ِْ ‫ ِن‬6‫ﺎ‬ ‫ ِن‬6‫اﻹﻣﺮ َأ‬ َ ‫َﻫ‬

‫ ٌم‬wَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬ ِ ْ َ‫ﲔ اﻟْﻄﱠﺎﻟِﺒَـﺘ‬ ِ ْ َ‫ﺖ َﻫﺎﺗ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ ُ ‫ﺼ ْﺤ‬ َ َ‫ﻧ‬

Incomplete Composite These two students

These two cars These two rooms These two tables

ِ ِ ْ َ‫ﲔ اﻟ ﱠﺴﻴَﺎرﺗ‬ ِ ْ َ‫ﺖ َﻫﺎﺗ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ ُ ْ‫ا ْﺷ َﱰَﻳ‬ َ ِ ْ َ‫ﲔ اﻟْﻐُﺮﻓَـﺘ‬ ِ ُ ‫ﻧَﻈَ ْﻔ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ ْ ْ َ‫ﺖ َﻫﺎﺗ‬ ِ ْ َ‫ﻀ َﺪﺗ‬ ِ ْ َ‫ت َﻫﺎﺗ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ َ ‫ﲔ اﻟْ ِﻤْﻨ‬ َ ‫َﻫ ْﻞ َﻛ ﱠﺴَﺮ‬ ِ ْ َ‫اﻹ ْﻣﺮأﺗ‬ ِ ِ ُ ْ‫َرأﻳ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ َ ْ ‫ﺖ َﻫﺎﺗَ ْﲔ‬

These two women

Complete Composite I advised these two students (f.). I bought these two cars.

I cleaned these two rooms. Have you broken these two tables? I saw these two women.

10. ‫ ِن‬w‫ﺎ‬ َ ‫( َﻫ‬These two f.g.-Genitive Cases)

ِ ‫ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬ ‫ﺺ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬fَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ َُ ِ َ‫ ِن اﻟْ ُﻜﱠﺮاﺳﺘ‬6َ ‫ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َ َ ‫ ِن‬6َ ‫َﻫﺎ‬ ‫ ِن‬6َ ‫اﻟ ﱠﺴ َﺠﺎد‬ ِ ‫ ِن‬6َ‫ﱠﺠَﺮ‬ َ ‫ن اﻟﺸ‬6َ ‫َﻫﺎ‬ ِ َ‫ﺼ ِﺪﻳـ َﻘﺘ‬ ِ ‫ﺎن‬ ْ ‫ن اﻟ ﱠ‬6َ ‫َﻫﺎ‬ ‫ ِن‬6َ‫ ِن اﻟﺒَـ َﻘَﺮ‬6َ ‫َﻫﺎ‬

Incomplete Composite These two note books These two carpets

These two trees These two friends

‫ ٌم‬wَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬ ِ ْ َ‫اﺳﺘ‬ ِ ْ َ‫َﻣ ْﻦ َﻛﺘَﺐ ِﰱ َﻫﺎﺗ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ َ ‫ﲔ اﻟْ ُﻜﱠﺮ‬ ْ َ ِ ِ ْ َ‫ﻀﻠِ ُﻜﻢ اِ ْﺟﻠِﺴ ْﻮا َﻋﻠَﻰ َﻫﺎﺗ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ ُ ْ ْ َ‫ﻣ ْﻦ ﻓ‬ ِ ْ َ‫ﺎدﺗ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ َ ‫اﻟ ﱠﺴ َﺠ‬ ِ ْ َ‫ﱠﺠﺮﺗ‬ ِ ‫ﲔ‬ َ َ ‫اُﻧْﻈُْﺮ َإﱃ َﻫﺎﺗَ ْﲔ اﻟﺸ‬ ِ ْ َ‫ﺼ ِﺪﻳْـ َﻘﺘ‬ ِ ْ َ‫ﺖ َﻣ َﻊ َﻫﺎﺗ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ ‫ﲔ اﻟ ﱠ‬ ُ ‫ﺗَ َﻜﻠﱠ ْﻤ‬

These two cows

ِ ِ ْ َ‫ﲔ اﻟْﺒَـ َﻘﺮﺗ‬ ِ ‫ﲔ‬ َ ْ َ‫اُﻧْﻈُْﺮ إ َﱃ َﻫﺎﺗ‬

Complete Composite Who wrote in these two note books? Please sit on these two carpets. Look at these two trees. I talked to these two friends. Look at these two cows.

In the above mentioned 50 sentences, the following demonstrative pronouns/ nouns for

ِ ْ‫ﻟِْﻠ َﻘ ِﺮﻳ‬ near (‫ﺐ‬ ‫َﲨْ ٌﻊ‬

ِ‫ )اَ ْﲰَﺎء ا ِﻹ َﺷﺎرة‬are used: َ ُ ‫ ُﻣﺜَ ﱠﲎ‬/ٌ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬

‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻَِء‬

‫ َﻫ َﺬﻳْ ِﻦ‬/‫َﻫ َﺬ ِان‬

PLURAL

All these (m.)

‫َﻫ ُﺆﻻٍَء‬

All these (f.)

DUAL

These two (m.)

ِ ْ َ‫ َﻫﺎﺗ‬/‫ ِن‬6‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﲔ‬ َ ‫َﻫ‬

These two (f.)

ِ‫و‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ

ِ ‫ﺻﻴَ ٌﻎ‬

SINGULAR

(Forms)

‫َﻫ َﺬا‬

‫ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ‬

‫َﻫ ِﺬ ِﻩ‬

‫ﺚ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬

This This

96

ِ Use of Demonstration Composite (‫ى‬ ٌ ‫ا َﺷﺎ ِر‬ 1. ‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫( ذَﻟ‬That)

ِ ‫ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬ ‫ﺺ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬fَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ َُ ِ َ ِ‫ذَﻟ‬ ‫ﺎب‬ ُ َ‫ﻚ اﻟْﻜﺘ‬ ِ ‫ﻚ اﻟﱠﺮ ُﺟ ُﻞ‬ َ ‫ذَﻟ‬ ِ ِ ‫ﺐ‬ َ ‫ذَﻟ‬ ُ ‫ﻚ اﻟﻄﱠﺎﻟ‬ ِ ‫ﺎب‬ َ ‫ذَﻟ‬ ُ َ‫ﻚ اﻟْﺒ‬ ِ ‫ﺎﺋﻖ‬ َ ‫ذَﻟ‬ ُ ‫ﻚ اﻟ ﱠﺴ‬

Incomplete Composite That book That man That student

That gate That driver

2. ‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫( ذَاﻧ‬Those two m.)

ِ ‫ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬ ‫ﺺ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬fَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ َُ ‫اﻟﻮﻟَ َﺪ ِان‬ َ ِ‫ذَاﻧ‬ َ ‫ﻚ‬ ‫ﻚ اﻟْ ِﻜﺘَ َﺎ] ِن‬ َ ِ‫ذَاﻧ‬ ‫ﻚ اﻟﺜـ ُﱠﻮَر ِان‬ َ ِ‫ذَاﻧ‬

ِ ِ ‫ﻨﺪﺳ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َ ِ‫ذَاﻧ‬ َ ّ ‫ﻚ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﻬ‬

‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫ذَاﻧ‬ ِ ‫ﺼ ِﺪﻳـ َﻘ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ ْ ‫اﻟ ﱠ‬

In complete Composite Those two boys. Those two books. Those two bulls/ oxes. Those two engineers. Those two friends.

3. ‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫( أ ُْوٰﻟﺌ‬All those m.)

ِ ‫ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬ ‫ﺺ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬fَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ َُ ‫ﺎل‬ ُ ‫ﻚ اﻟِّﺮ َﺟ‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوٰﻟﺌ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوٰﻟﺌ‬

‫ب‬ ُ ‫اﻟﻄﱡﻼﱠ‬ ‫ﻚ اﻟ ﱡ‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوٰﻟﺌ‬ ُ‫ﺼﻠَ َﺤﺎء‬ ‫ﱡﺠ ُﺎر‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوٰﻟﺌ‬ َ ‫ﻚ اﻟﺘ‬

Incomplete Composite Those men Those students

‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ ) ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬in Sentences of Daily Usage ‫ ٌم‬wَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬

Complete Composite

ِ َ ِ‫ذَﻟ‬ ‫ﺎب ُﻣ ِﻔْﻴ ٌﺪ ِﺟ ًﺪا‬ ُ َ‫ﻚ اﻟْﻜﺘ‬ ِ ‫ذَﻟِﻚ اﻟ ﱠﺮﺟﻞ ﻃَﺒِﻴﺐ ﻣ‬ ‫ﺎﻫٌﺮ‬ َ ٌ ْ ُُ َ ِ ِ ‫ﺐ ِﻣ ْﻦ أَﻓْ ِﺮﻳْـ َﻘﺎ‬ ُ ‫َذﻟﻚ اﻟﻄﱠﺎﻟ‬ ِ ‫ﻮح‬ َ ‫ذَﻟ‬ ٌ ُ‫ﺎب َﻣ ْﻐﻠَ ٌﻖ َوَﻫ َﺬا ُﻣ ْﻔﺘ‬ ُ َ‫ﻚ اﻟﺒ‬

That book is very useful.

‫ ٌم‬wَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬ ِ ِ ‫ﻚ اﻟْﻮﻟَ َﺪ ِان ﻣﻄَﻴﻌ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َ ُ َ َ ‫ذَاﻧ‬ ِ ‫ﻓِﻌ‬Vَ ‫ﻚ اﻟْ ِﻜﺘَﺎ]ن‬ ‫ﺎن َﺟ ًﺪا‬ َ ِ‫ذَاﻧ‬ َ َ ‫ﱠﻮر ِان ﻟِْﻠ َﺬﺑْ ِﺢ‬ َ ِ‫ذَاﻧ‬ َ ‫ﻚ اﻟﺜ‬ ِ ِ ‫ﻨﺪﺳ‬ ‫ﺎن َﺟ ِﺪﻳْ َﺪ ِان‬ َ ِ‫ذَاﻧ‬ َ ّ ‫ﻚ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﻬ‬ ِ ‫ﺎن ﻃَﺎﻟِﺒ‬ ِ ‫ﺼ ِﺪﻳـ َﻘ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َ ِ‫ذَاﻧ‬ ْ ‫ﻚ اﻟ ﱠ‬ َ ‫ِﰱ ا ْﳉَ ِﺎﻣ َﻌ ِﺔ‬

Complete Composite

ِ ‫ذَﻟِﻚ اﻟ ﱠﺴﺎﺋِﻖ ﺣ‬ ‫ﺎذ ٌق‬ َ َ

‫ ٌم‬wَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬

‫ﺎل ﻃَﺒِْﻴـﺒُـ ْﻮ َن َﺣ ِﺎذﻗُـ ْﻮ َن ِﺟ ًﺪا‬ ُ ‫ﻚ اﻟ ِّﺮ َﺟ‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوٰﻟﺌ‬

‫ب َﻛﻠﱡ َﻬ ْﻢ‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوٰﻟﺌ‬ ُ َ‫ﻚ اﻟﻄﱠﻼ‬ ‫رﺳ ْﻮ َن ِﰱ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﺮَﻛ ِﺰ‬ ُ ‫ﻳَ ْﺪ‬

Those pious (people)

ِ‫ﺼﻠَ َﺤﺎء ِﻣﻦ اﻟْﻤ ِﺪﻳْـﻨَ ِﺔ اﻟْﻤﻨَـ ﱠﻮرة‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوٰﻟﺌ‬ َ ُ َ ُ ‫ﻚ اﻟ ﱡ‬

Those traders

‫ﱡﺠ ُﺎر َﻛﻠﱡ ُﻬ ْﻢ‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوٰﻟﺌ‬ َ ‫ﻚ اﻟﺘ‬ ِ‫ﺣ‬ ‫ﺎذﻗُـ ْﻮ َن ِﰱ ُﳎَﺎﳍِِ ْﻢ‬ َ

That man is an expert doctor. That student is from Africa. That gate is closed and this is opened. That driver is very expert.

Those two boys are obedient. Those two books are very beneficial. Those two bulls are for slaughter. Those two engineers are new. Those two friends are students in the university.

Complete Composite All those men are very expert. All those students study/ are studying in the Islamic center. Those pious (people) are from Al-Madinah AlMunawarah.

All those traders are expert in their fields.

97

‫ﱠﺣ ْﻮ َن‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوٰﻟﺌ‬ ُ ‫ﻚ اﻟْ َﻔﻼ‬

Those farmers

4. ‫ْﻚ‬ َ ‫( ﺗِﻠ‬That f.)

ِ ‫ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬ ‫ﺺ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬fَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ َُ ُ‫ﻚ اﻟﻨﱠﺎﻓِ َﺬة‬ َ ‫ﺗِْﻠ‬ ُ‫ﻚ اَﻟْ َﻤﺮأة‬ َ ‫ﺗِْﻠ‬ ُ‫ﻚ اﻟ ﱡﺴﺒُـ ْﻮَرة‬ َ ‫ﺗِْﻠ‬

ُ‫ﻚ اﻟْ ِﻤ ْﻤ َﺴ َﺤﺔ‬ َ ‫ﺗِْﻠ‬ ‫ﻚ اﻟ ﱡ‬ ُ‫ﺼ ْﻮَرة‬ َ ‫ﺗِْﻠ‬ ُ‫ﻚ اﻟْﺒَﻄْﻠَﺔ‬ َ ‫ﺗِْﻠ‬

Incomplete Composite That window That woman That blackboard

That duster That picture That hero

5. ‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫ﻧ‬wَ (Those two f.)

ِ ‫ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬ ‫ﺺ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬fَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ َُ

ِ ِ َ‫ﻚ اﻟْﻤ َﺪ ِرﺳﺘ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َ ّ ُ َ ‫ﻧ‬6َ

In complete Composite Those two Teachers

ِ Those two ِ َ‫ﻨﺪﺳﺘ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َ ِ‫ﻧ‬6ِ engineers َ ّ ‫ﻚ اﻟ ُْﻤ َﻬ‬

‫ ِن‬6َ‫ﱠﺠَﺮ‬ َ ِ‫ﻧ‬6َ َ ‫ﻚ اﻟْﺸ‬ ِ َ‫ﻚ اﻟْ ُﻜﱠﺮاﺳﺘ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َ ِ‫ﻧ‬6َ َ ِ َ‫ﻚ اﻟﻄﱠﺎﻟِﺒـﺘ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ َ ِ‫ﻧ‬6َ َ

Those two trees Those two notebooks

Those two students

6. ‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫( أ ُْوٰﻟﺌ‬All those f.)

ِ ‫ﻣﺮﱠﻛ‬ ‫ﺺ‬ ٌ ‫ﻗ‬fَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ َُ ‫ﺎت‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوٰﻟﺌ‬ َ ‫ﻚ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﻤِّﺮ‬ ُ ‫ﺿ‬

Incomplete Composite Those nurses

ِ َ ِ‫أُوٰﻟﺌ‬ ْ ُ‫ﻚ اﻟﻨّ َﺴﺎء‬ ِ ِ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺎت‬ َ ‫أ ُْوٰﻟﺌ‬ ُ َ‫ﻚ اﻟﻄﺎﻟﺒ‬

Those women

‫ﺎت‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوٰﻟﺌ‬ ُ ‫اﺟ‬ َ ‫ﱠر‬ َ ‫ﻚ اﻟﺪ‬ ‫ﺎت‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوٰﻟﺌ‬ ُ ‫ﺎﺟ‬ َ ‫ﱠﺟ‬ َ ‫ﻚ اﻟﺪ‬

Those bicycles

Those students

Those chickens

‫ﻚ اﻟ َﻔﻼﱠ ُﺣ ْﻮ َن ِﻣ َﻦ اﻟْ ُﻘَﺮى‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوٰﻟﺌ‬ ‫ ٌم‬wَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬ ُ‫ﻚ اﻟﻨﱠﺎﻓِ َﺬةُ َﻣ ْﻔﺘُـ ْﻮ َﺣﺔ‬ َ ‫ﺗِْﻠ‬ ِ ‫ﺗِْﻠﻚ اﻟْﻤﺮأَةُ ﺻ‬ ٌ‫ﺎﳊَﺔ‬ َ َْ َ ‫ﻚ اﻟ ﱠﺴﺒُـ ْﻮَرةُ ﻗَ ِﺪ ْﳝَﺔٌ ِﺟ ًﺪا‬ َ ‫ﺗِْﻠ‬ ٌ‫ﻚ اﻟْ ِﻤ ْﻤ َﺴ َﺤﺔُ َﺟ ِﺪﻳْ َﺪة‬ َ ‫ﺗِْﻠ‬

Those farmers are from the villages.

Complete Composite That window is opened. That woman is pious. That blackboard is very old. That duster is new.

َِ ُ‫ﺼﻮرة‬ ٌ‫ﲨْﻴـﻠَﺔٌ و َﻣ ْﻌ ُﺮْوﻓَﺔ‬ َ ‫ﺗِْﻠ‬ َ ْ ‫ﻚ اﻟ ﱡ‬

That picture is beautiful and famous. That heroin is pretty.

‫ ٌم‬wَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬ ِ ‫ﺎن ﺗُ َﺪ ِرﺳ‬ ِ ‫ﺎن‬ َ ِ‫ﻧ‬6َ َ ّ َ‫ﻚ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﺪ ِّر َﺳﺘ‬ ‫ِﰱ اﳉَ ِﺎﻣ َﻌ ِﺔ‬ ِ ِ َ‫ﻚ اﻟْﻤﻬْﻨ ِّﺪﺳﺘ‬ ‫ﺎن ِﻣ َﻦ اﻟْﻴَ َﺎ] ِن‬ َ َ ُ َ ‫ﻧ‬6َ

Complete Composite

ٌ‫ﻚ اﻟْﺒَﻄْﻠَﺔُ َﻣﻠِْﻴ َﺤﺔ‬ َ ‫ﺗِْﻠ‬

ِ ِ َ‫ ِن ﻃَﻮﻳـﻠَﺘ‬6َ‫ﻚ اﻟﺸﱠﺠﺮ‬ ‫ﺎن ِﺟ ًﺪا‬ ْ َ َ َ ‫ﻧ‬6َ

ِ َ‫ﻚ اﻟْ ُﻜﱠﺮاﺳﺘ‬ ‫ﺎن ِﻷ ْﲪ َﺪ‬ َ ِ‫ﻧ‬6َ َ ِ َ‫ﻚ اﻟﻄﱠﺎﻟِﺒـﺘ‬ ‫ ِن‬6َ ‫ﺎن ُْﳎﺘَ ِﻬ ﱠﺪ‬ َ ِ‫ﻧ‬6َ َ ِ َ‫و ﻧَ ِﺸﻴﻄَﺘ‬ ‫ﺎن‬ ْ َ

Those two teachers are teaching at the university. Those (two lady) engineers are from Japan. Those two trees are very tall.

‫ ٌم‬wَ ‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺮﱠﻛ‬ ‫ﺎت ُﻛﻠﱡ ُﻬ ﱠﻦ‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوٰﻟﺌ‬ َ ‫ﻚ اﻟْ ُﻤ َﻤِّﺮ‬ ُ ‫ﺿ‬ ‫ﻳـَ ْﻌ َﻤ ْﻠ َﻦ ِﰱ اﻟْ ُﻤ ْﺴﺘَ ْﺸ ٰﻔﻰ‬ ِ ‫أُوٰﻟﺌِﻚ اﻟﻨِّﺴﺎء ُﻛﻠﱠﻬ ﱠﻦ‬ ‫ﺎت‬ ٌ َ‫ﺻﺎﳊ‬ َ َ َُ َ ْ ِ ‫ﺎت ﻳَ ْﺪ ُر ْﺳ َﻦ‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوٰﻟﺌ‬ ُ َ‫ﻚ اﻟﻄﱠﺎﻟﺒ‬ ِّ ‫ِﰱ َﻛﻠِّﻴ ِﺔ اُﺻﻮِل‬ ‫اﻟﺪﻳْ ِﻦ‬ ُْ َ ‫ﺎت ﻟِﻸﻃْ َﻔ ِﺎل ﻓَـ َﻘ ْﻂ‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوٰﻟﺌ‬ ُ ‫اﺟ‬ َ ‫ﱠر‬ َ ‫ﻚ اﻟﺪ‬ ‫ﺎت ُﻛﻠﱡ َﻬ ﱠﻦ ﻟﻸ ْﻛ ِﻞ‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوٰﻟﺌ‬ ُ ‫ﺎﺟ‬ َ ‫ﱠﺟ‬ َ ‫ﻚ اﻟﺪ‬

Those two notebooks are for Ahmad.

Those two students are hard working and active

Complete Composite All those nurses are working in the hospital.

All those women are pious. Those students are studying in the Faculty of Usul-ud-din.

Those bicycles are for children only. All those chicken are for eating.

98

ِ ‫ﺎت‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوٰﻟﺌ‬ ُ ‫ﻚ اﻟْ ُﻤ ْﺴﻠ َﻤ‬

ِ ‫ﺎت‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوٰﻟﺌ‬ ُ ‫ﻚ اﻟْ ُﻤ ْﺴﻠ َﻤ‬ ِ ‫ﺎت‬ ٌ ‫ُﻛﻠﱠ ُﻬ ﱠﻦ َﻋﺎﻟ َﻤ‬

Those Muslim women

All those Muslim women are scholars.

In the above 32 sentences, the following demonstrative pronouns/ nouns for distance (‫ﻟِْﻠﺒَﻌِْﻴ ِﺪ‬

ِْ ‫َﲰَﺎء‬ ٌ‫اﻹ َﺷ َﺎرة‬ ُ ْ ‫ )أ‬are used: ‫َﲨْ ٌﻊ‬ ‫ ُﻣﺜَ ﱠﲎ‬/ٌ‫ﺗَـﺜْﻨِﻴَﺔ‬

PLURAL

‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوٰﻟﺌ‬ All those (m.) ‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫أ ُْوٰﻟﺌ‬ All those (f.)

DUAL

‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫ذَاﻧ‬

Those two (m.)

‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫ﻧ‬6ِ

Those two (f.)

ِ‫و‬ ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ SINGULAR ِ ‫ﻚ‬ َ ‫ذَﻟ‬ That/ this ‫ﻚ‬ َ ‫ﺗِْﻠ‬

ِ ‫ﺻ ْﻴ ٌﻎ‬

(Forms)

‫ُﻣ َﺬ ﱠﻛٌﺮ‬

‫ﺚ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣ َﺆﻧﱠ‬

That/ this

‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫ﺗَـْﻴﻨ‬. These forms have neither been used in Al-Quran Al-Hakeem nor in the modern usage except ‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫ذَاﻧ‬.

Note: The accusative and genitive case of

‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫ ذَاﻧ‬and ‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫ﻧ‬6َ is ‫ﻚ‬ َ ِ‫ذَﻳْﻨ‬

and

Keep in mind that in a demonstrative phrase/composite, there is always an agreement

‫ اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ‬and ‫ ُﻣ َﺸ ٌﺎر إِﻟَْﻴ ِﻪ‬in the following aspects: ‫( اَﻟْ َﻌ َﺪ ُد‬numbers). 2. ‫ﺲ‬ ُ ‫( اَ ْﳉْﻨ‬gender). 4. ‫اب‬ ُ‫( اَﻟْ َﻮ ْﺳ َﻌﺔ‬capacity- ٌ‫) َﻣ ْﻌ ِﺮﻓَﺔٌ َو ﻧَﻜَْﺮة‬. ُ ‫( اَِْﻹ ْﻋَﺮ‬case-ending). between ِ‫ﺎرة‬ َ َ ‫اﻹﺷ‬

1. 3.

99

ُّ َ ْ ُ َّ َ ُ ْ َ ‫۔ اﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ اﳉﺎ ِرى‬4.2 The Genitive/Prepositional Composite ‫اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟ َْﻤ ْﺠ ُﺮْوِر‬

‫َﺣ ْﺮف اﳉَِّﺮ‬

The Genitive Noun

The Preposition

The Genitive/Prepositional Composite

‫ى‬ ‫ﺐ ا ْﳉَﺎ ِر ﱡ‬ ُ ‫اَﻟ ُْﻤ َﺮﱠﻛ‬

100

‫ى‬ ‫ﺐ ا ْﳉَﺎ ِر ﱡ‬ ُ ‫۔ اَﻟ ُْﻤ َﺮﱠﻛ‬4.2

The Genitive/Prepositional Composite

.‫ف ا ْﳉَِّﺮ و اِ ْﺳ ِﻢ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﺠُﺮْوِر‬ ْ ‫ﻛﺐ‬ ‫اﳉَﺎ ِر ﱞ‬ ُ ‫ى ُﻫ َﻮ َْﳎ ُﻤ ْﻮ َﻋﺔُ َﺣ ْﺮ‬ ُ ‫ اَﻟْ ُﻤَﺮ‬:ُ‫ﺗَـ ْﻌ ِﺮﻳْـ ُﻔﻪ‬ The genitive composite/phrase is the combination of ‫اﳉَِّﺮ‬ ْ ‫ف‬ ُ ‫( َﺣ ْﺮ‬the particle of Jarr) and ‫( اِ ْﺳ ُﻢ اﻟْ َﻤ ْﺠُﺮْوِر‬the genitive noun). ِ When any ‫ﺟ ٍﺮ‬ ُ ‫( َﺣ ْﺮ‬preposition) enters upon a ‫( ا ْﺳ ٌﻢ‬noun), it changes/converts it from َّ ‫ف‬ nominative case (ٌ‫ﺣﺎﻟَﺔٌ َرﻓْﻌِﻴَﺔ‬ ْ َ‫ ) َﺣﺎﻟَﺔٌ ﻧ‬to genitive case (ٌ‫) َﺣﺎﻟَﺔٌ َﺟِّﺮﻳَﺔ‬. َ ) or accusative case (ٌ‫ﺼﺒِﻴﱠﺔ‬ ِ So, if ‫ﺟٍّﺮ‬ ُ ‫ َﺣ ْﺮ‬and ‫ ا ْﺳ ُﻢ َْﳎُﺮْوٌر‬are joined together, it constitutes a compound or a phrase or َ ‫ف‬ ِ ِ a sentence, e.g. ‫ﰱ‬ ٌ ‫( ُﻣ ْﻔ‬mufrad) words. But, if they are joined as ْ (in) and ‫ﺐ‬ ُ ‫ اَ ْﳉْﻴ‬are two ‫ﺮد‬ ِ ‫( ِﰱ ا ْﳉَْﻴ‬in the pocket), it becomes an incomplete phrase or composite or sentence which ‫ﺐ‬ is called ‫ى‬ ‫َﺟﺎ ِر ﱞ‬

‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫( ُﻣَﺮﱠﻛ‬genitive/prepositional composite).

In short, when prepositions, present before a noun, make its end in jarr or the genitive case. There are seventeen prepositions as such:

،َ‫ َﺧﻼ‬،‫ ُﻣ ْﺬ‬،‫ ُﻣْﻨ ُﺬ‬،‫ َواؤ‬،‫ ﻻَ ُﻣﻮ‬،‫ َﻛﺎﻓُـ ْﻮ‬،‫ؤ‬6َ ،‫َ]ؤ‬ ِ َ ‫ ﺣ‬،‫ب‬ ِ ‫ َإﱃ‬،‫ﱴ‬ ‫ َﺣ ﱠ‬،‫ﻠﻰ‬ َ ‫ُر ﱠ‬ َ ‫ َﻋ‬،‫ َﻋ ْﻦ‬،‫ ﰱ‬،‫ َﻋ َﺪا‬،‫ ﻣ ْﻦ‬،‫ﺎﺷﺎ‬

The prepositions can be divided in to two groups: attached and detached or inseparable and separable prepositions20: 1.

2.

20

Inseparable/attached prepositions: These are four: i.

ِ (bi) ‫ب‬

ii.

iii.

‫( ل‬lam)

iv.

‫ت‬ َ (ta) ‫( َك‬ka).

Separable/detached prepositions: These are Thirteen: iii.

‫( ِﻣ ْﻦ‬min)

vi

‫( َﻋ ْﻦ‬un) ‫( و‬waw)

vii

‫(ﻣﺬ‬muz)

‫ﻣﻨ ﺬ‬ ُ (munz)

ix

‫( ﺧﻼ‬khala)

x

ّ‫( ُﺭﺏ‬rubba)

‫( ﺣﺎﺷﺎ‬hasha)

xii

‫( ﻋﺪﺍ‬Ada)

xiii

‫(ﺣﺘﯽ‬hatta)

i.

‫( ِﰱ‬fi)

ii.

v.

‫( َإﱃ‬ila).

viii xi

See unit no.1, part 3, which is about prepositions (‫ﺟ ٍّﺮ‬ َ

‫ف‬ ُ ‫) ُﺣ ُﺮْو‬.

iv.

‫( َﻋﻠَﻰ‬ala)

101

ُّ َ َ ْ ُ َّ َ ُ ْ َ (1)‫۔ اﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ اﻟﻌﺪ ِدى‬4.3 The Addadi/Numeral Composite(1)

‫اَﻟ َْﻤ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْو ُد‬

‫اَﻟ َْﻌ َﺪ ُد‬

The Numbered Noun

The Number

The Addadi/Numeral Composite

‫ى‬ ‫ﺐ اﻟ َْﻌ َﺪ ِد ﱡ‬ ُ ‫اَﻟ ُْﻤ َﺮﱠﻛ‬

102

Introduction to 3rd part of Unit No.4 This 3rd part of unit no.04 is a very important which is about

‫ى‬ ‫ﺐ اﻟْ َﻌ َﺪ ِد ﱡ‬ ُ ‫( اَﻟْ ُﻤَﺮﱠﻛ‬the addadi

compound/ phrase), and consists of the following points: 1. 2.

ِ Definition of ‫ى‬ ٌ ‫َﻋ َﺪد‬

‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ُﻣَﺮﱠﻛ‬ Some examples of ‫( اَﻟْ َﻌ َﺪ ُد‬the number) and ‫( اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْو ُد‬the counted/numbered noun) from Al-

Quran Al-Hakeem. 3.

ِ Use of ‫ى‬ ٌ ‫َﻋ َﺪد‬

4.

The rules for number one (1) and number two (2).

5.

The rules for numbers 3 to 10, and the utilization of these numbers in sentences.

6.

The rules for numbers 11 and 12, and the usage of these two numbers in sentences of

‫ﺐ‬ ٌ ‫ ُﻣَﺮﱠﻛ‬in sentences of daily usage.

daily usage. 7.

The accusative and the genitive case of the numbers 11 and 12.

8.

The rules for numbers 13 to 19, and usage of these numbers in daily sentences.

9.

The rule for the uqood (‫) ُﻋ ُﻘ ْﻮٌد‬, and usage of these two numbers in daily sentences.

10.

Methods for reading the Arabic numbers.

11.

The rules for numbers 21 and 22, and usage of these two numbers in daily sentences.

12.

The rules for numbers 23 to 29, and usage of these numbers in daily sentences.

13.

The ordinal numbers from 1st to 29th, and usage of these ordinal numbers in sentences of daily usage.

14.

Some fractions and their examples from Al-Quran Al-Hakeem. Leady

Objectives of 3rd part of Unit No.04 After going through this 3rd part of Unit No.04, which is very essential, you will be able: 1.

ِ to define the Addadi compound (‫ى‬ ُ ‫ﺐ اﻟ َْﻌ َﺪد‬ ُ ‫)اَﻟ ُْﻤﺮﱠﻛ‬. َ

2.

to present the examples of ‫ َﻋ َﺪ ٌد‬and ‫ َﻣ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْوٌد‬from Al-Quran Al-Majeed.

3.

to use the Arabic number in sentences of daily usage from number one onwards.

103

4.

to know the rules for number one onwards together with the ‫( ﻋُ ُﻘ ْﻮٌد‬uqud).

5.

to read the Arabic numbers like 101, 1940, 2,755, 2009, etc.

6.

to know the rules of ordinal number from 1st onwards, and to use these numbers in sentences of daily usage.

7.

to know the fractions and their examples from Al-Quran Al-Hakeem.

104

(1)‫ى‬ ‫اﻟ َْﻌ َﺪ ِد ﱡ‬

‫ﺐ‬ ُ ‫۔ اَﻟ ُْﻤ َﺮﱠﻛ‬4.3

The Addadi Composite (1)

ِ ‫ اَﻟْﻤﺮﱠﻛﺐ اﻟْﻌ َﺪ‬:ُ‫ﺗَـﻌ ِﺮﻳـ َﻔﺔ‬ ‫دد ﱡى ُﻫ َﻮ َْﳎ ُﻤ ْﻮ َﻋﺔُ اﻟْ ُﻌ َﺪ ِد َواﻟْ َﻤ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْوِد‬ ْْ َ ُ َُ

Definition: The Addadi Composite is the combination of the number (‫ )اَﻟْ َﻌ َﺪ ُد‬and the counted noun (‫اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْو ُد‬, Al-madud).

When two words are joined together, it constitutes a Composite, or a phrase or a sentence

ِ ِ ِ ٌ‫ﲨْﻠَﺔ‬, ُ e.g., ‫ﺎب‬ ٌ َ‫ ﻛﺘ‬and ‫ َواﺣ ٌﺪ‬are two ‫( ُﻣ ْﻔَﺮٌد‬mufrad) words. But when they are joined as ‫ﺎب‬ ٌ َ‫ﻛﺘ‬ ِ ‫( و‬one book), ‫ﺎن‬ ِ َ‫( ﻛِﺘَﺎ] ِن اِﺛـْﻨ‬two books), ‫ﺐ‬ ٍ ُ‫( ﺛَﻼﺛَﺔُ ُﻛﺘ‬three books), it becomes an ‫اﺣ ٌﺪ‬ َ َ

incomplete Composite or phrase. The first part of this incomplete Composite is called

‫( اَﻟْ َﻌ َﺪ ُد‬the numbers) and the second is called ‫( اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْو ُد‬the numbered noun). So, the murakkab (‫ﺐ‬ ُ ‫ )اَﻟْ ُﻤ َﺮﱠﻛ‬which is made from the number (‫ )اَﻟْ َﻌ َﺪ ُد‬and the counted noun (‫ )اَﻟْ َﻤ ْﻌ ُﺪ ْو ُد‬is ‫ى‬ ‫ﺐ اﻟْ َﻌ َﺪ ِد ﱡ‬ ُ ‫( اَﻟْ ُﻤَﺮﱠﻛ‬the Addadi c Composite).

Examples from Al-Quran Al-Hakeem:

Quranic Verses

English Translation

Ó‰Ïn≡uρ ×µ≈s9Î) ö/ä3ßγ≈s9Î)uρ

And your Ilah (Allah) is one Ilah(Allah) (2:163).

#ZŽô³tãuρ 9åκô−r& sπyèt/ö‘r& £ÎγÅ¡àΡr'Î/ zóÁ−/uŽtItƒ

(The widows) they shall wait concerning themselves four months and ten days (2:234).

×'s#ÏΒ%x. ×οuŽ|³tã y7ù=Ï?

(#θã_tyz tÏ%©!$# ’n